JP7337755B2 - heating cooker - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present disclosure relates to a heating cooker that heats an object to be heated such as a pan placed on a top plate.

There are roughly three types of heating cookers in view of the environment in which they are used.
One of them is a so-called "built-in type" installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is a "stationary type" that is placed in a predetermined position of kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas combustion table") or the like. The third type is a small and portable "desktop type" that is used by placing it at any position on a dining table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in type" heating cookers that are equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular because they can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture. The degree of difficulty is remarkably low, and the degree of difficulty to make it a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in heating cooker, an induction heating part is placed in the top plate part at the top of the main body so that the range of cooking can be expanded, and a heating chamber (" (Also referred to as a "grill chamber", but hereinafter referred to collectively as a "heating chamber"), there is a configuration in which food stored in the heating chamber is heated and cooked (for example, Patent Document 1).

Similarly, in order to expand the range of cooking, the top plate part at the top of the main body has an induction heating part, and the inside of the main body is equipped with a heating chamber heated by microwaves and a heat source, There is a configuration in which the food stored in the heating chamber is heated and cooked (for example, Patent Document 2).
A cooker equipped with a plurality of heat sources with different heating principles, such as those disclosed in Patent Documents 1 and 2, is called a composite heat cooker.

JP 2018-67413 A (page 7, FIG. 4) JP 2020-87506 (page 20, FIG. 18)

As proposed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 above, when using heat sources at multiple locations, even if the user's operation command is incorrect, unintended heat sources may operate or stop. It is necessary to take measures to prevent it. If this countermeasure is not sufficient, it may cause user confusion and cooking failure. In other words, it is necessary to overcome difficult technical problems such as coordination of a plurality of heat sources and timely notification and display of the coordination status of the heat sources to the user.

In particular, in the process of finishing one cooking, cooking is performed by moving the food to be cooked between the top plate portion and the heating chamber and heating it twice or more (hereinafter referred to as "cooking"). , When starting and stopping the heating operation of the cooking process (including the process of preheating the object to be heated such as a pot) using one heat source and the cooking process 2 using another heat source, the user is confused about the operation. case is assumed. For example, when the cooking liquid is about to overflow from the object to be heated (metal pot, etc.) and the cooking liquid is about to overflow, or when the user receives an emergency earthquake early warning and stops cooking in a hurry.

In order to solve these problems, Patent Document 1 mentioned above proposes to stop the heating of only a specific heating source by operating the main power switch. However, there is room for improvement. This can also be said for the Patent Document 2 mentioned above.

A first object of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker that can widely handle various types of cooking by improving user operability.
The second purpose of the present disclosure is to provide convenience that can be widely used for various types of cooking by appropriately coping with the device side when an abnormality occurs during the heating operation and improving the sense of security and reliability. To obtain an expensive heating cooker.

The heating cooker according to the first disclosure regarding the first object is
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a linked cooking mode that links the first heating means and the second heating means,
The linked cooking mode is for executing a cooking process 1 by the first heating means and a cooking process 2 by the second heating means,
The control unit
(1) receiving an input from the shared operation unit and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed according to commands from the individual operation unit;
(3) during the cooking step 1, disable some or all of the input functions for the second heating means in the common operating unit;
(4) when the cooking step 1 is finished, reviving the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are executed according to instructions from the shared operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the second disclosure regarding the first object is
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the first heating means,
The control unit has a function of executing a linked cooking mode that links the first heating means and the second heating means,
The linked cooking mode is for executing a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means,
The control unit
(1) receiving an input from the shared operation unit and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed according to commands from the shared operation unit;
(3) disable some or all of the input functions in the individual operation unit during the cooking process 1;
(4) when the cooking step 1 is finished, reviving the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are executed according to instructions from the individual operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the third disclosure regarding the first object is
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a linked cooking mode that links the first heating means and the second heating means,
The cooperative cooking mode includes at least two of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2,
A first cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 1 and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 2, and the second heating means is used in the cooking step 1. and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is used in the cooking step 2,
The linked cooking mode includes a linked preheating cooking mode in which a preheating step by either the first heating means or the second heating means is executed in addition to the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2,
The control unit
(1) displaying a first specific screen on the notification unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected;
(2) displaying a plurality of cooking menu candidates on the first specific screen;
(3) automatically determining one of the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode when one of the cooking menu candidates is selected;
(4) requesting input of control conditions to be applied to the selected cooking menu from the shared operation unit;
(5) restricting input functions in the individual operation unit and the common operation unit during the preheating step, the cooking step 1, and the cooking step 2;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the fourth disclosure regarding the first object is
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has an operation program for a cooperative cooking mode that drives the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2, a first cooperative cooking mode using the first heating means for the cooking process 1, and a cooking process 1 for the cooking process 1. a second coordinated cooking mode using the second heating means;
In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode,
(1) selecting the cooperative cooking mode and determining to start the cooking process 1 in the shared operation unit;
(2) When the cooking process 2 is performed by the first heating means, the cooking process 2 is completed by the individual operation unit, and the cooking process 2 is performed by the second heating means. If there is, use the common operation unit
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the fifth disclosure regarding the second object is
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
an anomaly detection unit;
an input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode for driving the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The linked cooking mode has a cooking step 1 by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the control unit
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 1;
(2) stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) the operation of the upper cooling fan continues until the stop condition A is satisfied;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the sixth disclosure regarding the second object,
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
an anomaly detection unit;
an input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode for driving the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The linked cooking mode has a cooking step 1 by the first heating means and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 2, the control unit
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 2;
(2) stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) the operation of the upper cooling fan continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means stops;
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the seventh disclosure regarding the second object is
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
an anomaly detection unit;
an input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode for driving the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The linked cooking mode has a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1, the control unit
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 1;
(2) stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) the operation of the upper cooling fan continues at least until the heating operation of the second heating means stops;
(4) The operation of the lower cooling fan continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the eighth disclosure regarding the second object,
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
an upper cooling fan that starts operating when the first heating means and the second heating means are driven;
a lower cooling fan that starts operating when the second heating means is driven;
a control unit that controls the first heating unit, the second heating unit, the notification unit, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan;
an anomaly detection unit;
an input operation unit that gives a command signal to the control unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode for driving the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The linked cooking mode has a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means,
When the abnormality detection unit detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 2, the control unit
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 2;
(2) stopping the operation of the cooperative cooking mode;
(3) the operation of the upper cooling fan continues until the stop condition A is satisfied;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the ninth disclosure regarding the first object,
the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the upper surface of the main body;
a second heating means HM2 for cooking in the heating chamber;
a reporting unit that provides information;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating hand and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit dedicated to the first heating means and a common operation unit for the second heating means and the first heating means,
The control unit has an operation program for a cooperative preheating cooking mode that drives the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode includes a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by the second heating means, a cooking step 1 of cooking by the second heating means following the preheating step, and the cooking step 1. After finishing the cooking step 2, the object to be heated used in the cooking step 1 is moved to the heating part of the first heating means to further heat the object to be cooked.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is
(1) selecting the linked preheating cooking mode and deciding to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 in the shared operation unit;
(2) the end of the preheating step and the start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit;
(3) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the common operation unit 40M;
(4) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation unit.
It is a configuration characterized by

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker capable of cooperating with a plurality of heating means to widely handle various types of cooking.

1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system between one house and the outside according to Embodiment 1; FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 1 showing the configuration of a kitchen of one house shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the entire kitchen furniture on which a built-in combined cooking device according to Embodiment 1 is installed; FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state of kitchen furniture before incorporating the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of work for incorporating the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 into kitchen furniture; FIG. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture of FIG. 5 and the heating cooker. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged front portion of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 when viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 6 is a plan view of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5; FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 11; FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 11 and showing the flow of cooling air. FIG. 13 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line WW of FIG. 12; FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line YY of FIG. 11; FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line VV of FIG. 12; FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 taken along line XX of FIG. 12; FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the right side when the heating cooker of FIG. 5 is installed in the kitchen furniture; FIG. 6 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation section of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections; FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit and an integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation section and the right display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view of the left operating portion and the left display portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 25 is a simplified schematic diagram of the main configuration shown in FIG. 24; FIG. FIG. 25 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 24; FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle; FIG. 4 is a simplified perspective view for explaining the positional relationship between cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan and the inverter circuit board; Fig. 6 is a block diagram 1 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of Fig. 5; FIG. 6 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a block diagram 3 showing main control-related parts of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing main cooling air passages of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between main (microwave grill) control menus and display areas in the integrated display section of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 and the central operation unit; 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 and the central operation unit; FIG. FIG. 6 is a list of descriptions of cooking menus in the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and in the single cooking mode of induction heating; FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order; 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in chronological order; FIG. FIG. 6 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 and the type of cooking. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process in the example of abnormality detection of the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. FIG. 6 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending operation of first to fourth cooling fans in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a time chart 2 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when cooperative cooking is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a time chart 3 showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when both the induction heating source and the oven heating source are simultaneously driven in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a control operation when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section immediately after the heating cooker of FIG. 5 is started. FIG. FIG. 6 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the left operation unit of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the left operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display section and the central operation section during compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. 6 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each input operation and process in the case of implementing cooperation cooking mode, compound cooking mode, and independent cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of cooperative cooking mode, and independent cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of cooperative cooking mode, and independent cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys and cooking processes in the input operation unit from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input operations and displays up to the transition to a combined cooking mode and a linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 1 is an explanatory drawing 1 showing a cooking process in a cooperative preheating cooking mode, which is one type of cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the cooking process of the cooperation preheating cooking mode which is 1 type of cooperation cooking modes. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 3 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 4 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; 6 is a flowchart 5 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the combined cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5; FIG. 6 is a plan view 1 showing the control operation of the input operation section and the display section (integrated display section/left display section) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a plan view and an explanatory view showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 ; 6 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 5. FIG. It is a list which shows the display content of the 1st specific screen in an integrated display part at the time of selecting cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of a display unit and an input operation unit when a cooperative cooking mode is selected; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing display contents of a display unit and an input operation unit when a cooperative cooking mode is selected; It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display content of a display part and an input operation part at the time of selecting cooperative cooking mode. Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of an integrated display unit when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of a display unit and an input operation unit when "hamburger" is cooked in a cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 7 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram 10 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram 12 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram 13 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode; It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 4 which shows the display content of an integrated display part, and an input operation part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 5 which shows the display content and input operation part of an integrated display part at the time of selecting "fried chicken" in cooperation cooking mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control action of an integrated control apparatus at the time of selecting cooperation cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing, in chronological order, exchange of information between a refrigerator and a heating cooker during cooking in a cooperative cooking mode; 111 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing exchange of information among the refrigerator, the home gateway, and the heating cooker in the example shown in FIG. 110; FIG. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when cooking “fried chicken” in the cooperative cooking mode in the example shown in FIG. 110 ; 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the example shown in FIG. 110; FIG. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the heating cooker is started in the example shown in FIG. 110; 111 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the heating cooker is started in the example shown in FIG. 110; FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the heating cooker is started in the example shown in FIG. 110; FIG. Figure 111 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway in the case shown in Figure 110; It is the flowchart which showed the operation|movement of the integrated control apparatus which shows the example of utilization of the inventory information of a refrigerator. 116 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in the example of FIG. 115. FIG. 116 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in the example of FIG. 115. FIG. FIG. 115 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker in the example of FIG. 115 ; FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of the built-in composite cooking device according to Embodiment 2; FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode and the cooking process, etc., in the heating cooker of FIG. 122 ; FIG. 10 is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections in the heating cooker according to Embodiment 3; FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode and the cooking process, etc., in the heating cooker of FIG. 124 ; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode and the cooking process, etc., in the heating cooker according to Embodiment 4;

(definition)
A “household appliance” 400 is an electrical appliance designed mainly for home use. The home appliances 400 include an induction heating cooker 1, a refrigerator 401, a television receiver 402, an air conditioner 403, an air cleaner 404, a ventilator 405, an electric rice cooker (including an electric jar rice cooker) 406, A microwave oven 408, a lighting fixture 409, and an air purifier 410 are included. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the term "refrigerator" includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The “device identification information” of home appliance 400 is unique information for specifying home appliance 400 . Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, the manufacturer's name of the home appliance 400, the model name (model name), the model number, the serial number, and the like.

A “home gateway” 411 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participates in coordinated operations. In addition to this, it gives an operation command signal to one home appliance 400 or performs an operation of acquiring information (also referred to as “data”) from one home appliance 400 .

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function for all or part of the home appliances 400 in order to manage the total power consumption of one household. In some cases, it may be called a “power control device” or “integrated management device”.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information about the current status of the electric home appliance 400, such as operation, stop, standby state, etc., from the electric home appliance 400 via a wired or wireless signal.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 400 using the device identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or a "power command device" for one home appliance (for example, the induction heating cooker 1) 400, other home appliances ( For example, if the lighting equipment 409) does not limit power consumption, it does not correspond to the "integrated management device" or the "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, the total power consumption combined with the power consumption of the other home appliances 400 does not exceed the specified upper limit of the total power consumption. This is the case where there is no function for regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 409 itself. Therefore, the home gateway 411 is neither an integrated management device nor a power command device when viewed from the lighting equipment 409 .

Embodiment 1.
1 to 121 disclose the first embodiment. In this Embodiment 1, a built-in composite type (induction) heating cooker 1 is disclosed. It should be noted that in the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it will simply be referred to as a "cooker".
In each figure, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the heating cooker 1, and the symbol LE indicates the left direction. FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this Embodiment 1, the "first heating means" HM1 is an induction heating source 9, a gas combustor (burner) (not shown), or the like, which heats the food on the top plate 15. Means for heating the object to be heated N containing The object to be heated N is, for example, a metal pot or frying pan.

In the following description, the term "object to be heated N placed on the top plate" refers to the case where the object to be heated N such as a pan is directly placed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to be described later, and the case where the object to be heated N is placed directly on the upper surface of the top plate 15, which will be described later. (burner), etc., includes both when the object to be heated N is placed on a supporting member such as a trivet placed above the top plate and heated.

In this Embodiment 1, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heating source for heating the food stored in the heating chamber 113, which will be described later.

In Embodiment 1, a plurality of heat sources having different heating principles are provided. The heating source may be a microwave heating source 189, an oven heating source 188, or a gas combustor (burner) (not shown), which will be described later. A microwave heating source 189 and a plurality of heating sources that exert heating effects according to other heating principles may be provided. Furthermore, the second heating means may be a steam generator (boiler) that supplies high temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

In this Embodiment 1, the "induction heating cooker" refers to a device having a heating portion for induction heating of the object N to be heated. When there are multiple heating units, heating is performed using a method other than the induction heating method, such as a radiant electric heat source (sheathed heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.). A heating source may be provided.

In this Embodiment 1, the "composite heating cooker" has a plurality of heating sources with different heating principles, such as the relationship between the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater, etc. It means that cooking can be performed in one heating chamber 113 by these two types of heat sources. The heating chamber 113 may be heated by both an oven heating source 188 composed of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Furthermore, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113 .

In this Embodiment 1, the “heating means (hereinafter referred to as “oven heating source”)” of the heating chamber 113 means a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and the inside of the heating chamber 113. Any heat source installed in the space may be used.
In addition, a heat generating member that becomes high temperature by an induction heating method is arranged, and the heat generating member heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside or heats the air inside the heating chamber 113. good.

For example, in Japanese Patent Documents, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-74305 discloses a second heating element ( A heating cooker has been proposed that includes an induction heating coil) and a third heating body (induction heating coil) that heats the food to be cooked from the side.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-85996, an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and the IH heat Arrangements have been proposed for inductively heating a cooking plate placed over a coil. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be heated by induction. For example, iron, stainless steel, a carbon material having a carbon content of 90% or more, and a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferro-silicon) as a conductive material are used.

In addition, as a representative example of arranging a heat-generating member that becomes hot by an induction heating method, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses that a high-frequency current is supplied to an IH coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. A high-frequency magnetic flux is interlinked with a heater arranged in a heating chamber so that an induced current flows through the heater, and the food to be cooked in the heating chamber is cooked by Joule heat generated by the electric resistance of the heater itself. is disclosed.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-247048, an electrically closed circuit heater is arranged inside the heating chamber, and a high-frequency magnetic flux generated from an IH coil arranged outside the heating chamber is linked to the heater. It has been proposed to heat the heater to a high temperature to dissipate heat into the heating chamber. The heater here is an electrically closed circuit formed by bending a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high-nickel alloy into a predetermined shape and joining the ends together by welding or brazing. It is formed in an endless shape.

As a representative example of the "IH coil" referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of the bundles are twisted into a spiral shape. (For example, Japanese patent document, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is one that is configured by winding about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm.

Another patent document, JP-A-2018-32551, proposes an induction heating cooker using an annular conductor made of a flat plate-like conductive material and formed in an annular shape as an IH coil.
Any one of these forms corresponds to the “IH coil” which is the main part of the induction heating source 9 .

In this Embodiment 1, the term "coordinated cooking" refers to two or more different heating locations for one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) and for which heating operation conditions can be set independently. Cooking using a heat source.

The above-mentioned "cooperation cooking" corresponds to a case where a plurality of heat sources are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after completing microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another place, and at the place after the movement, it is heated by the IH coil 17L described later. In the case, it is a kind of "cooperation cooking" referred to here.

In addition, the object to be cooked is heated by a gas burner (burner) inside the heating chamber 113, and then the object to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 15 and heated by the gas burner (burner) or the induction heating source 9. Another form of ``co-cooking'' is to heat the food to improve the degree of perfection of the cooking.

Coordinated cooking has been proposed in the form of a built-in heating cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and home appliance operation management system)
First, the operation management system for home appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA indicates one house.
Although not shown, the inside of the house HA is partitioned into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors. One living space, the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), contains a refrigerator 401, an induction Household appliances 400 such as a heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, and kitchen furniture 2 are arranged. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the living space includes a "living room", a "bathroom", and a room with a toilet. The living space may have other rooms.

Electric power of, for example, 200 V is supplied to all living spaces from a commercial power supply EP of an electric power company outside the house. The power is drawn into the house HA via the electricity meter 414 .

415 is a power supply line (main trunk line) connected to a commercial power supply EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. This power line 415 is connected to a television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, and a home gateway. 411, a wireless router 419 and an environment detection unit 413 are connected respectively.

Home gateway 410, environment detector 413, TV receiver 402, air conditioner 403, heating cooker 1, refrigerator 401, and lighting equipment 409 are always connected to power line 415 via a predetermined power cord. Note that although there is more than one lighting fixture 409, the other lighting fixtures are omitted from the drawing.

Next, FIG. 1 will be explained.
416 is a wide area telecommunications network (sometimes referred to as a "communications network" or "Internet").
This wide area network 416 is connected to home gateway 411 via wireless router 419 .

417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and information communication terminal equipment 418 . For example, it may be a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider in a specific area or an electric power company, or a server prepared by the manufacturer that manufactured the heating cooker 1 . This external server may be a distributed processing type server called a so-called "cloud server". It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" using cloud servers: "IaaS", "PaaS", and "SaaS".

Home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from external server 417 . This content also includes recipe information (characters and images) for various types of cooking.

Although not shown, the environment sensor of the environment detection unit 413 may be additionally provided with a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor for detecting the temperature and humidity outside the house.

Also, the external server 417 functions as information providing means for the home appliance 400 . In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as a manufacturer (manufacturer) of the home appliance 400, a dealer, a repairer, or an information service provider, or may be installed jointly by two or more organizations. , provides various services related to the home appliance 400 to the user via the wide area communication network 416 .

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "web server" (hereinafter referred to as "web server"). The web server follows HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between a web server and a web browser), and various information communication terminal devices 418, home gateways 410, etc. It refers to a service program that provides display information such as HTML and objects (images, etc.) to the web browser of information processing equipment (client) side software on the "receiving side" and a server computer that operates the service.

The external server 417 stores control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or its remote location. From the information communication terminal device 418, which will be described in detail later, for example, a device called a smart phone, the aforementioned remote control can be realized by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) control application software. can be done.

The information communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by the user to make calls and communicate data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or on the go. It is a device that can download information from an outdoor information providing site via the wide area communication network 416, send and receive e-mails, and send remote control signals. Communication devices are collectively called information communication terminal devices 418 . A small portable personal computer is also a kind of information communication terminal equipment 418 .

The information communication terminal device 418 according to the first embodiment has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication while being in proximity (or may be brought into contact) with the input/output unit of each home appliance 400 by several centimeters. I have. The short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 400 side including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data (also referred to as a “control command”) from the information communication terminal device 418 side to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400 and control the home appliance 400 according to the control command.

In this Embodiment 1, direct remote operation from the information communication terminal device 418 to the home appliance 400 side is prohibited. Some of the home appliances 400 generate high heat, such as the heating cooker 1, so remote control from outside the house 413 via the Internet used by many people is not adopted. Instead, as an integrated information processing device, all home appliances 400 can be operated via the home gateway 411 .

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 of the first embodiment is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 and causes them to operate in cooperation. In addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as data) from one home appliance 400 is performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, a range hood 422 and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 404, which will be described later, are installed in the kitchen KT in the house HA.

413 A is the sensor unit of the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411 . Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sensor unit 413A includes an environment sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a human sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (using infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). and have Note that the environment detection unit 413 will be described later in detail.

The "environmental information" refers to temperature information of the atmosphere of the space (kitchen KT) where the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light amount information. The scattered dust amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

“Use of environmental information” includes the following examples.
(1) When the temperature is high, the heat retaining function of the electric rice cooker 406 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process is finished. Also, the refrigerating target temperature and freezing target temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode." Alternatively, the operation of the ventilator 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (target room temperature, etc.) are changed.
(3) Operate the air purifier 404 when fine dust that floats in the air is scattered. Alternatively, the operation of the ventilator 405 is started.
(4) When the pollen scattering amount is large, the operation of the air purifier 404 is started.
(5) When the amount of light (the amount of visible light) is small, turn on the lighting device 409 .

"Resident" means a person who lives in one house HA shown in FIG. Residents include relatives such as parents and children, brothers and sisters. It should be noted that when using home appliance 400, the term "user" is used regardless of whether the person is a resident or not.

A "household" means one house HA managed by a specific manager, and may also include a multi-family dwelling with multiple rooms. That is, even in such collective housing, the upper limit of commercial power is centrally managed by one power interruption device (one breaker BK, or a plurality of power breakers, etc.) as in the case of one house HA. If so, it is regarded as a household here.

“Home appliance side power limit information” refers to information regarding any signal received by home appliance 400 from home gateway 411 regarding power consumption. The "power limit information on the home appliance side" includes information on transmission commands such as a power reduction request signal AS1, a power reduction command signal AS2, etc., which will be described later. The information includes information indicating when the signal was received (year, month and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, it is information about the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time to the heating cooker 1, such as "transmission time: July 29, 2020, 17:00, momentary maximum power consumption reduced by 2%".

For example, in the heating cooker 1, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC, which will be described later. do not have. Turning on and off the main power switch 98 is regarded as one cooking, and at least several times are stored in memory. Any excess is automatically deleted.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of hardware to which the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment and the operation management system for home electrical appliances are applied. As one living space, the kitchen KT will be described below as an example.

The kitchen KT to which Embodiment 1 is applied includes an air purifier 404 installed on a ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a plurality of freezer compartments 401A having different freezing temperatures, and a refrigerator compartment 401B. A refrigerator 401, a microwave oven 408, a built-in (induction) heating cooker 1 arranged in the kitchen furniture 2, a range hood (a kind of ventilation device 405) 422 arranged directly above the heating cooker 1, a home - Gateways 411 are installed respectively. The illustration of the electric rice cooker 406, the air conditioner 403, and the lighting equipment 409 described in FIG. 1 is omitted.

The plurality of freezer compartments 401A in the refrigerator 401 have freezing temperatures suitable for frozen foods (including processed foods) and perishable foods (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C ± 2°C, -10°C, and -2°C. (temperature zone) can be selected.

In addition, the freezing temperature and the freezing temperature range affect the ripening of perishable ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time. can be changed.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outdoors is connected to the exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 denotes a hood whose entire lower surface is open as a suction port 425A, and an electric fan 426 for exhaust is installed inside this hood. In addition, although this range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, the detailed configuration thereof will not be described.

The operation status of the range hood 422 is transmitted to the central control unit 447 (described later in detail) of the home gateway 411 as needed. Therefore, inside the range hood 422, a transmission unit ( (not shown) and a receiver (not shown). For example, the transmission section and the reception section are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication section 427 . This communication unit 427 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is driven to rotate, air is sucked from the suction port 425A of the cooker hood 422, and the odor and smoke generated during cooking are also sucked in and exhausted through the duct 424 to the outside of the house HA. Note that the range hood 422 is of a type that receives an operation signal such as an infrared signal from the heating cooker 1 side and starts the exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, an arrow FF1 indicates an air current rising from the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. FF2 indicates the exhaust flow from duct 424; FF3 shows the airflow moving laterally near the ceiling surface 420 . FF4 indicates the airflow blown out from the air cleaner 404 .

A heat sensing sensor (thermoelectromotive force element) may be arranged on the range hood 422 toward the cooking device 1 . According to this configuration, the range hood 422 itself senses the start of operation of the heating cooker 1 and controls the operation of the electric fan 426 itself.

Ceiling-embedded air cleaner 404 is installed in a manner embedded in ceiling surface 420 . A blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided inside a box-shaped main body 428 of the air cleaner 404 .

431 is an air guide plate covering the entire lower portion of the air cleaner 404 . 432 is a suction port formed by the air guide plate 431 at one end (the side close to the cooker hood 422). A blowout port 433 is formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite to the suction port 432 .

The blower fan 429 sucks the dirty air in the kitchen from the suction port 432 and discharges the cleaned air through the filter 430 from the blowout port 433 toward the lower part of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the indoor air is purified.

434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404 and is arranged so as to face the inlet of the suction port 432 . This detects odors from the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of contamination of the air. As long as the position of the odor sensor 434 is in the air passage on the side of the suction port 432 and is in front of the filter 430, there is no significant difference in the effect regardless of the position.

Based on the detection result of the odor sensor 434, an odor sensing unit (not shown) arranged inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404 determines the strength of the odor. It is transmitted to the environment detection unit 413 as needed. For this reason, inside the air purifier 404, there is a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits various information such as the start and stop of the air cleaning operation and the determination result of the odor intensity to the home gateway 411. , and a receiver (not shown). For example, the transmission section and the reception section are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication section 435 . The communication unit 435 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 421 can detect the odor when the air purifier 404 is in operation and when the odor generated somewhere in the kitchen KT reaches the air purifier 404 from the place of origin. is.

This air purifier 404 generally has one or a plurality of (multiple layers) filters 430 having fine air passages for trapping dust, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oil smoke generated by cooking using edible oil (for example, “fried food” and “tempura”) is filtered by the heat cooker 1, oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430, and the oil particles are removed. Combine to form an oil film.
Due to this oil film, the filtering performance of the filter 430 is lowered. That is, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 is reduced, leading to a situation in which the air purification capability of the air purifier 404 is reduced. Therefore, the idea of avoiding the operation of the air cleaner 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by heat cooking contains oily smoke generated by oil cooking has already been proposed (for example, Patent Document JP-A-2016- 95126).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is depicted as being installed in the vicinity of the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in actual situations it may be installed at a different location from that shown in FIG. Moreover, not only one refrigerator 401 but also a plurality of refrigerators 401 may be used.

A reference numeral 412 denotes a main body case forming an outer shell of the home gateway 411 . The main body case 412 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to confirm input operations and displays.

445 is an alarm device fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, which will be described later in detail. 2D is a water supply port 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2 .

Next, FIG. 3 will be described. FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the heating cooker 1 and the range hood 422. As shown in FIG.
In FIG. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the heating cooker 1 . In the first embodiment, this temperature monitoring device is one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 on hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection section 441 and a communication section 442 . The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal image camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is always energized regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422 even though it is one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 constantly monitors the temperature even when the exhaust operation is not performed.

The temperature detection unit 441, for example, divides the entire region of the top plate 15, which will be described later, into at least 64 regions (8 vertical×8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as “detection regions”), and detects the temperature of each region. To detect.

The detection area includes an induction heating section 17H of the heating cooker 1, which will be described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area at predetermined time intervals not only during the operation of the range hood 421 but also while the operation is stopped.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits monitoring information on the measured temperature from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411 . In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration of directly transmitting to the heating cooker 1 may be employed. Also, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining temperature monitoring information is not fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds), but the time interval is shortened in a region where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving part 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmission part 48 of the heating cooker 1, the range hood 421 is started to operate. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the heating cooker 1 when the range hood 421 starts operating.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating that the operation of the cooking device 1 is finished. Then, the acquisition of temperature information is continued at predetermined time intervals until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 15 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature (for example, 40° C.). It should be noted that the interval between the temperature measurement operations is delayed when the temperature becomes lower than the predetermined temperature. When the temperature becomes low, the monitoring operation as described above may be temporarily terminated, but at least at the start of the operation of the heating cooker 1, the temperature monitoring operation is started again.

The heating cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the heating cooker 1, and 114 is a door that covers a front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 so as to be openable and closable.

The heating cooker 1 places an object N to be heated, such as a pot or frying pan made of magnetic metal, on a top plate 15 covering the upper surface thereof, and induction-heats the object N with an IH coil 17 . 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the heating cooker 1 into two upper and lower spaces.

CK is an installation space above the bottom wall surface 16S, in which the IH coil 17 is accommodated.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between home gateway 411, home appliance 400, and temperature monitoring device 440. As shown in FIG. Note that the heating cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408 among the home appliances 400 are subject to power consumption control from the home gateway 411 .
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also serves as a power command device for the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408, but since this point has been explained before, it will not be explained in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also the home appliance 400 subject to power consumption control.

The power amount control unit 448 constantly acquires information on the amount of power used from target home appliances (eg, the cooking device 1 and the microwave oven 408), and does not exceed the preset total power amount. , has a function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliance 400, and is already known by the name of HEMS (home power management system).

When the power amount control unit 448 acquires information indicating a power reduction request or a power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, the target home appliances (for example, the heating cooker 1 and , microwave oven 408, and air conditioner 403).

In this case, the information (command signal) received by the heating cooker 1 is the power reduction request signal AS1, the power reduction command signal AS2, and the like.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection section 413 that incorporates a human detection section 413H that receives the detection output of a human detection sensor 452 . The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown), a sensor for detecting temperature and humidity in the kitchen, etc., in the form of data in a predetermined format. 453 is an environmental sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen KT.

The human detection sensor 452 detects the presence of people in the kitchen KT, especially in the area in front of the heating cooker 1 and in front of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401 . One or a plurality of the human detection sensors 452 are installed inside the kitchen KT.

For example, when the distance between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is close, the human sensor is placed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT toward the space between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401. 452 is installed.

In addition, when the distance between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is slightly away, one human detection sensor 452 points toward the space in the vicinity of the front of the heating cooker 1, toward the ceiling surface of the kitchen KT. 420 or the like. Another human detection sensor 453 is preferably installed on the ceiling surface 420 or the like of the kitchen KT facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401 .

A human detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect the presence of the user in front of the cooker 1 .
As described above, the locations where the human sensors 452 and 453 are installed may be appropriately determined in consideration of the positional relationship between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking device 1 and the sensing capabilities of the human sensors.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one sensor of the environment detection unit 413. A home detection device (not shown) for detecting that a person is inside the house HA, that is, in the kitchen KT or the like. You may make it function as one sensor of. In that case, information from an unlocking sensor or the like that detects that the door of the entrance (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used by the home detecting device. As a result, it is possible to improve the accuracy in the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

An input unit 449 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input type keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. As one of the functions, it is possible to specify the electric home appliance 400 for which the upper limit value of power consumption is to be set, and then set the upper limit value of power consumption, the usable time period, and the like. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the heating cooker 1, such as 4800W and 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function of inputting by operating the touch input type keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen, as well as a function of inputting by voice. You can input various functions you want by emitting toward the ).

445 is an alarm device that alerts the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440 and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445 . Since the alarm device 445 is not controlled by the power amount control unit 448, power is not limited or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 400. FIG.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further comprises a communication section (receiving section/transmitting section) 446 , a central control section 447 and a storage device 450 .
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit that can individually perform wireless communication or infrared communication with the electrical appliances 400 such as the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 stores operating history information of the home gateway 411, daily power control history information of the home appliance 400, daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413, and the like. It is a device that records a large amount of information. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories, an HDD, or the like.

The central control unit 447 incorporates a microcomputer serving as the core of information processing, a ROM and a RAM, and stores computer programs that define various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a communication unit (receiving unit/transmitting unit) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wide area communication network (Internet) for wireless communication via a wireless router 419 .

In FIG. 4, only one communication unit 446 is shown in the home gateway 411, but the communication unit (receiving unit/transmitting unit) for the home appliance 400 and the communication unit for the wireless router 419 are separately provided. may be set to Also, an NFC communication unit may be provided separately so that information can be directly exchanged with NFC (Near Field Communication) provided in the information communication terminal device 418 by wireless communication.

451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store schedule information of events for at least January (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In the first embodiment, the input unit 449 can register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (for example, shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

If the event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451, the schedule management unit 451 issues a notification when the stored date and time come. The form of notification is display on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449, or notification by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a method of issuing a notification to the information communication terminal device 418 possessed by the resident may be used.

When the electric home appliance 400 such as the heating cooker 1 is activated, the schedule management unit 451 may notify based on the registered event information.

(Overview of heating cooker)
Next, referring to FIGS. 5 to 121, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described.
In FIG. 5, the heating cooker 1 is a built-in type heating cooker incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. 2A is an installation opening formed in the kitchen furniture 2 . The heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power supply 99 as described later.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, the heating cooker 1 has two right and left heating portions 17L and 17R.
In FIG. 19 , CL 1 indicates a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates a range where the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100 .

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating section (corresponding to a "first heating section") provided in a range on the right side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed just above this.
17HL is a left heating section (corresponding to a "second heating section") provided in a range on the left side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. As described above, the heating cooker 1 is a cooker provided with two “heating ports” (heating portions) on the upper surface of the top plate 15 .

In addition, another induction heating unit is provided between the right heating unit (first heating unit) 17HR and the left heating unit (second heating unit) 17HL so as to straddle the left-right center line CL1. ) may be used as a heating cooker. Alternatively, any one of the IH coils 17L and 17R (details will be described later) constituting the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL may be replaced with a radiant heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference number when referring to an "induction heating section".

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate the desired positions for placing the object to be heated N (see FIG. 3) such as a metal pan or plate (grilled plate). , are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15 . The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 by printing.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the heating cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating portions 17H on the left and right. It should be noted that the user can also recognize that there are two induction heating units on the left and right by the voice guidance of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later.

Immediately below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not have to be circular. For example, only the central point of the desired position where the object to be heated N is placed may be indicated by a figure, a symbol such as "+", or letters. .

Since the position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks indicating the approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, they are drawn with a slightly larger diameter than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R .

In the first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as IH coils, reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when the term "IH coil" 17 is used, it may be either the left IH coil 17L or the right IH coil 17R.

In this Embodiment 1, unless otherwise specified, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L, which will be described later.

(basics of heating source and control menu)
The heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 includes three types of heating means with different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 is a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (second heating source). 3 heating source).

The three heating sources described above can be used as follows.
(1) Since the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, each heating source can be used for cooking. This form of operation pattern is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) By using the induction heating source 9 and at least one of the oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 together, one cooking can be performed using two or more different locations. . This form of operation pattern is the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together for one cooking. This operation pattern is the "compound cooking mode" KM2. The term "operation pattern" used herein refers to the case where the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in series, operated simultaneously, or operated with a time lag. including any of

(4) The induction heating source 9 has a dedicated input operation section. Specifically, a right operating section (first individual operating section) 40R and a left operating section (second individual operating section) 40L. By operating the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L, it is possible to start the induction heating operation, set the heating conditions (thermal power, etc.), and stop the induction heating operation.
(5) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have dedicated input controls. The central operation unit 40M is shared. Therefore, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "common operation unit".

(6) There is no superiority relationship between the single cooking mode KM1 using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the combined cooking mode KM2. . The rule is that the cooking of the heating source that started to be used first is given priority. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to select a cooperative cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating unit 17HR has already performed a single heating operation for another cooking, Since the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating source is partially restricted in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(7) Regarding the input operation, there is a superiority relationship between single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. no. Therefore, for example, if you attempt to set the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and leave the input halfway without shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (for example, for 30 seconds without inputting anything), it automatically switches to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The input up to is canceled. In the middle of the standing state, for example, if an input for the single cooking mode KM1 is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9, the induction heating cooking can be started.

(8) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a "first cooperative cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking process (cooking process 1), and an oven heating mode in the first cooking process (cooking process 1). and a “second coordinated cooking mode” using at least one of the source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 . This will be explained later with reference to FIG.

(9) The linked cooking mode KM3 has a "linked preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating process. The execution of the preheating step in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2 is also one form of the "coordinated preheating cooking mode", but this form will be described in detail in the first embodiment. do not have.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the heating cooker 1 is placed and supported on the rim upper surface 2P of the installation opening 2A. As shown in FIG. 6, the kitchen furniture 2 in the first embodiment includes a water tank 2CP that can temporarily store water coming out of a water supply port 2D. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2 . The front opening 2B is for exposing front components (a door 114 and a front cover 112, which will be described later) forward when the heating cooker 1 is installed.

If the sizes of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 are standard, they are mostly formed in advance with standard dimensions because standardization is promoted by the industry. be. More on this later.

A typical method of incorporating the cooking device 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. This FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of incorporating into the kitchen furniture 2 .
As shown in FIG. 7, while the front side (front side) of the heating cooker 1 is tilted downward, the heating cooker 1 is inserted into the installation opening 2A, and then the rear side of the heating cooker 1 is placed. is lowered as indicated by a solid-line arrow BD, the heating cooker 1 is placed on the periphery of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG.

After that, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) a fixing metal fitting (not shown) installed on the rear periphery of the lower unit 100 to be described later, and the fixing metal fitting is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. to complete the installation. Since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, detailed description of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 is combined and integrated with the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 stacked vertically. shipped from the manufacturer. Therefore, in the assembling work of FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is (directly) fixed to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screws. The entire heating cooker 1 can be removed from the kitchen furniture 2 by removing the fixing metal fittings (not shown). Thereby, after that, inspection and repair can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2. - 特許庁In addition, when calling only the upper unit 100 as a "main body", the code|symbol 10 is attached and distinguished.

In this Embodiment 1, the “main body case” HC is a general term for the upper case 16 forming the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 forming the outer shell of the lower unit 200 . Note that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in FIG. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation opening 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, 3 and 4 are surface materials forming the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to the left and right sides when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2 .
The front surfaces of these surface members 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooking device 1 when the cooking device 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2.例文帳に追加In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated, the surface members 3 to 6 and the heating cooker 1 can provide the user with a sense of design as if they are on a unified plane.

In FIG. 7, reference numeral 8 denotes a wall that vertically divides the interior of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms, and the area below this wall is often used as a storehouse for kitchen utensils, food, and the like. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in FIG. Moreover, the form installed in the inside of the kitchen furniture 2 so that the wall 8 may become removable may be sufficient.

With the configuration described above, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents substantially one plane. When the user sees the kitchen furniture 2, it is designed so that the front (front) as a whole can be recognized as having a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the heat cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer. They are often on sale.

5 and 6, reference numeral 7 denotes a frame line printed on the front surfaces of the surface materials 3-5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surfaces of the surface materials 3-5. In addition, it is also possible to attach a thin glossy metal veneer, tape, or the like to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 to give a sense of quality. Conversely, the frame line 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Moreover, these surface members 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors and drawers. For example, it may always exist on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 in a fixed state and not move at all.

If the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 are unified in front surface color and surface form (pattern, presence/absence of gloss, unevenness, etc.), the sense of uniform design of the kitchen furniture 2 is enhanced. For example, if the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified in a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified in the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the heating cooker 1 in FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged front portion of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG.

In addition to the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) for kitchen furniture 2, etc., standardization (common) of housing parts and materials is being promoted by the "Long-term Use Housing Materials Standardization Promotion Council" (abbreviation: Nagajukyo) in Japan.

According to the "Long-term Use Material Standards for IH Cooking Heaters (Built-in)" enacted by the "Choujukyo", the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) on which the IH cooking heater is installed are as follows. stipulated.
(1) The installation opening 2A has a width dimension W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front descending portion 2F should be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-rear direction) dimension D3 of the front descending portion 2F should be 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling portion depth (front-rear direction) dimension D2 of the front descending portion 2F should be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned "Long-term use parts standards", the external dimensions of the built-in type IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom edge of the top plate to the bottom edge of the front panel must be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure is designed so as to satisfy various constraints as described above.
In FIG. 8, A1 is the longitudinal dimension of the top plate 15, which will be described later, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum longitudinal dimension from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rear end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is the longitudinal dimension from the inclined portion 111 formed in the rear portion of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. Further, the front cover 112 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and has several protruding mounting legs 112P formed on the rear side to which it is attached (see FIG. 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into a plurality of vertical fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slid downward a little to engage the mounting legs 112P with the fitting holes. I am trying to In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by fasteners (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upward, so that the front cover 112 is attached to the lower case 101 .

In FIG. 8, reference numeral 113 denotes a heating chamber entirely formed of a thin metal plate, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200 . An opening 113A (see FIG. 15) is formed in the front surface of the heating chamber 113 through which cooking utensils (objects to be heated N) such as frying pans or objects to be cooked can be taken in and out. The opening 113A is covered with a door 114 so that it can be opened and closed.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two left and right arms 116 (see FIG. 12) so that the front surface of the door 114 is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115. (not shown) are rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110 . Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at its lower end as a fulcrum (rotating center).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front surface of the cooker 1 by an expert such as a store or an installer after the cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 . The door 114 is installed at the stage of shipping the cooking device 1 from the factory, so that it cannot be removed later by a person other than a specialist, that is, a user of each household. This prevents microwaves from leaking from the interior of the heating chamber 113 due to poor sealing of the door 114 after installation.

In FIG. 8 , H1 is the maximum height dimension of the heating cooker 1 . That is, the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is the height dimension from the lower end of the top plate 15 to the lower end of the front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the top end to the bottom end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15 and is 11 mm. With such a dimensional relationship, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is secured below the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112, respectively. It is designed to be

Next, FIG. 10 will be described. 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIGS. 1 and 2; FIG. In FIG. 10, 2G denotes stepped portions formed at both left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion where the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, approaches and faces. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is about 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 to 24. FIG.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line ZZ in FIG. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line ZZ in FIG. 11 and showing the flow of the cooling air. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line WW in FIG. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line YY in FIG. FIG. 16 is a longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line VV in FIG. FIG. 17 is a longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line XX of FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the right side when the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation section 40 of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 20 is a plan view of the front portion of the cooking device 1 for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section 40 and various display sections. FIG. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation portion 40R and the right display portion 31R of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation section 40L and the left display section 31L of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the heating cooker 1. FIG.

(Characteristic overall configuration and function of the heating cooker)
Before entering the detailed description in Embodiment 1, the whole image of the heating cooker 1 described in Embodiment 1 will be described below.

(1) A top plate 15 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is induced by an induction heating source 9 which is one of the first heating means HM1. Can be heated.

(2) A heating chamber 113 whose front opening is closed by a door 114 is provided inside the main body case HC.

(3) At least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, which are one of the second heating means HM2, or It has both.

(4) The body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, the upper space 300A having an upper air passage AH, and the lower space 300B having a lower air passage UH. there is

(5) Upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are arranged in the upper air passage AH. Outside air is introduced into the upper air passage AH by upper cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the lower space 300B.

(6) Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are arranged in the lower air passage UH. Outside air is introduced into the lower air passage UH by lower cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the upper space 300A.

(7) The induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fan, and the lower cooling fan are integrally controlled by an integrated controller MC. The integrated control unit MC centrally controls the individual control units such as the IH control unit 90, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the like.

(8) Power is supplied to the integrated control device MC via one main power operation unit (main power switch) 98 operated by the user.

(9) It has an input operation unit 40 for receiving a user's command, and the input operation unit 40 has a function of giving commands to start and stop the heat cooking operation to the integrated control device MC.

(10) There are three types of cooking modes executed by the integrated control device MC: a single cooking mode KM1, a combined cooking mode KM2, and a cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(11) At least two of the plurality of heat sources to be driven and the order in which the heat sources are driven are defined in the cooperative cooking mode and the composite cooking mode.

(12) When any one of the three cooking modes is selected, a specific screen for informing the user of the cooking mode and control conditions is displayed before starting the heating operation (operation). The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is the first specific screen 30SP, the combined cooking mode KM2 is the second specific screen, and the single cooking mode KM1 is the third specific screen 30ST.

(13) Since the induction heating source 9 has a dedicated operating section (individual operating section), the user can first select a "control menu" (for example, "water boiler") based on the heating source.

(14) The third specific screen ST is displayed only when the induction heating source 9 is selected. This is because the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected only for the induction heating source 9 by means of the dedicated individual operation sections 40L and 40R.

(15) Since the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 do not have dedicated operation units (individual operation units) and use the common operation unit 40M, the control menu can be selected first based on the heating source. Can not. That is, neither the microwave heating source 189 nor the oven heating source 188 can initially select the single cooking mode KM1.

(16) The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 share the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2. Therefore, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected on the shared operation unit 40M, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, and the specific control menu (for example, "manual range", "warming" displayed in the second specific screen 30SC) is displayed. ”), the single cooking mode KM1 can finally be selected. Due to such a configuration, the third specific screen 30ST is exceptionally configured not to be displayed.

(17) The integrated controller MC has a function of detecting an abnormality while the heating cooker 1 is in operation. There are multiple types of abnormalities that can be detected, but the main one is overheating of the upper space 300A in which the induction heating source 9 is built.

(18) During the heat cooking operation, if the main power supply is cut off by the main power source operation unit (main power switch) 98, all the heat cooking operations and the cooking process of the cooking mode are stopped, but the upper cooling fan 60 that has been operating is stopped. , 61 or the lower cooling fans 128, 129 continue to operate for a limited time or depending on the temperature environment.

(19) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is a cooking method in which one food is heated in at least two different places, the inner space of the heating chamber 113 and the upper space of the top plate 15. , the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 may be operated with a time difference or may be operated in the same time zone.

(20) A preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N with the induction heating source 9 or the oven heating source 188 may be either the case of operating with the time difference or the case of operating in the same time zone. The control unit MC can execute a preheating step of preheating the heating chamber 113 in (this is called a "coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4" in the coordinating cooking mode KM3).

(21) When executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, at least two cooking processes (cooking process 1 and cooking process 2) are performed. can. Also, the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 that has been started can be ended at an intermediate stage by the input operation unit 40 .

(22) When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, it is possible to cancel (cancel) the selection of the cooperative cooking mode before starting the execution.

(23) When executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the order of the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2 is determined by the control program of the control unit MC before execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. be.

(24) The preheating process can be terminated at any time by the input operation unit 40 . The setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not canceled by the termination.

(25) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be stopped halfway after the cooking process 1 is started. At the stage when the cooking process 1 is completed (including when the user terminates it at any time), reservation (exclusive use) for the heating source (heating part in the case of an induction heating source) used in the cooking process 1 Relationships can be automatically released. Therefore, when the heating source used in the cooking process 1 is the first heating means HM1 (for example, the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9), the first heating means HM1 (the induction heating source 9 , the right heating section 17HR) can be used for other cooking.

(26) The upper air passage AH formed inside the upper space 300A by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 and the lower air passage UH formed in the lower space 300B by the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are: Since the outside air intake ports are located at different positions, the outside air is individually introduced into the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B from the outside of the main body case HC, and then discharged to the outside. .

(27) The lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated according to the operation of the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189, and cool the cooling target portions of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. .

(28) The integrated control device MC detects an abnormality in the range of the top plate 15 or the upper space 300A, etc., and starts the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 during execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In the case of automatic stop, if the second heating means HM2 has started the cooking process in the lower space 300B, the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 is also stopped. Then, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled.

(29) There is a notification unit AN that notifies the operational status of the heating cooker 1 . The notification unit has an initial standby screen 30D that displays information immediately after the main power is turned on by the main power operation unit (main power switch) 98, and a second screen that displays information during execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. A display unit (integrated display unit 30) for displaying the 1 specific screen 30SP is provided.

(30) Between (at least) two (left and right) heating units set on the top plate 15, the case where the object to be heated N is moved and heated two or more times to complete cooking is linked cooking ( mode). However, a form in which the food to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113 to continue cooking (additional heating) in the middle of cooking is cooperative cooking.

(31) The input operation unit 40 for the user to give a command to the integrated control device MC,
Either a form having input keys that can be touch-operated by the user from above the main body case HC or a voice input form in which part of the input is performed by voice may be used.

(32) The input operation unit 40, which is directly touched by the user for input operation, is provided with specific input keys for selecting each of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

(33) The same input key 43MS is used as the input key 43MS for determining the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS for determining the selection of the combined cooking mode KM2. However, the input keys (43L1, 43R1) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 are present only in the individual operation sections 40L, 40R of the induction heating source 9. FIG.

(34) The input key 43MS for determining the start of the cooking process by the second heating means in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS for determining the start of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key. .

(35) The input key 43MT for determining the end of the cooking process by the second heating means in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MT for determining the end of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 use the same input key. .

(36) The (terminating) input key 43MT for determining the end of the cooking process is operated once or twice in succession during the cooking process to indicate the current cooking mode (coordinated cooking mode KM3, complex cooking mode KM3). There is a function to cancel the entire operation (that is, the entire cooking process) of mode KM2 (single cooking mode).
For example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, if the cooking process 1 is "microwave heating" and the cooking process 2 is "induction heating", in the cooking process 1 (in the case of microwave heating), the heating stop is also input key Since 43MT is also used, in order to distinguish between stopping heating and canceling the entire cooking mode (all cooking processes), the input key 43MT is pressed to stop heating, and the input key 43MT is pressed again to cancel.
On the other hand, when the cooking process 2 is "induction heating", since the input key 43L1 (or 43R1) is used to stop heating, it is possible to distinguish between stopping heating and canceling the entire cooking mode (all cooking processes). Therefore, the heating stop is 43L1 (43R1), and the cooking mode cancellation is 43MT (43MT does not have to be pressed twice, but there is no effect even if it is pressed).
When the cooking process 2 is "microwave heating", since the common operation unit 40M is used, pressing the input key 43MT once stops the heating, and pressing it again cancels the cooking mode (cancels all).

(Upper unit 100)
In this Embodiment 1, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the heating cooker 1 . Therefore, commercial (AC) power 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100 . However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for direct connection to the commercial power supply 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is pulled out of the heating cooker 1 from the lower unit 200 .

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper case) 16 that forms the outer shell of the main body 10, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 (see FIG. 12), and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass superimposed on the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover substantially the entire upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 except for the rear portion. . In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15 that serve as outer shells.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate. Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding or screws to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is formed by vertically bending the peripheral portion of a sheet of metal sheet, as will be described later, to form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, (right and left ), the side vertical walls 16L and 16R are integrally formed. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall" as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in another form. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B and a front vertical wall 16F. On the other hand, two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are separately formed separately. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the ends of the above-mentioned "body" by screws, spot welding, or the like, to finally form a box shape with an open top surface.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape with a substantially uniform overall thickness, and the entire lower surface thereof is covered with a painted surface that does not transmit visible light. Therefore, from above the top plate 15, the functional parts below it, such as the IH coil 17, cannot be visually recognized.

The right IH coil 17R has a doughnut-like planar shape. And the maximum heating power of this IH coil 17R is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

Similarly, the left IH coil 17L also has a donut shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. In addition, the diameter may be increased up to about 180 mm so as to be able to handle the object to be heated N such as a large pot or frying pan. FIG. 11 shows a case where the diameter of the left IH coil 17L is made larger than the diameter of the right IH coil 17R.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a laterally elongated opening formed in the rear part of the upper case 16, 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has a shutter or a number of through holes for ventilation. is formed. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18 .

12 and 14, 22 is a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the rear upper end of the upper case 16 as described above. The reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the lateral width of the rear edge of the upper case 16 .

21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 . The decorative frame protrudes rearward from the upper case 16 and is formed longer than the width of the upper case 16.例文帳に追加In other words, when viewed from above, it seems that the rear and left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 are surrounded in series (see FIG. 11).

11, 12 and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. The decorative frame 25 is installed so as to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from impacts from the outside.

Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushioning member made of a highly elastic material such as silicone rubber, which is attached to the entire bottom surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25 . Thereby, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26 . The top plate 15 may be designed so that one decorative frame 25 surrounds three parts (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face or four parts (four sides) including the rear end face.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L and 30R)
11 and 19, 30 is an integrated display unit. The integrated display portion 30 is installed in the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the center portion in the left and right direction.
31L is a left display portion and 31R is a right display portion. These left and right display portions 31L and 31R are also installed one each on the front left side and right side lower side of the top plate 15, respectively.

Since the right display section 31R is a display section corresponding to the right operation section (first individual operation section) 40R, it may be called a "first individual display section".
Similarly, the left display section 31L is a display section corresponding to the left operation section (second individual operation section) 40L, so it may be called a "second individual display section".

The integrated display section 30 is display means used in a linked cooking mode KM3 and a combined cooking mode KM2, which will be described later. That is, it is used during microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking.

The integrated display section 30 includes a first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 60) used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 55) used in the combined cooking mode KM2 and a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 55). 3 specific screen 30ST (see FIG. 54) is displayed alternatively. In addition, the standby initial screen (see FIG. 52) is also displayed. The standby initial screen (see FIG. 52) and the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC and 30ST are not displayed at the same time.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown). It is installed on a long horizontal operation board 41 .

The lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible rays as described above, corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R can be visually recognized from above the top plate 15 .

The integrated display section 30 displays common information and alarms of the heating cooker 1 . For example, the selection results of the three types of heating sources of the heating cooker 1, caution information and warning information indicating the operating states of these heating sources are displayed. That is, the integrated display section 30 may display information related to the induction heating source 17 , the oven heating source 188 , and the microwave heating source 189 , so it is called the integrated display section 30 .

The integrated display section 30 also has a function of displaying the names of various types of cooking corresponding to the linked cooking mode KM3, which will be described later, and their control conditions.

Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying "inventory information" of the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display portion 31R/Left side display portion 31L)
The left display section 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as will be described later, when timer cooking is set, it can be set in units of one minute, and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation and the "remaining time" until the timer set time expires. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature) and the current temperature are displayed. Note that the "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes and 59 seconds from the stage of less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in units of 1 second.

Similarly, the right display section 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right IH coil 17R. The right display section 31R basically displays information about various control conditions such as the timer setting time of the right IH coil 17R, the preheating temperature, and the elapsed time, similarly to the left display section 31L.

(Input operation unit 40)
In FIG. 19, 40 is an input operation unit. The input operation unit 40 is arranged along the front edge of the top plate 15 in a laterally long strip shape.
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of an operation board 41 which is horizontally elongated and arranged in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41 . The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating. A central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50 is provided on the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100 . An integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32 .

Below the operation board 41, a flat auxiliary support plate (not shown) is installed so as to overlap vertically so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap therebetween. In other words, it has a two-layer (two-layer) structure facing each other with a space between them, so that as many electric parts and circuits as possible can be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air flows from a second cooling fan 61, which will be described later, and is formed by a space between a cover 70, which will be described later, and the front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. A lower case 101 and an upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated with screws 51 at a plurality of locations.

As is clear from FIG. 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing portion is tightened by the screw 51. is fixed. In addition to the screws 51, screws 51F (not shown) are also provided for fixing the facing portions of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are coupled at a plurality of points. It is

A horizontal bent portion 16BX is formed by bending the upper end portion of the rear vertical wall 16B further rearward BK. This horizontal bent portion 16BX and the position of a flange 16A (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, are on the same horizontal line.

Due to the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports heavy objects of both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontally bent portion 16BX cooperate to firmly support such a load. It may function as a part. In other words, a structure is realized in which the flange 16A and the horizontal bent portion 16BX, which are made by bending a metal plate in series to increase the mechanical strength, support the upper case 16 itself and, as a result, also reliably support the lower case 101. It is In addition, in this first embodiment, the horizontally bent portion 16BX does not directly contact the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity with a large depth and large planar area. This cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104 .

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, the first embodiment has a flat upper case 16 (constituting the outer shell of the main body 10) whose top opening is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When the upper case 16 is placed on a lower case 101 to be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101 .

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 face each other at the largest distance.
In the cavity 104 , a waveguide 123 forming part of a microwave heating device 120 to be described later is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113 .
Furthermore, behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 for the power supply circuit board 127, on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted, is arranged long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted. The control board and the power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, but in the first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 . The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

Reference numeral 198 denotes a connecting support fitting made of a metal plate, and has a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped formed of thin metal plates, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected by fastening the screws 51 and 51F (not shown). It is a solid box-shaped structure.

In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted together as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are the maximum front-rear width dimension D5 (not shown) of the upper case 16, the maximum left-right width dimension W4 (not shown), They are the same size in terms of design. Alternatively, it is only 0.2 mm larger (at most) than the maximum longitudinal dimension D5 and the maximum lateral dimension W4 of the top opening of the lower case 101 .

Applying a slight outward force to the left and right vertical walls 101L and 101R and the upper end of the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B widens the upper opening of the lower case 101 slightly, so that the upper case 16 can be tightly fitted inside. It can be fitted (snugly).

The term "fitting" as used in the first embodiment does not necessarily refer to a state of close fitting as in the first embodiment. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 inserted inside may differ by up to 1 mm from the inner dimensions (in the front-rear and left-right directions) of the lower case 101, which is the outer side, and the whole is in close contact. It doesn't have to be in that state. Moreover, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, it is possible to secure the main body case HC with screws 51 or the like to form a strong main body case HC.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a single rigid box-shaped structure, a support structure for the door 114, which will be described later, can also be firmly realized, and the door 114 and the peripheral portion of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 can be secured. It is useful for preventing microwave leakage in between.

In particular, since the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole should not be distorted or deformed. is important. Since the cushions 26 are attached to the entire lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually contacts the upper surface of the kitchen lower part 2. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 80 is an inverter circuit board, which is installed horizontally in the center of the upper case 16 .
The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape elongated in the horizontal direction. The length W16 of the inverter circuit board 80 is 316 mm, and the length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction is 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31L, and is elongated in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the lower surface of the holder 50 so as to overlap with a small gap.

(Cooling structure of inverter circuit board)
Next, FIGS. 25 to 28 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 26 is a longitudinal sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 24. FIG. FIG. 27 is an enlarged view of the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle. FIG. 28 is a simplified perspective view illustrating the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the first cooling fan 60 and the inverter circuit board 80. FIG.

In this type of inverter circuit board 80, parts such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, transistors, etc. are fixed to an insulating substrate when creating a circuit with various electronic parts, and copper foil is used between these parts. Form by wiring. Since it is such a complicated and detailed work, it is currently mass-produced by mounting with an automatic charging machine or the like. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the substrate, and even when used in this type of heating cooker, the shape of the circuit substrate is basically square or rectangular. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space in the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise ways to avoid interference with surrounding components, overlap, and the like. Moreover, when the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted is also increased, and the area of the inverter circuit board 80 is inevitably increased.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L and an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. and a circuit 81R. These will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29, 30 and 33. FIG.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (radiation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 . The heat sink 82 is as shown in FIGS. That is, the heat sinks 82 are arranged in two rows so that the two heat radiation fins 82FN face each other and are placed close to each other by several mm to 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed by radiating fins 82FN of two heat sinks 82 facing each other. The size of the gap GP2 (the width in the front-rear direction) is the same across the two front and rear heat sinks 82 in the left-right direction. For example, it is 8 mm. In order to distinguish from a (second) gap GP12, which will be described later, this gap GP2 may be referred to as a "first gap".

As can be seen from FIGS. 12 and 26, the heat sink (radiation sink) 82 has, on the slanted surface on the side opposite to the side facing each other, a power source which constitutes a part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. A control switching element 83 is attached to each. Therefore, the heat generated during operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1, RF2 passing around the radiation fins 82FN.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). One of the power control switching elements 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side is attached to the rear side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in front and rear two rows.
The power control switching element 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side is attached to the front side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two front and rear rows. In addition, you may make it attach to this opposite side.

12 and 26, 70 is a cover integrally formed of a thin metal plate or plastic material that covers the entire upper portion of the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. Both left and right ends of the cover 70 are open, and as shown in FIG. 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 serves as an inlet FI for cooling airflows RF1 and RF2, which will be described later, and the right end surface of the cover 70 serves as an inlet for cooling airflows RF1 and RF2. constitute the outlet FO of

The cover 70 is positioned to secure a constant gap GP11 with the lower surface of the coil base 17C supporting the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). It should be noted that the gap GP11 is approximately 1 mm to several mm at the maximum in linear distance.

In this Embodiment 1, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. Thereby, a space of at least 5 mm or more is secured between the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R and the upper surface of the cover 70. FIG. This space has the effect of reducing the magnetic influence of the IH coils 17L and 17R on the cover 70 and facilitating the flow of cooling air between the cover 70 and the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

The cover 70 is sized to secure a constant gap GP12 from the top surface of the inverter circuit board 80 as well. In this first embodiment, GP12 is 20 mm.
In order to distinguish from the (first) gap GP2, this gap GP12 may be referred to as a "second gap".

26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. In FIG. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 based on the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16, which is 28 mm. H7 is also the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S and is 31 mm. 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or magnetic shield sheet (a thin aluminum plate or the like) may be placed between the upper surface of the support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80 .

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is the linear distance from the bottom surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16 . In this Embodiment 1, this height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17 is 40 mm. The height dimension H10 does not match the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A and the like.

Since the cover 70 is directly below and close to the IH coil 17L, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, the cover 70 should be made of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. . If the cover 70 is made of iron, magnetic stainless steel, or the like, there is a concern that the cover 70 will be heated by leakage magnetic flux and the temperature will rise. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to cover the upper surface of the cover 70 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, it is advisable to use a means of stacking aluminum sheets or attaching aluminum tape.

Incidentally, when the cover 70 is made of metal, it is more preferable to electrically connect it to the upper case 16 . For example, a metal screw (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 directly reaches the screw hole of the cover 70 .

Since the upper case 16 is connected to a lower case 101, which will be described later, with metal screws or the like, it is also electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. By doing so, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 .

Also, if the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be relatively freely determined. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82 .

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all the heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
A gap GP12 of about 20 mm is secured between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70, and the height of this gap GP12 is also the height of the first air passage F1.

A distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is approximately 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed downward from both the front and rear edges of the cover 70 .

The space between the pair of hanging walls 70B in the front-rear direction, that is, the dimension W9 of the space in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 26) is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B is in contact with the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a minute gap between the two, there is no problem in guiding the cooling air.

In FIG. 26, GP16 is a gap formed between the upper surface of the heat radiation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. In FIG. This gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12 and GP16 formed inside the cover 70 and the radiation fins 82FN.
In FIG. 26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm. W9 is the distance between the hanging walls 70B facing each other (the dimension of the space in the front-rear direction), which is 205 mm.

Next, returning to FIG. 25, description will be made.
W10 indicates the distance from the right side end face of the cover 70, ie, the outlet side end face, to the side vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged using that space.

In FIG. 25, 70A is a front notch formed at the left edge of the cover 70, that is, at the entrance side end. This front notch portion 70A is for guiding part of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside just before the cover 70. As shown in FIG.
A plurality of front notch portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP14 indicates the gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end face of the cover 70 . This gap GP14 is about 40 mm. A gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end face of the cover 70 . Since the gap GP15 is very small in FIG. 25, it is not shown.

In FIGS. 25 and 27, XB denotes a "blow-out line" FL1 (see FIG. 27) passing through the center point of the blow-out port 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and perpendicular to the tip surface of the blow-out port 60A, and the partition. A point of intersection with the wall 11 is shown.

The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is inclined by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to a center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction. Note that the IH coils 17L and 17R may be inclined with respect to a straight line (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27) that simply crosses the partition wall 11 instead of the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction.

XF denotes a point (point of intersection) at which a "blow-out line" FL2 passing through the center point of the blow-out port 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and perpendicular to the tip surface of the blow-out port 61A intersects with the partition wall 11. ing. These intersection points XB and XF will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Note that the blower lines FL1 and FL2 are imaginary straight lines provided for convenience of explanation of the first embodiment, and the cooling air does not actually travel along the blower lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined by a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
An installation interval W14 between the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

As is clear from FIG. 27, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is about 110 mm.
The air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2. This linear distance LD2 is about 100 mm.

With the above configuration, the blowout port 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is positioned between the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82F from behind with a straight line (reference line) BL passing through the center of the gap GP2. It is directed to heat sink 82B.
The outlet 60A is oblique (angle θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

Conversely, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 interposes the straight line (reference line) BL and is oblique (at an angle of θ2) to the straight line (reference line) BL from the forward direction.
Although the magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is "θ1>θ2", they may be the same.

As can be seen from FIG. 27, in the first embodiment, the two intersections XB and XF are not at the same position. The positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 and the directions of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 change.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sinks 82 include 82F1 and 82F2 as heat sinks 82F on the front FR side. As the heat sink 82B on the rear BK side, there are 82B1 and 82B2. In addition, when viewed from the front side of the heating cooker 1, the heat sink on the front left side of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear direction is called the "front first heat sink" 82F1, and the heat sink installed a little away on the front right side. may be referred to as the "front second heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear, the heat sink located on the rear left side is called a "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the heat sink installed a little apart on the rear right side is called a "rear second heat sink" 82B1. 82B2.

Returning to the description of FIG. 26 again.
A partition wall 11 is integrally formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70 . If the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, it can be formed integrally as described above, but a plate-like member separate from the cover 70 may be used, in which case it will be called a partition member 11 . Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, they are collectively referred to as “partition walls” 11 .

The partition wall 11 extends over the entire length from the right end to the left end, and the front surface and the rear surface (rear surface) are formed flat. This is for minimizing the air path resistance of the cooling airflows RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first air path F1. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-rear direction is about 2.0 mm.

The partition wall 11 is desirably made of a highly electrically insulating material (for example, a plastic material). 12, 13 and 15, illustration of the partition wall 11 is omitted.

Returning to FIGS. 24 and 25, D6 is the longitudinal maximum width dimension that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between the partition plate 52 and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction on the rear side of the partition plate 52 .

24 and 25, D7 is the distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the later-described partition plate 52, which determines the size of the gap GP1 (see FIGS. 13 and 24). is. W8 is the maximum left-right dimension (lateral width) that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16 .

The two IH coils 17L, 17 are supported from below by a part called a coil base 17C (see FIG. 12) made of heat-resistant plastic. Alternatively, one structure may be commonly used for the two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C is directly placed on the upper surface of the cover 70 and is fixed to the cover 70 with fasteners such as screws. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70 so that the cover 70 is always pushed up toward the top plate 15 and supported. A detailed description of these support structures is omitted. In any case, the IH coils 17L and 17R do not change their facing distance (distance) from the rear surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 over a long period of time. A plurality of large communication holes (not shown) are formed in the coil base 17C so that air can easily pass through the entire coil base 17C in the vertical direction.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L, 17R does not change during induction heating cooking. As a result, changes in the high frequency voltage and high frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply the high frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are positioned above and away from one horizontal plane (hereinafter referred to as "first horizontal plane HP1") coinciding with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. In other words, it exists above the second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is arranged below the IH coils 17L and 17R and is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil base 17C and the heat sink 82. As shown in FIG.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 larger than the planar shape of the cover 70 . Between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a first air passage F1 that is long in the horizontal direction is defined. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material such as heat-resistant plastic.

12 and 15, 102 is a metal exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. An end portion 102E of the exhaust duct 102 extends through a gap GP1 formed between a later-described partition plate 52 and a rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 13). That is, the exhaust duct 102 vertically penetrates the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 15, TS10 is a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor, which measures the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the ambient temperature therearound.
The temperature sensor TS10 is placed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat sensitive portion is exposed inside the exhaust duct 102. As shown in FIG.
Moreover, since the installation position of the temperature sensor TS10 is preferably close to the rear surface of the heating chamber 113, it is close to the communication port 174 formed in the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

The temperature sensor TS10 is detected not only during cooking by driving the oven heating source 188, but also during cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (for example, thawing frozen food) (cooking process of combined cooking mode KM2 described later). ) also constantly measures the temperature. The temperature detection data of this temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control section 159 (see FIG. 30).

In FIG. 14, 16A is a horizontal flange formed by bending the upper end portions of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16 outward at a right angle.
A horizontal flange 101A is formed by bending the upper ends of the side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later, to the outside at a right angle.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A described above overlaps the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed by the screws 51 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a strong integral structure by fixing with the screw 51 and closely fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is supported by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are made of a thin metal plate, they are still integrated. can be made into a box-shaped structure with mechanical strength.

Means for fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts, instead of the screws 51 described above. The flange 16A and the flange 101A do not contact the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. Since these flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that they may damage the kitchen furniture 2. Further, if the flange 16A and the flange 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushioning material 26 cannot be installed while being compressed. If the cushion material 26 is not in a tight contact state, there is a concern that the effect of preventing water or the like from entering may be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the heating cooker 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, 311 denotes a lower space formed between the kitchen furniture 2 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the main body case HC, and has a size of about 10 mm. is.

In FIG. 14, 301R is a right side gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
301L is a left gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

13 and 15, 302 is a front gap of about 10 mm formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed. It is. Since the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 also coincides with the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112 as well. configuration.

The size of the front space 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed, but as shown in FIG. It should be secured. In the description of the heating cooker 1, "outside air" refers to the air existing outside the heating cooker 1, and does not refer to the air outside the house HA shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 12-15 and 18, the lower cavity 311, the right cavity 301R, the left cavity 301L and the front cavity 302 communicate with each other. Therefore, when outside air is sucked from the front gap 302 by starting the operation of the heating cooker 1, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right gap 301R, and the left gap 301L. 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311, the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302. As shown in FIG.

Next, returning to FIG. 18, description will be made.
W3 is the maximum width dimension of the front portion of the heating cooker 1 . This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm.

A gap 303 is formed between the inner surface (right side) of the right side wall member present on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112 . This gap is ensured so as not to collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

Also in the left front cover 112 , a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between the inner surface (left side) of the left wall surface material present on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 . Note that the sizes of the left and right gaps 303 may differ slightly depending on the installation of the cooking device 1 . Also, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, there may be cases where elastic sealing material (cushion material) is arranged on the stepped portion 2G (see FIG. 10) and the gap 303 is almost closed. However, even in such a state, the internal cooling function of the heating cooker 1 does not suffer at all.

As shown in FIG. 18, the front cover 112 extends outward beyond the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L. Therefore, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, the front sides of the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L are covered by the two left and right front covers 112 .

Since the front sides of the right space 301R and the left space 301L are covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user feels as if there is a large gap between the heating cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. never give.

Since the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L are secured in the installed state of the heating cooker 1, the outside air is reliably introduced for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. can be done

18, WS is the width of the door 114 facing the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. In FIG. This width dimension is necessary for the door 114 and the lower case 101 to be brought into close contact with each other to prevent leakage of microwaves, and also for forming choke chambers 194 (to be described later) at the front, rear, left, and right positions of the opening 113A ( See Figure 11).

(First cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61)
As shown in FIG. 24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left side vertical wall 16L of the upper case 16, respectively. A rotating shaft 60T (not shown) at the center of the rotor blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extends in the vertical direction, and the rotor blades are Rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

A centrifugal fan (blower) is employed for the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 . This is because static pressure is high and air resistance is high in a space with high mounting density. In general, there is a type of centrifugal fan that has a single suction port and blows out (discharges) in all radial directions. However, Embodiment 1 is of a type having only one blowing direction.

24, 60A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61. FIG.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool an IH coil installation space CK inside an upper space 300A, which will be described later. Therefore, these two cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as "upper cooling fans".

The outlets 60A and 61A are directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. That is, the two outlets 60A and 61A are both located above the common first horizontal plane (HP1) and directed rightward. The "first horizontal plane" HP1 referred to in the first embodiment refers to one plane coinciding with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, as described above.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotational speed during normal induction heating operation. . However, in the first embodiment, the IH control unit 90 varies the number of rotations to change the amount of air blown. For example, when increasing the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than normal, In some cases, the number of revolutions is increased to increase the air flow rate in order to increase the cooling effect. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated with different rotational speeds in order to deal with "beat noise", which will be described later.

Rated specifications include, for example, rated voltage, working voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, and the like. By changing the applied voltage or voltage application time (on-duty time) within the working voltage range, the number of revolutions can be changed.
In contrast, in Embodiment 1, a PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the pulse width duty cycle (pulse width The ratio of H and L) is changed to control the motor of the first cooling fan 60 . This PWM control is also employed in the second cooling fan 61 .

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are configured such that the periphery of the rotor (not shown) is surrounded by fan cases 60C and 61C. not shown).

Directly below the suction ports (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are ventilation holes 64 (Fig. 14 and FIG. 16). This vent hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16 . This vent hole 64 communicates with a vent hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164 thereof.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (air intake duct), which is provided to directly communicate the vent hole 64 with the vent hole 164 of the lower case 101 . This recess 165 is formed by recessing from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. Note that this dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, the vertical center point of the blowout port 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the electrical components mounted on the upper surface of the power circuit board 55 to be described later. The vertical center point of 85 is located on one horizontal line HL1. In other words, the positional relationship is such that the cooling air RF1 blown out from the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 reaches the heat sink 82 and the electrical component 85 when traveling straight to the right. The horizontal plane defined by this horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from a commercial AC power supply 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55 through a filter circuit board 54 which will be described later. Then, the power circuit board 55 converts alternating current into direct current. Therefore, electric parts 85 such as a diode and a transformer 57 (not shown) for converting AC to DC are mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control section 90 that controls induction cooking reduces the amount of heating of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown by the first cooling fan 60 per unit time may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 24), such as thermistors, which are fixed on the surface of the heat sink 82 in close contact.

If the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged in parallel and operated, there is a high possibility that a roar will occur. For this reason, in the first embodiment, as a countermeasure against the beat noise, control is performed so that the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are set to different values within the range where the beat noise is likely to occur. there is That is, it is not always operating at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, 52 is a metal partition plate that is installed in the rear part of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16 . The partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to partition the internal space of the upper case 16 into the front and rear. It should be noted that the term "dividing" as used herein does not mean strict shielding such as complete blocking of air circulation. It is sufficient that the rearward flow of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 over the upper end surface of the partition plate 52 can be suppressed to some extent.

An upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage within the upper unit 100 extending from the ventilation hole 64 to the partition plate 52 . The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 described above exists in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 . For this reason, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH, and is substantially connected to the outside of the heating cooker 1 .

24, 52A is an exhaust window formed on the left half of the partition plate 52, and 52B is an exhaust window formed on the right half of the partition plate 52. As shown in FIG.
53L is an exhaust port plate (on the left side) installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A. It has become.

53R is an exhaust port plate (on the right side) installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52B. It has become. The cooling air that has passed through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B is discharged to the external space of the heating cooker 1 through the exhaust cover 19. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 24, LF is the exhaust port size indicating the range (width dimension) to the left of the later-described partition plate 12 for the exhaust air exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The size of the exhaust port is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53L1 and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53L1 (the configuration shown in FIG. 24), the width of the exhaust window 52A determines the (left) exhaust range LF.
The width dimension of the right exhaust window 52B and the formation range of the through hole 53R1 are equivalent.

In FIG. 24, 54 is a filter circuit board arranged at the rear right corner of the upper case 16 . This filter circuit board removes the noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 and supplies it to the output terminal side, and conversely prevents the noise from flowing out (reverse) to the commercial (AC) power supply side on the input terminal side. It is mounted with electrical components (not shown) such as resistors, inductors (choke coils), line-to-line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of a power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is located on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, cooling immediately after exiting the first air passage F1 Cooled by the wind.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the longitudinal direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the longitudinal direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction. CL2 is a center line passing through the rotation center of each rotor blade (not shown) in the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are arranged on a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 indicates the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. In FIG. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown from the second cooling fan 61 .

RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting from the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. Further, RF4 indicates the cooling air after passing through the second air passage F2. Part of the cooling air RF3 after exiting from the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after passing through the second air passage F2 merge in the middle. That is, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 join before reaching the through holes 53L1 and 53R1 of the exhaust port plates 53L and 53R.

24, GP1 is the gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. In FIG. The width of the gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is about 30 mm to 50 mm.

24 and 25, reference numeral 12 denotes a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. As shown in FIG. A partition plate 13 is also installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 .

The space GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 is partitioned into two spaces on the left and right sides by the partition plate 12 . An exhaust duct 102 vertically extends from below on the left side of the partition plate 12 . Further, on the right side of the partition plate 13, the terminal end (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) for discharging the air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be arranged. However, in this Embodiment 1, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not arranged.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, 14 is a plate-like or rib-like (uplift-like) partition wall installed vertically. The partition wall 14 is formed integrally with or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) placed over the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG.

The support plate 29 (not shown), like the support plate 71, is made of an electrically insulating plastic material.
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front of the partition plate 52 . However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it contacts the lower surface of the top plate 15 . In other words, the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, but the space behind the cover 70 is not completely partitioned into left and right sides by the partition wall 14. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly through the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling airs RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. They are separated and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly through the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling airs RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It can be divided and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling airflows RF4L and RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.
24 and 25, the cooling air discharged from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air discharged from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When collectively referring to these two cooling winds, reference numeral RF4 is used in the following description.

(Detailed Configuration of Input Operation Unit 40)
Next, referring back to FIGS. 19 and 20, the main part of the input operation section 40 will be described.
19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation portion formed on the upper surface of the front side of the top plate 15. As described below, the input operation portion utilizes changes in capacitance when the user touches it lightly with a finger or the like. Various input keys (touch keys) that can be input by pressing are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section 40R, a central operation section (common operation section) 40M, and a left operation section 40L. Reference numeral 98 denotes an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 capable of supplying and shutting off a commercial power supply 99, which will be described later. This operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end of the right operation section 40R. The following description is based on the premise that the operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation section 40 (see FIG. 19).

As described above, the right operation unit 40R is for performing input operations only for the induction heating source 9, and is sometimes called an "individual operation unit". Similarly, the left operation section 40L may also be called an "individual operation section".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "common operation unit" because it is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG. This "common operating section" also includes a "cooperative operating section" 40M for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later. These will be described in detail in FIG.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter substrate 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in FIGS. The commercial power source 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power circuit portion (not shown in FIG. 25) of the lower unit 200. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a total of five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operating section 40R. These input keys 43R1-43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating unit 17HR. Also, the operation of the right IH coil 17R, which has started the heating operation, can be stopped. Therefore, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the selection function of the right heating unit 17HR is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after that, there is a function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, every time the input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, is automatically switched.

The input key 43R1 may be called third selection means. That is, the left input key 43L1 and the right input key 43R1, which will be described later, select a "single (heating) cooking" mode using either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9. and a means for instructing the start of the heating operation.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys for designating thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating.
When the left input key 43R2 of the two input keys 43R2 is touched, the heating power is lowered by one step each time the input key 43R2 is touched. For example, in the case of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9), when this input key 43R2 is touched once, it is lowered to 2500 W (thermal power level: 8).

When the right input key 42R3 is touched, the heating power is increased by one step each time the operation is performed. For example, if the thermal power is 2500 W (thermal power level 8), touching the input key 42R3 once allows selection of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9).

43R4 is an input key for selecting a timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method in which a user can set a cooking time, and the induction heating operation can be performed only during the set time. For example, when 10 minutes is specified and timer cooking is started, a predetermined display is performed on the right display section 31R when 10 minutes have elapsed, and the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, automatically notifies the completion of cooking by voice. is performed on When the set time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, the induction heating is automatically stopped, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the elapse of the set time.

In the first embodiment, both the display units such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R, and the speech synthesizer 95 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit" AN.

44R is a touch-type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking, and one of a plurality of control menus can be selected each time a touch operation is performed. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" refers to the selection of the induction heating source 9, such as "boiling", "boiling", "deep-frying (automatic cooking)", etc., as shown in FIG. Control mode, in other words, type of control. In other words, there are individual control menus for "boiling", "simmering", "frying", and the like. Control conditions for one control menu include, for example, driving time (of the IH coil 17R), heating power value, and the like. Even if the control menu is the same, the control conditions are not necessarily the same.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the final name of the food to be cooked or the name of the ingredients obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of food items to be cooked, not the "control menu" referred to here. In other words, it can be said that the "control menu" comprehensively expresses the types of heating, cooking methods, conditions, etc. until cooking is completed.
The control menu for the induction heating source 9 is sometimes called an "IH control menu" to distinguish it from the control menus for other heating sources.

Next, the left operating section 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 23. FIG. The left operation unit 40L has a total of five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Further, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the function of selecting the left heating portion 17HL is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after induction heating is started, the heating operation can be instantaneously stopped.
The input key 43L1 may be called third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys for designating thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL, like the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operating section 40R. As with the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are touched, a thermal power level raised by one level is selected from the specified thermal power value data table, or specified by a thermal power level lowered by one level. You can choose the firepower of

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. This input key 43L4 can specify the induction heating cooking time similarly to the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R. When the timer cooking is finished, the left display section 31L displays the end of the timer cooking in the same manner as the input key 43R4, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the end of the timer cooking.

44L is a touch input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. As with the input key 44R of the right operation section 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus". The control menu selectable with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu selectable with the right input key 44R.

A total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L arranged on the left operating section 40L are arranged on a straight line in the left-right direction, as is clear from FIGS.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a total of 10 touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation unit 40M. These input keys are assigned one or more input functions.
The ten touch input keys are described below.

The leftmost input key 43KP is used to set various operations and displays of the heating cooker 1 as a user desires.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the later-described integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode" and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30. FIG.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlocking mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning timing of heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of four levels of maximum power consumption: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(5) Audio guide audio setting (6) Audio guide volume setting (7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out food to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from heating chamber 113 (speech synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30 Necessity of warning)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limit function of a home power control device)
(9) Time unit setting for timer cooking (1-minute unit setting changed to 5-minute or 30-minute unit) (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (professional) mode (11) Inventory information acquired from refrigerator 401 Setting of type (range) (12) Setting of display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, identification information 330) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of cooperative cooking mode KM3 (13) Complex Setting of display priority (specific control menu to be displayed by default) of each control menu (for example, "microwave grill", "boiled under leafy vegetables") of cooking mode KM2 (14) Turning on main power switch 97 After that, when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened, the setting of the cooking mode automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (display priority between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, etc.) .

The beginner mode is an optional function for people (users) who are unfamiliar with the use of the heating cooker 1, and when this beginner mode is set, the content of the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer 95 is more detailed and polite. become. Further, regarding the input operation on the input operation unit 40, voice guidance is increased, and display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is increased.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, reference information (described later) displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 (including the additional information 331 to be used) is increased, or the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesizer 95 is increased. Therefore, the function that can support the user's input operation is strengthened.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the setting of the cooking mode automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is either the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2. It means to set one. Since both the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 use one integrated display section 30, the user can set to give priority to display of one of them. This will be explained in detail later.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the opening of the door 114 is detected by the integrated controller MC.
It is presumed that the user will cook using the heating chamber 113, and first either the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This is a function of automatically displaying on the integrated display unit 30 .
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, and 2B: FIG. 46), which will be described later, is displayed. to be displayed.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, a specific input key other than the input key 43KP is "long pressed" (hereinafter referred to as "long pressed") on the central operation unit 40M. ) to select one setting menu from the above-mentioned "function setting menu", and subsequently change the desired setting contents.

Alternatively, when two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are "long-pressed" at the same time, one of the above-described "function setting menus" can be called up and the desired settings can be changed. can.

The "long press" means, for example, a state of being continuously pressed for 5 seconds or longer.
Whether or not it is in the "long press" state is determined by comparing the timing of touch input on the input operation unit 40 with a reference value by the integrated control device MC. That is, the timing at which the input keys (for example, 43M1 and 43M2) are pressed simultaneously in the central operation unit 40M is the ON (when touched) - OFF (when not touched) transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC. ) signal, the integrated controller MC measures the time from the ON signal to the OFF signal to determine whether it is a "long press".

The type (range) of inventory information to be acquired from the refrigerator 401 is, for example, limited to only frozen foods or foods that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189 .

After pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode", by operating touch type input keys 43M1 to 43M3, which will be described later, arranged on the central operation unit 40M, the heating cooker The above 14 types of individual functions defined in 1 "function setting menu" can be individually changed.

In the integrated display unit 30, when the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat power, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are being selected, the input key 43KP is pressed so as not to switch the function mode. input function is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting portion 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting operation of the control mode and control conditions (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the heating cooker 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W or 4000W when installed in the user's home. In this way, the functions of the heating cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, usage environment (electric power situation of the home where the appliance is installed), and the like. Note that when such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72, so when the user selects the linked cooking mode KM3 as described later, It is used to determine whether or not to permit use of the linked cooking mode KM3.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the range of the central operation unit 40M, there is a common operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 which is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Includes range. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG.
On the other hand, within the range of the central operation unit 40M, the area excluding the input key 43KP is a cooperative operation unit 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later.

In the following description, since the "RG operation unit" 40M2 also serves as an input operation unit for the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means), it may be referred to as a "second operation unit" 40M2. .

43MC is an input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation section 40MC. Consists of touch keys.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light-emitting diode (LED) or the like, so that the user can easily confirm the characters "cooking" and the figure indicating it. However, the input key 43MC appears to shine only during the period of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, after all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops emitting light to indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not valid.
The input key 43MC may be called a "first input key".

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in heating chamber 113 by oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189; A combined cooking mode KM2 using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. That is, this input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "compound cooking mode" KM2. When the input key 43M1 is operated, as will be described later, by executing the "combined cooking mode" KM2, either microwave heating or oven heating alone can be performed.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display section 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This point will be explained later with reference to FIGS.

Further, when the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display section 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. That is, the configuration is switched to display the first specific screen 30SP. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 81-108.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. It is divided into 30R and displayed.

Of the three display areas, the left display area 30L is hereinafter referred to as the "first area". Further, the display area 30M located in the center is hereinafter referred to as "second area". The display area 30R located on the right side is hereinafter referred to as "third area". It should be noted that a method of dividing and displaying one display screen into a plurality of sections in this manner is proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940. omitted.

43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information to be displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display section driving circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, a state in which the input key 43M1 is operated to display individual names indicating the "compound cooking mode" KM2 or the "single cooking mode" KM1 on the integrated display section 30 will be described.

When the left input key 43M1 of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the front-rear center. The display screen switches with the image displayed. That is, when the left input key 43M1 is operated once, the "control menu" stored in the integrated control device MC (in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2), the identification information of the food to be cooked (in the case of the linked cooking mode KM3) ), etc., one of the desired display information (for example, a name specifying "microwave grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) can be selected. Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only appears to move forward visually.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backward, and instead, different information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. to switch the display screen. That is, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information group" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information ) is reversed.

Thus, by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1, the user can display the desired information from the display information group in the central portion of the first area 30L. .

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information of the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching screens displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the information displayed in the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for assisting user's input for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When the input key 43M3 is touch-operated in a specific scene, such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when guidance information 30P, which will be described later, is displayed, the third In the area 30R, "guidance information" 30P that serves as a reference for user's operation is displayed (see FIG. 55).

The display of the guidance information 30P automatically disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, and the state of the previous display screen is restored. Details of such operation will be described later with reference to FIGS.

43MS is a "starting unit" capable of instructing the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is specifically a touch input key. It also serves as an input key for instructing transition to the linked cooking mode KM3. This input key 43MS may be called a "start input key" when distinguishing it from other input keys.

Conversely, 43MT is a "termination part" capable of stopping the operation of microwave heating and oven heating, specifically a touch input key. It also serves as an input key for issuing a command to cancel the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This input key 43MT may be called an "end input key" when distinguishing it from other input keys.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R do not always need input functions.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always need input functions. The same applies to the central operation unit 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary input such as when the user touches without recognition, the integrated control device MC immediately after starting the heating cooker 1, according to the cooking condition input process, the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled so as not to accept input.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. , 27M.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, in the right operating section 40R, individual light emitting sections 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are a pair, the individual light emitting section 27R2 shares one.

Each of the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R. is controlled. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the emission color.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind and adjacent to the input key 43R1 is activated. emits blue light. As a result, it can be understood that it is in a state in which it is possible to receive an operation input.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting units 27R1 emit light in a unified color (red) to notify the user that the operation is accepted. indicate. The control for this display is performed by the display section driving circuit 63 based on the command from the integrated control device MC. It should be noted that instead of emitting light in one color, the light emission color may be changed from blue to red, for example, to indicate to the user that an operation is being accepted. This also applies to individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

In addition, before the input key 43R1 is operated, the individual light emitting section 27R1 adjacent to the input key 43R1 immediately behind is not illuminated, and when the operation is accepted, the light emission is started and continues to be emitted. good. In addition, a method may be adopted in which only light is emitted to indicate that an operation input is possible in advance (at the stage before the operation), and that the operation input is received is not indicated by light. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a form in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for an input, and changes to continuous light emission when an operation input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23, also in the left operation unit 40L, individual light emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are a pair, the individual light emitting section 27L4 shares one.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the central operation unit 40M as well, individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind ten touch input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS and 43MT. are doing.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating starts, the input keys (43M1, 43M2, etc.) on the central operation unit 40M cannot be input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT is maintained valid.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started (in the heating chamber 113), pressing this input key (end portion) 43MT once causes the second heating means HM2 corresponding to the heating chamber 113 to be activated. The heating operation stops immediately. When the button is pressed once more, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at that time, and as will be described later, the dedicated state of the left heating unit 17HL used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is immediately canceled.
Therefore, after this cancellation, it is possible to start inputting the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking.

In addition, when the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is performed using the induction heating source 9, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is set by pressing the input key (end portion) 43MT twice in succession. is cancelled. In other words, the cooking process 1 by the induction heating source 9 ends at that point, and the reserved state of the next cooking process 2 is cancelled. Therefore, as will be described later, the state in which the microwave heating source 189 in the heating chamber 113 has been in the occupied state is canceled immediately.

When the input key 43M1 or the input key 43MC is operated to display the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the cooking process starts, the previous input settings are changed. are all cancelled. Therefore, if the cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is to be displayed, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MC again.

Each of the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M. Light emission and extinguishing with a unified emission color are controlled. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a form in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for an input, and changes to continuous light emission when an operation input is received.

As shown in FIG. 21, a pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting section 27M3. Since each of the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 also has a pair, each of the individual light emitting portions 27M4 and 27M5 is shared. In the following description, the reference numeral 27M is used when collectively referring to the individual light emitting units in the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 22, an individual light emitting section 27R5 is also arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97 located adjacent to the right end of the right operating section 40R.

In order to avoid user's unnecessary confusion and misunderstanding, it is desirable to unify the lighting modes (continuous lighting, blinking, lighting colors, etc.) of the lighting display sections 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above for the three operating sections. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emitting display portions 27R, 27L, and 27M of the right operating portion 40R, left operating portion 40L, and central operating portion 40M have the same light emitting form.

In order to indicate that the input function of each input key is valid, there is also a method of lighting the operation part of the input key itself. must be manufactured from a light-transmissive material, and there is also the issue of ensuring the sensitivity of the input key operating portion, so there are many issues in terms of structure and cost.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions avoiding the operation unit of the input keys as described above. Here, "adjacent" means a positional relationship in which the two are close to each other from the user's point of view, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R, and the one-to-one relationship can be instantly understood. . Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R are partitioned by a structure such as a wall protruding upward with respect to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a structure is adopted in which it is illuminated from below.

In FIG. 20, heating power display sections 67L and 67R are provided behind the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L so as to indicate the heating power level during induction heating cooking.
These thermal power display portions 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power levels in the right heating portion 17HR and the left heating portion 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine stages are indicated by light, from the rated minimum thermal power (thermal power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum thermal power (thermal power level 9: 3200 W).

The thermal power display units 67L and 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the spaces below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The luminescent color may be changed according to the magnitude of the heating power. In this Embodiment 1, for example, thermal power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Thermal power level 1: 1 red light, the remaining 8 blue lights (2) Thermal power level 2: 2 red lights, the remaining 7 blue lights The left end of the thermal power display sections 67L and 67R , when the object is heated with a thermal power lower than the minimum thermal power level 1 in the "thermal insulation mode" (see "display screen 3A" in Fig. 54), the LED is illuminated to display the thermal insulation display. 67H is provided.

The left display section 31L displays the thermal power level value of the left heating section 17HL with numerals 1-9. When the minimum firepower level is 1, "1" is displayed, and when the maximum firepower level is 9, "9" is displayed. The thermal power display on the left display section 31L matches the thermal power level displayed by the thermal power display section 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Also, the heating power level value of the right heating section 17HR is displayed with numerals 1 to 9 on the right display section 31R. The display conditions are exactly the same as for the left display section 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light-emitting display portions 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heating power display portions 67L, 67R are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the three light emitting display portions 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heating power display portions 67L, 67R are arranged in the horizontal direction.

In this way, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are located behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R on a straight line in the horizontal direction. Because it is lined up, operability and visibility are good. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R are also arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. It has a good design and visibility.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 68 is a heat source display section arranged behind the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
Since the heat source display section 68 uses a plurality of heat sources using the central operation section 40M, the heat sources that are actually in operation are displayed with LED light.

The heat source display section 68 is composed of three display sections. The leftmost display section 68L is a display section that indicates that the microwave heating source 189 is used, and near the front side, the character "range" is displayed to easily indicate that it is microwave heating. It's made for you to understand.

The display portion 68M in the center is a display portion that indicates that "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that it is easy to understand that it is grill cooking.

The rightmost display portion 68R is a display portion that indicates a case where “oven cooking” is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

In "oven cooking", unlike grill cooking, the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is grasped and reflected (feedbacked) in the power control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be explained in detail later.

20 and 21, reference numeral 69 denotes a high temperature display section provided immediately behind the heat source display section 68. As shown in FIG. The high temperature display section 69 causes the LED light emitting section to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC to display that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
The integrated controller MC issues a high temperature display command based on the temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 which receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and the heating chamber control section 159, as will be described later.

The high temperature indicator 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display section 69 defines three temperature monitoring target portions, namely, the left heating portion 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating portion 17HR, and individually displays the conditions of these temperature monitoring target portions. Therefore, for example, after induction cooking is performed in the left heating part 17HL, the user can be alerted by notifying that the left side range from the center of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating part 17HL is high temperature.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature display section 69 displays the high temperature, for example, when the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking is finished, the IH control section 90 continues the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A, with outside air.

Returning to FIG. 19, description will be made.
47 is a touch type input key for Internet connection command requesting wireless communication to the integrated control device MC. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, the home gateway 411 is wirelessly connected and external information can be acquired via the home gateway 411 .

46L and 46R are windows for transmitting an infrared signal as a command signal for starting operation to the ventilator 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. An infrared transmission unit 48 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) is installed below this window. In practice, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. FIG. The sheet is of course made of a material that is transparent to infrared signals.

The input key 47 may be pressed to temporarily display the details of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 manually on the integrated display unit 30 during execution of the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. It should be noted that the stock information in this case may display, for example, the name of the frozen food (for example, "rice" or "dumpling") and its amount (one portion, weight 200 g, etc.).

During execution of the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heat cooker 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation of the input key 47 described above. This will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG.

In FIG. 19, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit (communication module), which includes an antenna (not shown) for receiving radio waves from the outside and transmitting radio waves or infrared signals to the outside, and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown). I have. The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display substrate 41 with a small gap from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. The purpose of maintaining such a distance is that there is a concern that the reception sensitivity of radio waves may be lowered if the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is too close.

When installed on the kitchen furniture 2 , the upper surface of the heating cooker 1 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2 . Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust air from the exhaust port side terminal part 102E (see FIG. 15) of the exhaust duct 102 can be similarly discharged above the kitchen furniture 2. FIG.

(Control means of upper unit 100)
Next, control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG.
In FIGS. 29 to 31, part of the configuration is omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown. A part of the configuration of the lower unit 200 is also illustrated.

29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 31, only the main control means in FIG. 29 are extracted, and arrows indicate transmission/reception of control command signals, power supply relationships, and the like.

In FIG. 30, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power supply 99 via a power cord and a power plug (not shown). Reference numeral 91 denotes a power supply circuit to which electrical energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 denotes a DC power conversion section for converting AC power from a commercial power supply into DC. The power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In FIGS. 29 and 30, MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. A predetermined constant-voltage current is supplied from the power supply circuit 91 to the integrated control device MC.

The integrated controller MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 as described above (indicated by the dashed frame in FIGS. 24 and 25). However, it may be arranged on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41 . In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200 .

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input part, an output part, a storage part, and a CPU (arithmetic control part). (stored). In addition to the storage unit (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is incorporated. The storage device MM may store an energization control program for the three heating sources.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control section that controls induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer. The IH control unit 90 stores in advance an energization control program corresponding to various control menus for induction heating. It also incorporates a storage device (not shown) for recording abnormality monitoring information.

Part of the functions of the IH control section 90 may be performed by a second IH control section 90A (not shown) provided separately. For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 to control the inputs and outputs of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all heat cooking operations such as induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking, the presence or absence of an electrical abnormality is centrally monitored by the integrated controller MC.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 96 denotes a clock circuit, also called a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power supply (built-in battery) BT1 separate from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is used for a long period of time. It is designed to be driven across. For example, this may be a radio-controlled clock, and if requested by the integrated control device MC, it always informs the current date and exact time in seconds. there is

Even if the main power source of the heating cooker 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and the latest correct time is always transmitted to the integrated control device MC. For this reason, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and saved at the correct time. Note that the clock circuit 96 may be omitted and the integrated control device MC may have the clock function.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also called a "demand control unit"). This power control unit 72 analyzes a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating by the integrated control device MC, and the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 exceeds the specified value or the upper limit set individually by the user. It also has a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed a specified value or an arbitrary set value. There is

In general, the term "demand control device" or "demand control device" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (power demand). Automatically checks the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, notify with an alarm, etc. If you set the automatic stop of the equipment that can be stopped, the device itself will stop as decided. Automatically shuts down electrical equipment when possible. After that, it is known to automatically restore the electrical equipment after a certain period of time has passed, and it is said that it will be very effective in managing the contracted power with the electric power company in each household.

The power control unit 72 of Embodiment 1 is provided to allow the heating cooker 1 itself to have the function of suppressing power consumption as described above. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware. Anything added later can be implemented.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as a whole by operating the function setting input key 43KP to set only one of the four levels as described above. Note that this setting can be made in the input operation unit 40 while viewing the above-mentioned four-level numerical values displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when a plurality of specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed at the same time. . Such a simple setting method is introduced in Japanese Patent No. 6012780, for example.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays "Peak cut value setting" and "HEMS registration setting" are displayed, so that the function of suppressing the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as described above can be easily added or set to change or cancel the function. can be The upper limit value data for the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in the power control unit 72 is used in the determination of the “permission condition”, which will be described later.

A signal transmission unit 73 is provided to transmit various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 . For example, it corresponds to a signal line and a connector that can transmit a signal by wire. Also, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used so that signals can be exchanged wirelessly. The signal transmission section 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control section 90 .

The IH control section 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 are at an abnormally high temperature. For example, in the central operation unit 40M, electronic parts and semiconductor parts corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc. are arranged. (For example, 60° C.) is monitored through the temperature detection circuit 93 so as not to exceed the temperature.

When the measured temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the "abnormal preliminary state" has occurred. The abnormal preliminary state is limited to when the detected temperature is in the range of 60.degree. C. to 65.degree. If the temperature exceeds 65° C., the danger increases, and the IH control unit 90 recognizes that it is a true abnormal condition.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not immediately stopped, and control is performed to lower the heating power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65° C., the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormal, and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, when the IH coil being driven is the right IH coil 17R, the power supply to the inverter circuit 81R supplying high-frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R including the IH coil 17R, resonance capacitor, etc. is stopped. 94L is an induction heating circuit for the left IH coil 17L.

In the above-described abnormal preliminary state, the problem may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 cooling the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of the induction heating. Furthermore, it may be used together with measures to lower the thermal power of induction heating.

Then, at least during the period from such an abnormal preliminary state to an emergency stop, the electrical and physical changes in the main parts during induction heating (for example, the temperature of the integrated display section 30 described above) are indicated (abnormality monitoring). Information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. FIG.

In the above-described abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not stopped immediately, the air blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotational speed of the rotor blades is not changed), and the IH coils 17L and 17R are The firepower may be improved by forcibly lowering it.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when the activation command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "IH control menu" in the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "boiling", "simmering", "deep-frying", etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the thermal power of induction heating are also displayed in chronological order. Recorded. If an emergency stop occurs due to an abnormal condition on the way, the abnormality monitoring information and the information for identifying the IH control menu are stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order up to that point.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the heating cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, all heating on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides is performed. The integrated controller MC acquires monitoring information about the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information on the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73 .

In the inverter circuit board 80, one inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right IH coil 17R and one inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left IH coil 17L are mounted.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven by the IH control section 90 independently of each other. In addition, when these inverter circuits are named generically, the code|symbol "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 95 is a speech synthesizer for synthesizing electronically produced speech. The voice synthesizing device 95 notifies the user of the input operation guidance and the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality by voice from the speaker 95S each time. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part of the notification unit AN (see FIG. 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, there are temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 for detecting the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display section 30, and the like. . A temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control section 90 .

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be of a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and they are used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3-TS9, two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in the central gaps of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, as shown in FIG. 19, and receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. In other words, the bottom surface temperature of the object to be heated N, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the object to be cooked, can be measured in a non-contact manner.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use thermistors as contact sensors. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15, or are in contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15 via thermally conductive interpositions. Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 can be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 19) uses a thermistor as a contact sensor and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. As shown in FIG. Then, the ambient temperature of the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40 is detected. The two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use thermistors and are mounted on the upper surface of the heat sink 82 as described above.

At least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 are also provided on the lower unit 200 side to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, the details of which will be described later. As described above, a thermistor type temperature sensor TS10 for detecting the internal atmosphere temperature of the heating chamber 113 is also installed.

29 and 30, reference numeral 62 denotes a cooling fan driving circuit, which controls driving power of motors 60M and 61M for driving the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. FIG. That is, under the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62, the blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are changed in multiple steps independently of each other.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 63 denotes a display section drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has a function of displaying necessary information.
The display drive circuit 63 may be composed of a dedicated microcomputer. Also, the control program (software) that exhibits the functions of the display section drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensing device that detects shaking at the time of an earthquake, and when it senses a predetermined seismic intensity (acceleration) or more, it sends a vibration sensing signal to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC Upon receiving the signal, it judges that an earthquake has occurred, and immediately cuts off the power supply of all the heating means in use.

29 and 30, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit shown in FIG. 19, which receives commands from the integrated control unit MC and transmits information. Also, it receives a command from the integrated control device MC and acquires information from the outside. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces total power consumption.

In the first embodiment, the abnormality detection unit EM includes an abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) capable of detecting various abnormalities occurring on the top plate 15 and various abnormalities related to electrical components inside the upper space 300A. An abnormality detection section 2 (EM2) capable of detecting and an abnormality detection section 3 (EM3) capable of detecting various types of abnormality related to electrical components inside the lower unit 300B are provided.

The main anomalies that can be detected by the anomaly detection unit 1 (EM1) are, for example, the following three types of anomalies 1 to 3.
Abnormality 1: When the water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N boils over the top plate 15 and overflows, and an abnormality is detected.
Abnormality 2: When the bottom surface of the object to be heated (such as a metal pot) N deforms (increases in curvature) during induction heating and is determined to be in an abnormal placement state (determined by the IH control unit 90).
Abnormality 3: When the object to be heated (such as a metal pan) is moved during induction heating and is not immediately returned to the original heating unit (determined by the IH control unit 90).

In addition to this, there are abnormalities 4 and 5 as follows.
Abnormality 4: When the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the content of the control instruction (handled by the abnormality detection unit 2).
Abnormality 5: When the rotational speeds of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not match the content of the control instruction (handled by the abnormality detection section 3).

The functions of the abnormality detection section 2 (EM2) are, for example, a temperature detection circuit 93 (see FIG. 30) that acquires temperature information from the temperature sensors TS8 and TS9, and a temperature determination circuit (see FIG. 30) included in the IH control section 90. not shown). An abnormality (abnormality 4) related to the rotation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can be detected by the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .

The functions of the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) are, for example, a microwave heating control unit 130 (see FIG. 30) that acquires temperature information from the temperature sensor TS1, and a heating chamber control unit that acquires temperature information from the temperature sensor TS10. A section 159 (see FIG. 30) is in charge.
This also applies when the rotation speed of the third cooling fan 128 does not match the content of the control command from the heating chamber control section 159 .

Further, the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) is handled by the microwave heating control unit 130 and detects a malfunction of the rotation or rotation of the motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 (see FIG. 15).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the abnormality detection unit EM is configured separately from the IH control unit 90 in terms of hardware. It may be incorporated into a part of the wear.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) adopted in the first embodiment is a detection electrode (not shown) arranged on the back surface of the top plate 15 and the current flowing through the detection electrode in order to cope with the above-described "abnormality 1". A judgment circuit (not shown) is provided for monitoring changes in current and judging that hot water, cooking liquid, or the like boils and overflows from the object to be heated N during induction heating.

When detecting an abnormality, the abnormality detection unit EM (EM1) transmits an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated control device MC outputs an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to emergency stop the heating units 17HL and 17HR which are in the heating operation. Even in this case, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate.

In addition, when only the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) of the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in the upper unit 100, microwave heating or oven heating cooking (in the case of the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode) is performed in the heating chamber 113. ) is executed, the cooling fans 128 and 129 of the lower unit 200 continue to operate without being affected. These will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 45-47.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) for detecting various abnormalities occurring on the top plate 15 is as described above.

In this first embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93, which serves as another abnormality detection unit, detects the temperature of the heat sink 82 itself as well as the ambient temperature around the integrated liquid crystal display unit 30 during the induction heating operation and during a certain period thereafter. , are repeatedly measured (abnormality detection unit 2).
Therefore, the IH control unit 90 that acquires the measurement data of the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors so that the temperature around the integrated display unit 30 does not exceed the regulation value. Therefore, the temperature detection circuit 93 and the IH control section 90 are also included in the abnormality detection section 2 (EM2).

The abnormal rotation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128 and 129 falls under the category of the abnormality detection section 2 (EM2) and the abnormality detection section 3 (EM3). For example, for the first cooling fan 60, the cooling fan driving circuit 62 measures the input current for rotation driving with a current sensor, and the frequency of the current is analyzed to detect abnormal rotation. When an abnormality is detected, unlike the case of abnormality 1, the cooling fan 60 is stopped immediately by stopping the rotational drive (abnormality detection section 2).

Regarding the "abnormality 4", in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) has the function of detecting an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 as described above. have. During execution of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, when the abnormality detection unit EM2 (EM2) detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, the integrated control device MC The operation of the cooking mode is cancelled, all the heating means during the heating operation are stopped, and the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is immediately stopped.

Therefore, when an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is detected, all the heating sources automatically stop operating, which enhances safety. Moreover, since the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are immediately stopped, if the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are out of order, the situation can be avoided from becoming serious.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be explained.
12 to 17, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. As shown in FIG. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates by spot welding or screws. In Embodiment 1, as described below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

Reference numeral 101H denotes a body portion that constitutes three planes (vertical planes) of the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, which is a wall surface that is inclined forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2 .

A front plate 101F constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101 and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 is brought into close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F to prevent microwaves from leaking through the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114.例文帳に追加101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that rises vertically continuously from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101 .

The lower unit 200 has two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120 . The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140 .

The oven heat source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven chamber) 113 from the outside of the wall surface thereof, but may be present inside the heating chamber 113 to directly heat the food to be cooked. It should be noted that the following description is based on the premise that the "microwave heating source 189" does not include the "inverter circuit board 121", which will be described later, unless there is a particular contradiction.

12, 13 and 15 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120. FIG.
From the front side, the main parts are installed in the following order.
An inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is arranged on the frontmost side.

Behind the inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 serving as a microwave generation source and a waveguide 123 surrounding an oscillator 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Further, behind the waveguide 123, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 inside the antenna case are arranged.
A motor 126 for rotating or rotating the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged behind the antenna case 124 (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 127 denotes a power circuit board for supplying the output of microwave heating and power to the magnetron 122. A power circuit unit 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54 and a A microwave heating controller 130 is mounted.

12 and 13, reference numeral 128 denotes a third cooling fan, which is arranged directly below a box-shaped case A150 that accommodates the inverter circuit board 121. As shown in FIG. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. That is, it has a box-like shape with no bottom surface.

A fourth cooling fan 129 is arranged just below a box-shaped case B151 on which the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. Several heat radiation fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiation part 122H for the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 to pass through. The case B151 has a box shape with an open bottom and no bottom.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 may be collectively called "lower cooling fan". This is because these two cooling fans 128 and 199 have the function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
An inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is vertically housed within the vertical portion 308 .

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. It is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotating shaft at the center of the rotating blade is in the vertical (perpendicular) direction.

The case A 150 and the case B 151 have an opening on the entire bottom surface as described above, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged to lie inside the opening, respectively.

In FIG. 12, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are formed integrally or separately inside the case A150. The wind direction plate 199 is installed to efficiently flow the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B which will be described later.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152F is a front intake port, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The air intake is composed of a large number of small circular through-holes or rectangular or oval through-holes. This intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128. As shown in FIG.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The air intake is composed of a large number of small circular through-holes or rectangular or oval through-holes. This intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, a ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the interior of the upper unit 100 and outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 are provided. The second intake ports 152B and 152F for introducing the heat into the interior of the lower unit 200 are arranged opposite to each other with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween.

In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is viewed from the front side, with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween, there are the second intake ports 152B and 152F on the right side, and a vent (first intake port) on the left side. 164 and a vent 64 .

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 153 denotes a duct installed above the heat radiating section 122H, which guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiating section 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG. It is.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 154 is a case C, which accommodates the power circuit board 127 and the microwave heating controller 130 in a sealed state. This case C154 is made of a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating.

The case C154 is configured by stacking two parts, a lid 154A on the rear side and a container-like or box-like main body 154B on the front side. A large opening formed in the front side of the main body 154B is closed from the rear by the lid 154A.

The case C154 has a main body 154B on the front side and a substrate (not shown) on which the power circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened so that various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control section 130 can be performed.

The case C154 is installed as far away from the back surface of the heating chamber 113 as possible so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113 . It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation will not be impaired. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 face each other at the largest distance.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, the case C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support bracket 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16 .

12 and 13, reference numeral 131 denotes a door open/close detection mechanism provided as a countermeasure against radio wave leakage during microwave heating.
In order to secure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to install the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 . A representative door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 of this type is known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the patent document, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 incorporates three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch. is proposed.

Further, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-214147, a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch are used to open and close the power supply of an inverter circuit, and when the first interlock switch is short-circuited, the switch is inserted into the power supply circuit. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch in order to turn off the fuse that is in the circuit.

12 and 13 show the main parts of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 employed in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch and 132B is a door switch. If either one or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality, a monitor switch 133 (Fig. not shown) are also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pushed by a pin 134 fixed to the door 114 and protruding to open and close the built-in contact. The door switch 132B is pushed by a pin 135 fixed to the door 114 and protruding to open and close the built-in contact.

In FIG. 12, 136A is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so as to always return to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, 137 is a support plate on which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A and 136B, etc. are collectively attached. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with a plurality of screws. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 is mainly composed of various switches mounted on the support plate 137 as described above.

If the mounting positions of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B vary during the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing for operating each switch will deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, a closing detector 139 (see FIG. 30) of the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137 so that the entire support plate 137 can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with a plurality of screws. Operation check, adjustment, replacement, etc. of the closing detector 139 can be performed during manufacturing and after-sales service.

12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper portion of the case A150 housing the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

The communication port 138A guides part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 as shown in FIG. 14 to a space 141 which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to a space 142, which will be described later, and is used for cooling the infrared temperature sensor 160, which will be described later. there is

The temperature sensor 160 includes a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor substrate (not shown) housed inside the sensor case, and one or more infrared rays mounted on the surface of this sensor substrate. Main components are a detection element (not shown) and a lens (not shown) attached and fixed to the sensor case facing the infrared detection element.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at a plurality of locations in the heating chamber 113 so that the temperature can be detected over a wide range. A form in which the temperature at a wide angle is detected may be used.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 161 denotes a detection window facing the temperature sensor 160, and a gap may be formed between the temperature sensor 160 and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 so that the cooling air can pass therethrough. In Embodiment 1, a gap of about several millimeters is formed.

14 and 15, 162 is a cooking plate made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. The cooking plate 162 is formed to have external dimensions such that it can be taken out and put in from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 14, HV is the effective height dimension from the top surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 . In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the concave portion 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113. In FIG.

In this Embodiment 1, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is an example and the disclosure is not limited to this dimensional configuration.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113 . Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A with this inner width dimension, it can be said that it is the frontage dimension that determines whether or not the food to be cooked and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. The inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113 . Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 14), it can be said that it is a dimension that determines whether or not cooking utensils such as the food to be cooked, the cooking plate 162, and the frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 has a heater 163 .
The heater 163 is an electric radiation heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and is, for example, a sheathed heater. Alternatively, it is a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire support plate made of thin mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two heaters, an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
163A is an upper heater fixed on the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact or close proximity, and 163B is a lower heater fixed under the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact or close proximity. .

The upper heater 163A can select multiple levels of heating power within a range from maximum heating power of 1000W to minimum heating power of 50W. Also, the lower heater can be selected from multiple levels of heating power within a range from maximum heating power of 1000W to minimum heating power of 50W.

In FIG. 14, 166R is a right partition plate which is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R with the right wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A left partition plate 166L is vertically installed to form a gap GP5L with the left wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (radiation) from the heating chamber 113 .

Reference numeral 167 denotes an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper portion of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and its size is several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air with the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the upper edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 168 denotes a lower heat shield plate having a longitudinal cross-sectional shape vertically symmetrical to that of the upper heat shield plate 167 . The lower heat shield plate covers the entire area below the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap is a closed space so that air does not flow with the outside. The periphery of the lower heat shield plate 168 is fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 169 denotes an upper case superimposed on the peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 . A lower case 170 overlaps the peripheral portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 .

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have vertically symmetrical vertical cross-sectional shapes, and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP8 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that air does not flow.

A sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged in the GP9. If each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a structure in which multiple layers are stacked instead of a single layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. The planar size (vertical and horizontal dimensions) of each heat insulating material 175A to 17D is at least larger than the installation range of each of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 171 denotes a partition plate that defines a passage 172 above the upper case 169 through which the cooling air RF5 flows. A communication port 173 is opened in the upper portion of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171 , and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173 .

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 174 denotes a communication port formed in the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the communication port 174 is connected to the inlet portion of the exhaust duct 102. As shown in FIG. 102E is the terminal end which is the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 has two independent upper and lower internal passages 102A and 102B. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
In addition, the cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 and having a raised temperature flows through the other internal passage 102B.

32, the exhaust duct 102 has an internal passage (internal route) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal route) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the merging part.

The air velocity of the cooling air RF5 is increased by the outlet of the cooling air RF5 with the opening area of the air passage narrowed. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the outlet. Due to such action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, the two cooling airflows RF5 and RF6 are both efficiently discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that a method of merging at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted without adopting such an induction structure.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large feeding port formed in the rear wall (rear wall) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes the feeding port 180 from the outside. It is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant glass. The cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181 . The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the rear side of the cover 181 . The motor 126 for driving the antenna is thus fixed to the back side of the waveguide 123 via the heat-resistant sealing material 184 .

Reference numeral 126A denotes a rotating shaft of the antenna driving motor 126, which is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end side (front end) of the rotary shaft 126A. Although the rotary shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, only a certain range from the antenna 125 side is made of metal, and the area from there to the antenna drive motor 126 is made of plastic, ceramic, or the like that is heat-resistant and insulated. It may also be formed of a material having excellent properties.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 185 denotes a radio wave sealing chamber formed around the rotating shaft 126A with a predetermined size. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. Further, in order to effectively prevent microwave leakage, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is placed on the side closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure, so that microwaves from around the rotation shaft 126A are absorbed. You may try to prevent leakage. In addition, the choke structure in the microwave heating device is disclosed in Japanese patent documents, for example, JP-A-2011-174669, JP-A-2010-255978, JP-A-63-172828 (a quarter-wave choke combined use of the room and the radio wave absorber), etc., so a detailed explanation is omitted.

In FIG. 15, LA indicates the dimension from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the rear end of the antenna driving motor 126. In FIG. Henceforth, this dimension is called a "projection dimension." It is desirable to reduce this projecting dimension LA, but in reality, as described above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also necessary, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna driving motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is This projection dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 15, GP10 is the gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101. The upper end of the motor 126 is 69 mm, and conversely, the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. degree. It is dimensionally impossible to dispose the case C154 in the gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is shifted rightward from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126. As shown in FIG.
This made it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113 .

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of door 114 will be described.
In FIG. 15, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame that constitutes the outer shell of the door 114 and is shaped like a picture frame when viewed from the front. 192 is an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the central portion of the inner frame 192. As shown in FIG.

Reference numeral 191 denotes a cover whose outer peripheral edge is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is transparent and heat-resistant so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen. It is made of plastic, glass, or the like.

Reference numeral 193 denotes an inner seal frame formed with a large number of small holes having dimensions that do not transmit microwaves in a portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W. The inner seal frame is formed entirely by press-molding a thin metal plate, and has a choke chamber 194 formed with an entrance (slit) on the heating chamber 113 side at the outer peripheral edge.

195 is a seal plate made of a metal thin plate. The outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 is continuously curved toward the inner seal frame 193 as shown in FIG. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 .

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the microwave supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 does not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

A transparent seal plate 196 is provided inside a portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate along the upper surface of the door 114 and having a width dimension at least equal to the width of the door 114 . The upper shielding plate 197 is provided in the shape of an eave close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with fasteners such as metal screws so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101. FIG.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by the lower case 101 by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13), the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by holding the handle portion 115 and pulling it forward.
At the initial stage of such opening, there is a concern that a portion of microwaves may leak due to a momentary gap in the overlapping portion between the door 114 and the lower case 101. However, in the first embodiment, the upper shielding plate 197 can suppress such unwanted microwave leakage above the door 114 .

5, it is recommended that the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 is 40 mm or less. to the lower surface of the flange 16A. In this Embodiment 1, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, since the height dimension C1 of the front descending portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, The upper case 16 does not protrude downward beyond the front descending portion 2F. Therefore, the lower space of the upper case 16 becomes larger than the conventional one, which is advantageous when installing the lower case 101 as described below.

In FIG. 17, reference numeral 201 denotes an introduction port formed in the front part of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a large number of through holes having a diameter that prevents leakage of microwaves. The reason why the inlet 201 is provided at the front portion of the right wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inner side of the door 114 to suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. be.
Cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and part of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113 at the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air from the introduction port 201 is to "prevent fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small amount of air. It should be noted that the supply of air from the narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160 may not be adopted.

(Control means of lower unit 200)
Next, details of various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30 again.
In FIG. 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129. It controls the start and stop of the operation, operating conditions, etc.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120 . Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91 .

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electrical components (diodes, etc.) for converting AC power to DC are mounted on the power circuit board 127 and housed in a case C154 in a sealed state.

When receiving the command signal from the power control unit 72, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 according to the command signal, and the output of the magnetron 122 has a function of transmitting a command signal to lower the voltage to the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control section 130 includes a temperature sensor TS1 for detecting the temperature of the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122. As shown in FIG. If the temperature of the heat radiating part 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than the specified value even after the microwave cooking is finished, a command signal for continuing the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is sent to the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. Send to fan 129 . In FIG. 30, illustration of cooling fan driving circuits for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is omitted.

139 is a closing detector for the door 114 . The closing detection unit 139 detects the opening/closing status of one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B (see FIG. 12), and the monitor switch 133 (not shown) by means of the current flowing through each circuit or the opening/closing signal. It is electrically detected. That is, it is a detection unit corresponding to the operation of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 described above.

Since the circuit board that constitutes the closing detector 139 is attached to the support plate 137, the support plate 137 may be removed for inspection, or the circuit board may be measured with the support plate 137 installed to check whether the circuit board operates normally. can be inspected (see FIG. 12).

Reference numeral 158 denotes a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113. The temperature sensor 160 and the measurement signal from this temperature sensor are and a circuit (not shown) that analyzes and converts to temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start/stop of their operation, operating conditions (thermal power, ie, heat generation amount), and the like. A control circuit of the heating chamber control section 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 13).

When receiving a command signal from the power control unit 72, the heating chamber control unit 159 operates according to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. and a command signal to lower the output of the lower heater 163 . In order to lower the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the energization rate per unit time is also changed to change the substantial heating power.

(Drive circuit for induction heating source 9)
Next, the configuration of the drive circuit for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the heating cooker 1 will be described. In order to simplify the description, FIG. 33 will be described with an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R.

In the heating cooker 1, induction heating is performed by supplying high-frequency power to the IH coils 17L and 17R from the drive circuit 74. As shown in FIG.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 for the right IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or may be different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detector 77a and an output current detector 77b.
The current detection data of the input current detection section 77 a and the output current detection section 77 b are sent to the IH control section 90 .

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, converts an AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the DC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. FIG. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies the high-frequency power to the resonance circuit composed of the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor 76.

A resonance circuit including the resonance capacitor 76 has a resonance frequency corresponding to the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonance capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and a high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current induces the heated object N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R. heated.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are composed of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may be composed of a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based materials.

The power control switching element 83 described in FIG. 12 is the IGBTs 79a and 79b referred to in FIG.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce conduction loss as a switching element. Also, even if the switching frequency, that is, the driving frequency, is set to a high frequency, that is, even if the switching is performed at a high speed, heat dissipation is improved. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the heat radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached, and to reduce the size and cost of the drive unit.

The output current detector 77b is connected to a resonance circuit composed of the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor . The output current detector 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH controller 90. In this configuration, a half-bridge inverter has been described, but the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge inverter. Also, although the circuit described with reference to FIG. 33 is of the current resonance type, it may be of the voltage resonance type.

As described in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for performing wireless communication with the home gateway 411 that comprehensively manages the power consumption, operation information, and the like of the household electrical appliances 400. Yes, it can send and receive radio signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control unit MC by communication wiring. However, the longer the wiring, the more susceptible it is to noise. It is desirable to shorten the wiring that connects the communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the noise mentioned above, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation section 40 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41 . Also, the integrated control device MC is installed in the left-right central portion of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(cooling air passage)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
12, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 has an upper space 300A and an upper space 300A by the bottom surface 16S of the upper case 16 made of metal, and the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2. It is partitioned into two spaces, ie, a lower space 300B formed below. That is, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" 16S, dividing the interior of the main body case HC into two spaces, upper and lower.

The IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the upper air passage AH that guides cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils pass through the ventilation hole 64 penetrating the partition wall 16S. Outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101 through the lower case 101 .

On the other hand, a lower air passage UH for guiding cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. A heat radiation part 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiating portion 122H is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152B formed at the right end portion of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Also, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the air introduced from the first intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101 .

The cooling air that has flowed through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air that has flowed through the lower air passage UH do not join in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52 and discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the exhaust port 20 .

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending vertically in the same gap GP1, and is finally discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire cooling air path will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 32, the air (outside air) outside the cooker 1 passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooker 1 through two routes.

A first route: from the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side of the lower case 101, via the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, from the first cooling fan 60 to the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R. A path for cooling and leading to the exhaust port 20 . In FIG. 32, this is described as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: outside air is sucked through two air intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101; One of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128 . The other outside air passes through the fourth cooling fan 129 and cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 . Thus, although there are two secondary routes, they eventually enter a common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20 . In FIG. 32, this is described as "lower air passage" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space formed below the partition wall 16S. 300B and 300B are divided into two spaces, each of which is provided with mutually independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and dedicated cooling fans 60, 128, 129 are provided for each of these air passages. It is a configuration with
The upper unit 100 also has a second cooling fan 61 that cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inside of the upper unit 100 .

(Control menu and cooking menu in the central control panel)
Next, a control menu that can be displayed and selected on the integrated display section 30 by the central operation section 40M will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the "IH control menu" of the "single cooking mode" that can be selected by the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R that use the induction heating source 9 is shown in FIG. Boiled food, deep-fried food (automatic cooking), etc.

However, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M as shown in FIG. 34 (except for the linked cooking mode, which will be described later). These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. A "control menu program" is a command for executing these control menu groups, and is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final cooking obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the name of the ingredients, and the like. In other words, the food to be cooked cannot be directly selected in the "control menu".

The ``control menus'' in the ``single cooking mode'' KM1 and the ``combined cooking mode'' KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M are broadly categorized in consideration of the types, methods, conditions, etc. of heating until cooking is completed. Therefore, the names of the control menus are conceptual and comprehensive, such as "heating" and "oven (cooking)".

Among the control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M, there is a control menu called "microwave grill control menu" or "RG control menu" using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG. The control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M does not include the cooking menu of the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

In Embodiment 1, the induction heating source 9 has the individual operation units 40L and 40R, and can directly select the single cooking mode KM1 such as "warm".
On the other hand, for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, since the central operation unit (common operation unit) 40M is used, a dedicated display screen for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 (third specific screen 30ST ) cannot be displayed.

Therefore, in Embodiment 1, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 . Instead, the same "single heating menu" as the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected from the "RG control menu" described below.

The RG control menu is fundamentally different from the later-described "cooperation cooking mode" KM3. In addition, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 directly corresponds to individual cooking items. In other words, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is an individual control pattern (control menu) based on individual cooking items. These will be explained in detail later.

Various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 34 includes a control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 using the microwave heating source 189 (for example, "manual range"). The third specific screen 30ST cannot be displayed.

The “left display area” in FIG. 34 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30 .
The "central display area" is also the second area 30M.
The "right display area" also means the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is operated, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 always displays the control menu "warm" in the left display area of FIG. This is because the RG control menu "warm up" is set by default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in FIG. 34, in addition to "heating", there are a total of 11 RGs such as "microwave manual", "boil under leafy vegetables", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven". There is a control menu. However, the "central heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 34 is not actually displayed because it is not supported by the upper unit 100 described above.

The “RG control menu” is a control pattern (combined cooking mode KM2) that uses both microwave heating (microwave) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating.
However, in this Embodiment 1, the control pattern of either microwave heating (microwave) or oven heating (single cooking mode KM1) is exceptionally included.

The "central heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (central induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100. , strictly speaking, neither a "range" nor a "grill".

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, “microwave” refers to cooking using the microwave heating source 189 . “Grilling” refers to cooking using the oven heating source 188 .

In the first area of FIG. 34, a total of 10 types such as "heating" and "grilling" are displayed. manual", etc. Also, "warm" uses only the microwave heating source 9, and therefore does not originally belong to the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. However, it is included as an exception. Note that "warm", "grill", "microwave manual", etc. shown in FIG. 34 do not correspond to the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The contents described in the "central display area" of FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for "Central Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of "Central Display Area".

The contents described in the "right display area" in FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Right Display Area". A blank portion means that nothing is displayed.

A database of RG control menus is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a first specific screen 30SP, which will be described later, and serves as a guide for switching to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Information 30P is displayed.
(2) When the input key 43M1 is operated without pressing the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M, the control menu group of the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, and the first area 30L displays the control menu as a default display. There is one "warm", the second area 30M displays "80° C." indicating temperature conditions, and the third area 30R displays no control conditions. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the guidance information 30P that is helpful for heat cooking is displayed in the third area 30R. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 and the like.

As for the RG control menu, when the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, one RG control menu is selected from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. Corresponding "control conditions" (temperature, heating power, time, etc.) are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "compound cooking mode KM2" such as "RG cooking", then the user operates the input key 43MS for commanding the start of the heating operation. Then, the mode shifts to the "combined cooking mode KM2" by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be explained later.

The specific contents of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, control conditions, detailed data such as additional information, display programs, and the like are stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.
An outline of the main RG control menu will be described below.

(1) Warming: Since the microwave heating source 189 is used to heat the food, it is originally one of the "control menus for the single cooking mode KM1". However, as an exception, it is classified as one of the composite cooking modes KM2.
This "warming up" is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is "80°C", the microwave irradiation stops automatically when the food reaches 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before starting heating.
As shown in FIG. 34, the temperature can be set in increments of 5°C within the range of 0°C to 90°C. When heating frozen food, the temperature can be set in increments of 2°C within the range of -10°C to 0°C. The microwave heating power is fixed at 500W.

(2) Microwave manual operation: Refers to heating the food using the microwave heating source 189, but this is done by setting the heating time. Also, the microwave heating output can be selected from three levels of 500W, 200W, and 100W. The heating time also has a default value of 1 minute, but can be set from 10 seconds to 15 minutes at 500 W output.
This "microwave manual" also originally belongs to the "control menu for the single cooking mode KM1" because it is heated only by microwaves. However, as an exception, this is also classified as one of the control menus for the complex cooking mode. That is, the RG control menu shown in FIG. 25 also includes the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189 as described above.

(3) Boil under leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach and Chinese cabbage, using the microwave heating source 189 . The microwave heating power value is not displayed, and the second area displays "standard" as the default display. A non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This “boiled under leafy vegetables” is also originally one of the “control menus for the single cooking mode KM1”.

(4) Boil under root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods, especially root vegetables such as potatoes whose roots and rhizomes are eaten, using the microwave heating source 189 . The microwave heating power value is not displayed, and the second area displays "standard" as the default display. In addition, since the heating power value is determined in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, when adjusting the heating power, the default display "standard" in the second area is changed to "weak", "strong", etc. ( select).
This “boiled under leafy vegetables” is also originally one of the “control menus for the single cooking mode KM1”.

(5) Meat thawing: RG control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
Since the microwave heating source 189 is used to heat the food, it is one of the “control menus for the single cooking mode KM1”.
(6) RG cooking: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, it is one kind of control menu of pure "compound cooking mode KM2".
A control pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a control pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. There are three types of control patterns. The heating power value (watt) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by selecting one of "weak", "strong", etc. by looking at the display in the second area 30M. .

(7) RG recooking: suitable for reheating food that has already been cooked using the heating chamber 113; This is also one kind of control menu of pure "compound cooking mode KM2". A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are used together.
(8) RG manual operation: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and for cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In addition, a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of patterns. This is also one kind of control menu of pure "compound cooking mode KM2".

(9) Grill: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As described above, the temperature control of the heating chamber 113 is not performed, and the control of detecting the temperature rise of the food and stopping the heating operation is not performed. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control section 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. Grilled fish is a typical applicable cooking. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. This is actually one type of control menu for the "single cooking mode KM1", but is prepared as one control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2 in the first embodiment.

(10) Oven: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the heating chamber control unit 159 controls power supply so as to reach a set target temperature.
As shown in FIG. 25, the default temperature is 180° C., so the user can change this target temperature if desired. Incidentally, as explained in the "grill" section, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the energization rate of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the amount of heat generated by the two heaters 163A and 163B. This is one type of control menu for the "single cooking mode KM1".

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 similarly showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating individual control menu names (for example, "warm", "manual range", etc.) among a total of ten RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the storage device. It is stored in the first layer of MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "heating time for grill cooking") that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and reference information 30P and 30P1 are stored in the third layer of the storage device MM. is stored in

(coordinated cooking mode)
Next, the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, inside the storage device MM, data of the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the input key 43MC is operated, and "linkage data" read out when the input key 43M1 is operated after this are stored. The control data and operation program for the "cooking mode KM3" (these may be collectively referred to as the "link operation program" hereinafter) are stored in a storage area separate from the RG control menu.

Here, the data of the "linkage cooking mode KM3" and the "linkage operation program" are information specifying a plurality of heat sources used for executing individual cooking items (eg, hamburgers), various control conditions, It contains information on the cooking process (heat power, standard heating temperature, etc.), information on control parameters, and the order (sequence) of the heating sources to be operated. In other words, it is necessary to cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the internal processing circuits and processors that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

Specifying one cooking menu for cooperative cooking mode KM3 automatically determines the available heat source(s) and the order in which they operate. For example, for "hamburger" which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, there is no need to first select either one of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL. First, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and when the user sees the display and selects the right heating section 17HR, for example, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can actually be started.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with the content of using the left heating unit 17HL in advance. The user can set in advance not to use the left heating section 17HL but to use the right heating section 17HR. However, such a setting may not be possible in some cases.
Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking process 1, and in the next cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is heated by the oven heat source 188, the information of the series of cooking processes is stored in the storage device MM. There is.

In addition, as additional information 331 that serves as a reference for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, information on the cooking process described later, information on the heat source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), Guidance information, instruction information, etc., which prompts the user to perform an input operation in order to proceed, are stored in association with each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak" and "fried chicken") of each linked cooking mode.

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process until the set (target) temperature is reached is called the "preheating process". The steps are called "cooking step 1" or "cooking step 2".
For example, in induction heating, the “cooking step” is when the user places the object to be cooked on an object to be heated N, such as a frying pan, which has already been heated to a desired temperature after the preheating process, and actually starts heating. is the start point of
In this way, when the same heating source is used, the central operation unit An operation such as pressing a specific input key on 40M or individual operation units 40L and 40R may be added.

(Information on proper use of RG control menu, etc.)
Next, the proper use of the RG (range grill) control menu described with reference to FIG. 34 and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9 will be described.

37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 by the induction heating source 9. FIG.
The names of the control menus shown in Category 3 in FIG. 37 are partially displayed in the first area 30L as shown in FIG. 34, and are used by the user to select the control menu.

Further, as shown in classification 2 of FIG. 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data in the first layer or second layer of the storage device MM as described with reference to FIGS. There is.

Accordingly, at the stage of operating the input key 43M1, the user can arbitrarily display information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in Category 2 of FIG. Further, the integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in this category 2 on the integrated display unit 30 at the stage when the user selects the RG control menu, thereby assisting the user's input operation. For example, when the user presses the input key 43M1 once and a predetermined reference time (eg, 10 seconds) elapses, in any of the above-described first area 30L to third area 30R, Information indicating the main points of each control menu shown in Category 2 of FIG. 37 is displayed. Alternatively, the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to provide voice notification. For example, "Warm up" is guided by saying, "This is the best way to heat rice or boxed lunches to your preferred temperature."

As shown in categories 1 to 4 in FIG. 37, the memory device MM stores information that can be used to guide the selection of the induction heating source 9 . Therefore, at the stage of step ST4 shown in FIG. 38, the information of classification 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed on the integrated display section 30 at an appropriate timing to assist the selection operation of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL. It is configured.

(Operation of heating cooker)
Next, the outline of the operation of the heating cooker 1 configured as described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47. FIG.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation of the heating cooker 1 before starting cooking. FIG. 39 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation during induction heating cooking in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation in the case where the heating cooker 1 performs microwave heating during induction heating cooking. FIG. 41 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heat cooker 1 and the type of heat cooking. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality of the heating cooker 1 is detected. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality of the heating cooker 1 is detected. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process in the case of abnormality detection of the heating cooker 1. FIG.

FIG. 38 will be described.
A basic operation program from power-on to start of preparation for cooking is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power supply 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed. (See FIGS. 20 and 30) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 38).

A predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power conversion unit 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The control program of the integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing whether or not there is an abnormality in itself.

Then, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130, which centrally control the induction heating source 9, are checked for abnormality.

The temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 has a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 in order to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperature of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature near the integrated display section 30, and the like. Since they are connected, the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93 . Thereby, the IH control section 90 can determine whether or not there is an abnormality (ST2).

Also, in the heating chamber controller 159 and the microwave heating controller 130, the temperatures detected by the temperature sensors TS1, TS2, and TS10 can be acquired to determine whether there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, "transmit start information to the outside" means that the wireless communication section 49 notifies the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. This will be explained later.

Since the IH control unit 90 collects temperature information of the main components built in the upper unit 100, the IH control unit 90 performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before starting cooking. For example, when the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistance temperature (for example, 70° C.) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display section 30, the IH control section 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, it notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality, and executes processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started. Note that this process may be executed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays a message that "there is no abnormality, so cooking can be started" (ST3). The display screen at this initial time will be described later with reference to FIG.
At the same time, the voice synthesizing device 95 notifies the same content as the content displayed on the integrated display section 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information such as control menus and recipe information useful for health management within the range previously set by the user. For example, the information that the user of this heating cooker 1 has sent in advance to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using the information communication terminal device 418 or the like can be obtained when the integrated display unit 30 is activated.

When the cooker 1 acquires some information, it is preferable to notify the user by lighting a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation section 40 of the upper unit 100 .

The inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is not acquired at this point. However, as shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 is sent to the home gateway 411 at this time.

Next, after completion of the abnormality determination as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display section 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance for prompting the user to select the heating means (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether or not the single cooking mode KM1 is selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are individual operation units, without the input key 43M1 being operated (STC).

As described above (see FIGS. 34 and 37), the control menu "heating" in the "microwave heating" using only the microwave heating source 189 belongs to the single cooking mode KM1, but this control menu ("heating" ) is the input key 43M1. Therefore, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected from the central operation unit 40. FIG. Only the induction heating source 9 can directly select the heating source in this heating cooker 1 .

If neither the input key 43M1 nor the input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (for example, 10 seconds or 30 seconds), neither the cooperative cooking mode KM3 nor the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected. It is determined that it was not broken. Immediately after step ST4 or within the grace period, when the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R, the heating source of the upper unit 100, that is, the IH coils 17L and 17R is selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is operated in the step STC, the process proceeds to the processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode. Processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

When step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, the process proceeds to the next step ST10. The subsequent induction heating control steps will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to menu selection step ST8 of the two heating sources provided in the lower unit 200. FIG. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

At step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are sequentially displayed on the integrated display section 30 in a predetermined order. These three types of control menus are a total of ten control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L.

Assuming that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used, the control menu displayed at step ST8 in FIG. 38 includes the following three types of control menus.
(1) Cooking menu using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). "Grill" and "Oven" in the control menu shown in FIG. 34 correspond.
(2) A control menu (ST9B) that uses the microwave heating device 120 in addition to the above (1). This corresponds to the "microwave grill" heating (cooking) of the control menu shown in FIGS.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) using only the microwave heating device 120; This corresponds to "microwave manual", "boil under leafy vegetables", "heat up", etc. in the control menu shown in FIG.
It should be noted that the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" is not displayed here.

It should be noted that if it is found that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is better halfway through, by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M, it is possible to proceed to step STR1 in FIG. That is, it is possible to proceed to immediately before the determination of permission condition 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 39 shows the operation steps of the integrated controller MC after the step (ST11) of selecting the induction heating control menu.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG.
An example using the right heating unit 17HR will be described below.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control section 90 determines that the user has commanded the heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not an object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) N is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether or not the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value, and the estimation result is is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heat treatment should be suitable for a standard-diameter pan or a large-diameter pan (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if the pot is unsuitable for heating, it will be processed differently from the standard pot.

Upon receiving the command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 prompting the user to select the desired cooking "IH control menu" (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the cooking "IH control menu", heating power, cooking time, etc. using the right operation unit 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in earnest in the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
The "IH control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes seven items: "rapid heating", "fried food", "boiling", "preheating", "rice cooking", "boiling", and "boiling + keeping warm". be. However, in order to simplify the operability, the aforementioned "function setting" may be set so that selection of some or all of the seven IH control menus is disabled.

When the user selects one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to these IH control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the amount of energization of the IH coil 17R is (thermal power), energization time, etc. are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display prompting the user to set arbitrary heating power, power supply time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5). Note that the operation program of the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the IH control section 90 .

Unless the user stops using the input key 43R1 again by touching the input key 43R1 within a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the display as described above is performed, the IH control unit 90 drives the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R to start induction heating (MS6). The input function of the input key 43R1 changes every time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start and stop of the heating operation.

In the case of the "large-diameter pan", steps MS1 to MS7 are basically the same, but some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 of FIG. 39 cannot be selected as the IH control menu.

The "high-speed heating menu" in FIG. 39 can only be used to heat a "normal pan" or a "large-diameter pan" using the IH coil 17L on the left side. In the first embodiment, a small pan means a pan with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be induction heated.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources such as induction heating and microwave heating are used at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. Note that the examples described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41 are not the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The example shown in FIG. 40 is a case where the user attempts microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100 . Even when oven cooking or grill cooking is performed using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the induction heating cooking period, the heating process described with reference to FIG. Basic total power control (in the entire heating cooker 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72. FIG.
Also, in this case, it is necessary to select the combined cooking mode KM2 with the central operation unit 40M.

When the user uses the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 to perform microwave heating, first the main power switch 97 is turned ON, and the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40 selects the heating source of the lower unit 200. There is a need to.
However, an easy way to do this is to simply open the door 114 . That is, in Embodiment 1, when the upper unit 100 is in operation (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), the lower unit 200 can start cooking. Therefore. The operation of turning on the main power switch 97 like the upper unit 100 is not required.

When the door 114 is opened, there are the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B which are opened and closed according to the opening and closing of the door 114 as described in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, so the main power switch 97 is turned on. Therefore, the integrated control device MC can detect the opening of both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B (by the function of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131).

In FIG. 40, when receiving a signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened as described above (step S1), the integrated controller MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guidance is, for example, "To start heating, select microwave heating and press the start button."

With the default setting of microwave heating, the target temperature is 80°C, so even if the door 114 is closed and heating is started, it will automatically stop when the temperature of the food to be cooked reaches 80°C. To change 80° C. (for example, 75° C.), change the temperature condition and then press the input key 43MS (see FIG. 21).

When the user selects, for example, "range manual" from the compound cooking menu with the input key 43M1, and then instructs "heating start" with the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the magnetron 122 decides. In step S3, the integrated control device MC uses the power consumption value that is known in advance by reflecting the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in the rated power consumption value Determine whether the value is exceeded.

For example, the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the power consumption of the second cooling fan 61 are stored as data in the integrated control device MC, so the power consumption of the upper unit 100 is and the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. Note that the integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption using the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 or the like when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to lower either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of the microwave heating. In step S3, the current cooking priority for induction heating is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, when the upper unit 100 is cooking rice (in particular, the “boiling process”), the rice cooking (boiling process) is given priority and the heating power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In addition, when "frying" is performed in the upper unit 100, the frying is controlled so that the heating power is automatically increased so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively according to the introduction of the ingredients. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In step S5, if it is determined that induction heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the microwave rated output is 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced. and set the output to 300 W, for example. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction will be applied. The notification is made by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating with low thermal power (S7).
Since the heating chamber 113 has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to determine whether the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. is monitored by the microwave heating control unit 130 (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, it is determined whether or not the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). As long as the induction heating operation is not completed, the steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating controller 130 outputs a signal to the integrated controller MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12 to inform that the microwave heating has ended.

On the other hand, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, where a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to restore the heating power initially intended by the user and continue microwave heating. Then, the monitoring of the temperature of the food to be cooked is continued (S11).

Then, when the target temperature is reached, the integrated controller MC receives a signal from the microwave heating controller 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking depends on the control menu (for example, "fried food") and the cooking process (for example, , "Boiling process" of rice cooking), it was premised that the priority of induction heating was determined at that time.

Therefore, when the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to the induction heating side, an instruction to start microwave heating is given by the input key of the central operation unit 40M. For example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 before the operation of the 43MS. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 also issues a warning message. Further, even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be a case where the thermal power value is forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in the entire heating cooker 1 can be set in the "function setting" described above. Once the power priority is set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the set conditions are stored in the integrated control unit MC and are inherited after the next cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the temperature of the object to be heated is monitored, and the microwave heating is terminated when the target temperature is reached. However, there is also a control method for measuring the irradiation time of microwaves and ending cooking when a set time elapses, so FIG. 41 will be described next.

FIG. 41 shows an example in which a control method is adopted in which the cooking is finished within the microwave irradiation time.
Since steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, description thereof will be omitted.

When starting microwave heating in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

In the process, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated in consideration of the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has passed, the microwave heating is terminated and this is reported (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 may be used together until the set time 2 elapses.

(Integrated control device and total power consumption control)
Next, FIGS. 42 and 43 will be described.
42 and 43 are flow charts for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. In the example shown in these two figures, the user first uses the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 to perform microwave heating (in single cooking mode KM1) during induction cooking in the upper unit 100. This is the case when trying to Even in this case, the basic total power amount control (for the entire heating cooker 1) as described with reference to FIG.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, unlike FIGS. 40 and 41, the induction heating device consisting of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating device 120, the IH coils 17L and 17R, the inverter circuit 81, etc. It also shows the sending and receiving of signals.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, and the like. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, a start signal is sent to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R, the control menu, etc. (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39) are determined in the input operation unit 40, information indicating the content is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). . That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum heating power and operation time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. When there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 causes the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R to start heating operations.

A case in which induction heating cooking is started in this manner and microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started with the maximum heating power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are opened as described with reference to FIG. , a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 is sent to the integrated controller MC (L3).

When the user inputs thermal power through the central operation unit 40M, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply gives an instruction to “start heating” from the central operation unit 40M, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130 .

If there is no abnormality on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, the microwave heating control unit 130 transmits a "notice signal" to start cooking to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, if the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating apparatus is 1000 W, the "notice signal" including the information that 1000 W is to be used, as shown in FIG.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122, and Using the known power consumption value, determine the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed at the same time, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total power consumption regulation value. (same as step S3 in FIGS. 40 and 41). Then, the result is transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As another method, the upper limit of the total power amount of the lower unit 200 (the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (the induction heating source 9 ) are used at the same time, it may be determined whether or not the total electric energy regulation value is exceeded.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to lower either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated controller MC determines the priority of induction heating cooking at that time from the induction heating control menu and the heating process.

In the example of FIG. 42, the heating power of microwave heating is not reduced because it is set to give priority to microwave heating.

In step S5, if it is determined that the microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of the induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is commanded to lower the target heating power of the IH coil 17R, temporarily reducing the power consumption. lower it. Notify users of any such restrictions. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 .

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low heating power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side ends, the IH control section 90 determines that the power has been reduced from the current values of the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b. Then, a message to the effect that the power reduction has been completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). Upon receiving this transmission, the integrated controller MC transmits a permitting signal for starting the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A includes a current detection section (not shown) such as the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100. FIG.

Therefore, when microwave heating ends, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A that the heating operation has ended, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Also, microwave heating may be performed for a certain period of time depending on the timer setting. In this case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the elapsed time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After completion of microwave heating, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to the IH controller 90 so as to restore the set thermal power initially desired by the user (L9). Then, increase the heating power to the initial target level and continue the induction heating (S10).

Then, when the set cooking time and target temperature are reached, the IH control unit 90 terminates the induction heating. Then, the integrated control unit MC is notified that the operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation and cooling operation of induction heating cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of each part when induction heating is performed will be described.

When a command to start induction heating cooking is given in the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and the IH coils 17L and 17R. drive the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

An operation command signal is issued from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .
Simultaneously with the start of driving the inverter circuits 81L and 81R or at a slightly delayed timing, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are started to operate.

The blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may not be fixed. For example, depending on the temperatures of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display section 30, the blowing capacity may be automatically changed between weak operation and strong operation.

In general, when the cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, there is a concern that the wind noise of the fan will become louder, resulting in noise. Therefore, the temperature detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined in advance as a correspondence table (data table) from data such as a previous ventilation test. It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control section 90. FIG. The IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as needed according to the data table.

Note that the correspondence table (data table) for determining the operating intensity of the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control section 90. FIG.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation holes 64 positioned directly below the first cooling fan 60 . Cooling air RF1 is pushed into the first air passage F1 from the air outlet 60A as indicated by a thick arrow in FIG.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61 . Cooling air RF2 is pushed into the second air passage F2 from the outlet 61A as indicated by a thick arrow in FIG.

Here, one of the characteristics of this Embodiment 1 is demonstrated. In particular, the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25, 27 and 28. FIG.

The first cooling fan 60 has a flat rotor blade 60T that rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 60C advances to the outlet 60A while turning as shown in FIG.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The wind speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the blower outlet 60A is not uniform in the entire front-rear direction of the blower outlet 60A. The speed of the cooling air that has swirled at the outermost side inside the fan case 60C is the highest, and the speed decreases toward the inner side. This state is schematically shown by three solid-line arrows in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A advances in the direction of the air outlet line FL1, but the rotation direction RD1 of the rotor blades 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself 27, the direction of the cooling air is gradually changed rearward toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after blowing out from the blow-out port 60A concentrates on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the partition wall 11 positioned at the center of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two front and rear rows. Then, it moves rightward while being restricted from moving forward by the rear surface of the partition wall 11 . In FIG. 27, the flow of the cooling air RF1 that flows around the radiation fins 82FN is indicated by the dashed arrow.

Since the cover 70 is installed so as to surround the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, the main components of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A do not diffuse around, but rather reach the partition walls. 11 are pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiating fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the rear side.

Since the first air passage F1 starts after passing through the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A enters the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1. is introduced and carried straight as it is to the outlet FO on the right side as the cooling air RF1.

However, there is no direct connection between the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70, and there is a gap GP14 and a front notch 70A. It turns backward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. Then it flows to a relatively low pressure part. Therefore, cooling air is also generated that flows in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L.

The flow of cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25, 27 and 28. FIG.

A flat rotor blade 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 61C advances toward the outlet 61A while swirling as shown in FIG. Then, the air is blown toward the inverter board 80 from the outlet 61A.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the blower outlet 61A is not uniform in the entire front-rear direction of the blower outlet 61A. The cooling air that has swirled at the outermost side inside the fan case 61C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inner side. This state is indicated by three solid line arrows in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A advances in the direction of the air outlet line FL2, but the rotation direction RD2 of the rotor blades 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the cooling air 61FL itself 27, the direction of the cooling air is gradually changed rearward toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after blowing out from the blower outlet 61A concentrates on the front (front) side of the partition wall 11 positioned at the center of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two front and rear rows. Then, it moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the front surface of the partition wall 11 . The flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the radiation fins 82FN is indicated by dashed arrows in FIG.

A cover 70 is installed so as to enclose the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a small gap therebetween.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after blowing out from the air outlet 61A does not diffuse to the surroundings, but is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiating fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the front side of the partition wall 11. .

Since the first air passage F1 starts after passing through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is at the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. is introduced and carried straight as it is to the outlet FO on the right side as the cooling air RF2.

However, since the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap (not shown) and a front notch 70A, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A also leaks forward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. Then it flows to a relatively low pressure part. Therefore, it flows as a cooling air branched in the spatial direction directly below the front input operation unit 40 and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The ventilation holes 64 directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 directly below the second cooling fan 60 are provided adjacently on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but there are many of them. may be provided and the group of small holes may be shared.

A diode 79c (see FIG. 33) and other electric parts are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and these are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching elements 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Similarly, the power control switching element 83 is used for the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during the induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A travels rightward while cooling parts such as various switches arranged in the input operation unit 40 that receive input operations, the liquid crystal display screen, the display unit drive circuit 63, and the like.

As indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 24, some of the cooling airflow RF1 changes its direction upward when it leaves the outlet FO of the cover 70. There are two main types of air flow: cooling air RF3, which travels over the cover 70 while reversing to the left, and cooling air RF4, which travels toward the filter circuit board 54. FIG.

The cooling air RF3 flows below the right IH coil 17R and then directly below the left IH coil 17L. In this process, the two IH coils 17R, 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250° C. to 300° C. during induction heating. Therefore, as described above, cooling is performed with cooling airflows RF3 and RF4, which are a combination of the two cooling airflows RF1 and RF2.

As described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R traveling to the right side of the partition plate 14 travels backward while cooling the filter circuit board 54 and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B. 53R is an exhaust plate and has a large number of through holes 53R1.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L and 17R also changes its direction and advances in the direction of the exhaust window 52A, which is the final exhaust port, passes through the through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and exits the exhaust window 52A. Ejected.
As a result, the cooling airflows RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. As shown in FIG. Then, it is discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As described above, the group of parts such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 is a group of parts to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (the IH coil installation space CK). A space for cooling these component groups is positioned in front of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20, but there is no component group to be cooled as described above inside this gap GP1. It is not 100 cooling spaces.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of each part when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started without actually performing induction heating cooking in the upper unit 100 . However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, the main power switch 97 must first be turned on in order to start microwave cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset after a certain period of time (eg, 30 minutes) from the last time any of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating is finished. is released. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, the heating chamber 113, and the like all fall below a specified value. We have adopted these safety measures.

Next, after opening the door 114 and putting the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and occupying the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) is operated on the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 to When the start of microwave cooking is instructed, the integrated control device MC issues a drive instruction to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 .

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillation unit 122A. Note that the microwave here means a radio wave of 2450 MHz±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided into the antenna case 124 from the waveguide 123 . Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operating at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced into the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be propagated evenly inside the heating chamber 113 . The operation of this type of antenna and the rotating shaft 126A is described in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, outside air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121 and cools various electric components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through the communication openings B138B and A138A provided at two upper and lower portions of the case A150.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. A minute gap of several millimeters or less exists between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113 .

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided to the passage 172 from the communication port A138A. In other words, it is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171 . This passage has the effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 reaches a high temperature exceeding 300.degree.

When the position of the communication port 173 is viewed from the communication port A138A in plan view, the communication port 173 is located diagonally across the passage 172 rearward. That is, the communication port 173 is located at the furthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173 and introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward through the communication port 173 (see FIG. 15).

After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF5 merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is discharged from the air outlet 20 into the room.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, air is sucked into the case A 151 from the air intake B 152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 and becomes cooling air RF6. . The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the duct 153 through the heat radiating portion 122H.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and advances forward. Then, as shown in FIG. 17, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 through the introduction port 201 .

Since the inlet 201 is located near the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, part of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging of the sealing plate 196 on the heating chamber 113 side. .

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging water vapor, smoke, etc. generated from objects to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113 . Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the rear ceiling portion.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward. At the stage of exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 joins so as to be attracted by the ascending current of the cooling air RF5 and is discharged from the exhaust port 20 into the room.

Even if the cooling airflow RF5 and the cooling airflow RF6 have the same initial airflow volume, the cooling airflow RF5 has a faster air velocity when it is discharged from the duct 102 due to the difference in paths as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it has the effect of inducing the cooling air RF6 emitted from below.

An exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102 in order to forcibly discharge the cooling airflows RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102 . In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at a low cost and is advantageous in considering the arrangement of parts inside the upper unit 100. FIG.

Next, FIG. 44 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a list showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the heat cooker 1 and the types of heat cooking.
As is clear from FIG. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated during induction cooking. It is also operated for microwave cooking and oven cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated for both microwave cooking and oven cooking.
On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated only for oven cooking.

Next, FIG. 45 will be described.
This FIG. 45 shows a case where the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is used, and "hamburger" is selected as the cooking menu for cooking.

This is an example of cooking in three stages: a preheating step by the induction heating source 9, a cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9, and a cooking step 2 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189.
This FIG. 45 shows the case where at least one of the above-described anomalies 1 to 3 is detected among the main anomalies that can be detected by the anomaly detection section 1 (EM1). Abnormality 4 (when the rotational speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the content of the control instruction) is not shown in FIG.

Preheating step: When at least one of the above "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, And the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are controlled as shown in FIG.
That is, the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Also, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat radiation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

Since the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning in the preheating process, they are not affected.

Cooking step 1: When at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 in the heating operation is immediately stopped. Also, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat radiation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

Since the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning in the preheating process, they are not affected.

Cooking step 2: Cooking step 2 uses both microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 . At the same time when the oven heating source 188 is driven, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 is started.
Further, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is simultaneously started in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128 (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 in the heating operation is immediately stopped. Also, if the microwave heating source 189 is being driven, it is also stopped immediately.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are in operation, as will be described later, they are operated for heat radiation operation times "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2". .

As shown in FIG. 45, when at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected while the fourth cooling fan 129 is not in operation, The fourth cooling fan 129 is unaffected because it is not running.

As described above, in any stage of the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2, at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). In this case, the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (in FIG. 45, the cooking menu is "hamburger").

The effect of this "cancel" is the same as the effect of canceling the cooperative cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
This cancellation therefore eliminates the "hogging" of the heating source used. "Exclusive use" will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG.

Next, FIG. 46 will be described.
This FIG. 46 shows a case where the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is used, and "fried chicken" is selected as the cooking menu and cooking is performed.

The preheating process by the induction heating source 9 is started, and the cooking process 1 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is started while the preheating process is being energized. That is, the preheating process and the cooking process 1 overlap in terms of time.
The cooking process 2 is an example in which the object N heated to a high temperature in the preheating process is further heated by the induction heating source 9 above the top plate 15 to cook.

Similar to FIG. 45, FIG. 46 shows a case where at least one of the abnormalities 1 to 3 is detected. Abnormality 4 (when the rotational speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the content of the control instruction) is not shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 46 will be described.
This is an example in which three types of cooking are performed: a preheating process using an induction heating source 9, a cooking process 1 using an induction heating source 9, and a cooking process 2 using an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189. This differs from the cooking mode in FIG. 45 in that the preheating step and the cooking step 1 overlap in terms of time.

This FIG. 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-described anomalies 1 to 3 is detected among the major anomalies that can be detected by the anomaly detection section 1 (EM1). Abnormality 4 (when the rotational speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the content of the control instruction) is not shown in FIG.

Preheating step: The induction heating source 9 is first energized to start preheating the object N to be heated.
When at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Also, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat radiation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

Since the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning in the preheating process, they are not affected.
In this preheating process, if at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC operates the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (Fig. At 46, the cooking menu "Karaage") is canceled immediately.

Cooking step 1: When at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 in the heating operation is immediately stopped. Also, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat radiation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

The third cooling fan 128, which has started operating simultaneously with the driving of the oven heating source 188, is operated for the heat radiation operation time "To1" from the time when the driving of the oven heating source 189 is stopped, as will be described later.
Also, since the fourth cooling fan 129 has not been operated from the beginning, it is not affected.

On the other hand, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is simultaneously started in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128 (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the microwave heating source 189 in the heating operation is immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are in operation, as will be described later, they are operated for heat radiation operation times "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2". .

Cooking step 2: In the cooking step 2, an induction heating source 9 is used. Therefore, the operation of the first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 is started at the same time when the induction heating source 9 is driven.
When at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped.

As will be described later, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for heat radiation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the point at which the induction heating source 9 is stopped.
Even at the stage of this cooking process 2, if at least one of the above-described "abnormality 1" to "abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC switches to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The operation (in FIG. 46, the cooking menu is "fried chicken") is canceled immediately.

The effect of "cancellation" of the cooperative cooking mode in the preheating process, the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 as described above is the same as the effect of canceling the cooperative cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
This cancellation therefore eliminates the "hogging" of the heating source used.

Next, FIG. 47 will be described.
FIG. 47 explains the operation of the integrated control device MC during the cooking operation of the heating cooker 1, especially after an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit EM.

The abnormality detection unit EM is not intended for abnormality detection before the actual heating operation starts, as in step MS1 described with reference to FIG. Therefore, physical (electrical, mechanical, etc.) abnormalities in the cooking process are detected after the heating operation is actually started.

In FIG. 47, steps S20 to S33 indicate the operation of the integrated control device MC.
In order to simplify the explanation, the case where the abnormality detection unit EM detects abnormality 1 among the above-described abnormality 1 to abnormality 3 will be described.
Abnormality 1 is a case where the water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N boils over the top plate 15 and overflows, and the abnormality is detected.

When it is detected that the liquid has overflowed from the object N to be heated by induction heating on the top plate 15, the integrated controller MC receives an abnormality occurrence signal (“Yes” determination in step S20). In other words, if the liquid that blows over the upper surface of the top plate 15 flows and reaches the upper surface of the input operation unit 40 , there is a concern that the input operation unit 40 may malfunction.

In the next step S21, the drive of the inverter circuit 81L is stopped in order to stop the heating of the IH coil 17L corresponding to the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9 in operation. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the system has stopped due to the occurrence of an abnormality. In this case, it is preferable that the left side display section 31L also displays in the same manner.

In the next step S22, it is determined whether or not a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven. If "No", the process proceeds to step S23 to stop the operation of the two cooling fans 60 and 61. . It should be noted that this shutdown processing does not mean stopping the cooling fans 60 and 61 immediately after step S21. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG.

If it is determined in step S22 that a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, the process proceeds to step S24.
In step S24, it is determined whether the cooking process by the microwave heating source 129 is being performed.

In step S24, when it is determined that the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 is being performed, the process proceeds to step S25.
In step S25, whether or not the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 has ended is repeatedly determined at fixed short time intervals (less than several seconds).

When it is determined that the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 has ended, the drive of the magnetron 122 is stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S26.
In step S26, the presence or absence of the cooking process by the oven heating source 188 is determined.

In step S26, it is judged "No" that there is a cooking process of the oven heating source 188, and the process proceeds to step S30.
On the other hand, if the determination in step S26 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the integrated display section 30 displays that the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 has ended.
In the next step S28, operation stop processing of the fourth cooling fan 129 that cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the cooling air RF6 is performed. The cooling air RF6 was introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201, but the supply of this cooling air is stopped.

The "shutdown process" in step S28 does not mean stopping the cooling fan 129 immediately after the determination in step S27. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S24 is "No", the process proceeds to step S30.
Also, if the determination in step S26 is "No", the process proceeds to step S30.

In step S30, it is repeatedly determined at short (less than a few seconds) intervals whether the cooking process of the oven heat source 188 is finished.
When the power supply to the oven heating source 188 is stopped and the cooking process is completed, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the integrated display section 30 displays that the cooking process by the oven heating source 188 has ended.
In the next step S32, operation stop processing of the fourth cooling fan 129 that cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the cooling air RF6 is performed. Note that this operation stop processing does not mean stopping the cooling fan 129 immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG.

Also, the operation stop processing of the third cooling fan 128 that has supplied the cooling air RF5 to the vicinity of the temperature sensor 160 is performed. Note that this operation stop processing does not mean stopping the cooling fan 128 immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be described in detail in FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG.

When the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped by steps S23, S28, S32, and S33, the operation history information is recorded in step S29 when the cooling fans are stopped. That is, a series of operation contents after step S20 are stored in the driving history storage area provided inside the storage device MM, and are used for control thereafter. It is also used by users, maintenance and inspection specialists, etc. to confirm abnormalities.

Next, FIG. 48 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when cooperative cooking is performed in the heating cooker 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48, the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is basically started at the same timing as the start of cooking.
The solid line arrows shown in FIG. 48 indicate the period from the start to the end of the operation, and the broken line arrows following the solid lines indicate the additional operation time for heat dissipation, which will be described below. Note that the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 do not actually stop operating at the end of the solid line arrow, but continue to operate for the additional operating time.

In the first embodiment, the time from start to finish of operation of each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: Starts operating at the timing when the induction heating operation is started. Operation is also started at the timing of the start of microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking. In the single cooking mode KM1, the "heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the cooking mode ends. This is for cooling the high temperature parts such as the top plate 15 . Depending on the magnitude of the numerical value determined by the length of the induction heating time and the "product" of the maximum heating power (power consumption of the inverter circuit) used, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" can be changed from 3 minutes to 5 minutes. , 10 minutes. This is done by the IH control section 90 .

In the "linkage cooking mode" KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used, the first cooling fan 60 is operated when there is a heating source whose heating operation is finished most after the induction heating source 9 is stopped. "Heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes or until the temperature of the top plate 15 drops below the reference temperature. In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation is controlled by the integrated controller MC.
In FIG. 48, the "time of heat dissipation operation" of the first cooling fan 60 is indicated by symbol Th1.

Second cooling fan 61: The “time Th2 of heat dissipation operation” is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60 . This is done by an operation start command and an operation end command from the IH control unit 90 . The start of operation is the same timing as the first cooling fan 60 . In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation is controlled by the integrated controller MC.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "Heat dissipation operation" is performed for only 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation ends. That is, this "time Tm2 of heat dissipation operation" is fixed at 3 minutes. This is done by microwave heating control 130 .
(2) In the case of oven heating cooking: not operated.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: “Time Tm1 for heat radiation operation” is the same as “Time Tm2 for heat radiation operation” of the fourth cooling fan 129 . In addition, the control of the start and end of operation is performed by the microwave heating control section 130 in the same manner as the fourth cooling fan 129 .
(2) In the case of oven heating cooking: Immediately after the operation of either one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is below a certain temperature. Drive until it drops. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.
Temperature measurement is performed by a temperature sensor 160 that uses infrared rays to measure without contact and a contact-type temperature sensor TS10 (see FIGS. 15 and 30). The temperature measurement data is transmitted to the non-contact temperature measurement section 158 and the heating chamber control section 159, respectively. Ultimately, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the integrated control device MC, and the third cooling fan 128 continues to operate until an operation end command to the third cooling fan 128 is issued.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the case of oven heating cooking, the “heat radiation operation time To1” of the third cooling fan 128 is important.
In oven cooking, the heating chamber 113 as a whole reaches a high temperature (for example, 200° C.). Therefore, it takes time to cool such a heating chamber 113 .
If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not lowered, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is assumed to be high from the beginning when microwave heating cooking is performed immediately next time.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, the microwave heating source 189 cannot be used for "warm" cooking. This is because the "warm" control menu adopts a control that automatically stops microwave irradiation when the food is heated to, for example, 80° C. (default value). Therefore, in order not to confuse the user, for example, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is 80° C. or higher from the beginning, it is necessary to perform error processing and not to accept heat cooking.

In this Embodiment 1, the relationship between the control menu in Embodiment 1 and the operating times (periods) of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is set as follows. there is
That is, the control program of one control menu includes the above-described "time for heat dissipation Th1", "time for heat dissipation Th2", and "time for heat dissipation To1". . In other words, the operating times of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 are also controlled by the IH control section 90, the heating chamber control section 159, and the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when one control menu is set, a series of control operations from the end of the heating operation to the end of the heat dissipation operation are determined according to the control menu. Conversely, one control menu ends when the related first to fourth cooling fans 60 to 129 stop operating. Therefore, for the induction heating source 9, the arrow indicating the execution period of one control menu is shown in FIG. It's been a long time.

In the above description, it is assumed that the airflow rate (airflow capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is constant during cooking. In some cases, changes such as reducing the amount of air blown may be performed. Also, the capacity variable operation may be performed such that the air flow rate is reduced when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or the upper unit 100 is lower than when it is higher.

In FIG. 48, the induction heating source 9 is driven (energized) until a point later than when the microwave heating source 189 is driven. For example, a frying pan is heated to a preheating temperature (e.g., 180° C.) (preheating step), the object to be cooked is slightly heated in the high-temperature frying pan (cooking step 1), and then the object to be cooked is transferred to the heating chamber 113. This is because the induction heating source 9 does not always need to be stopped before starting the microwave heating.

Further, in FIG. 48, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated during the oven cooking, as indicated by the dashed line during which the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated.
In that case (for oven heating cooking), the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured immediately after the operation of either one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. Drive until it drops. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To2" may be changed from time to time. Alternatively, it may be adjusted to the “heat dissipation operation time To1” of the third cooling fan 128 .

Next, FIG. 49 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heat sources are simultaneously driven in the cooking device 1. FIG.

In FIG. 49, since the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are simultaneously driven, the integrated controller MC selects "abnormality processing mode A". It is a time chart when it is executed.

When the induction heating source 9 finishes the heating operation as shown in FIG. 49, the first cooling fan 60 is in the "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation is finished, as described with reference to FIG. do. Specifically, as described above, only one of 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes is selected as the “heat dissipation operation time Th1” (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60 .

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated for the “heat dissipation operation time Tm1” after the microwave heating source 189 has been driven.
Further, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated for the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" as described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes.

For example, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects "abnormality 1" (for example, blowing over from the object to be heated N) on the top plate 15, the upper space 300A immediately receives the abnormality detection signal from the integrated controller MC. The operation of the induction heating source 9 arranged inside is stopped. For example, when the left heating unit 17HL is performing induction heating, the drive of the inverter circuit 81L (see FIG. 30) dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL by the IH control unit 90 is stopped. The same applies to the "abnormality 2" and "abnormality 3".

In FIG. 49, ET1 indicates the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped.
On the other hand, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (blowing air volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality until timing ET2 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (blowing air volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality while the microwave heating source 189 is being driven.
Then, based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 has finished driving, the microwave heating source 189 is operated for “heat radiation operation time Th3” and “heat radiation operation time Th4”.

The "heat radiation operation time Th3" corresponds to the "heat radiation operation time Th1". Further, the "time Th4 of the heat radiation operation" corresponds to the "time Th2 of the heat radiation operation".

“Heat radiation operation time Th3” and “heat radiation operation time Th4” are defined to be a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 finishes the heating operation. This time is determined by the integrated control device MC grasping the operation information of the microwave heating control unit 130, and based on the operation information from the integrated control unit MC, the IH control unit 90 determines 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or Pick one out of 10 minutes.

As described above, at the stage when induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking are being performed at the same time, the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality, and the driving sources such as the inverter circuits 81L and 81R of the induction heating source 9 are urgently stopped. Even in this case, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cooling the inside of the upper space 300A are kept at least until the microwave heating source 189 is driven, as described with reference to FIG. , the operation is continued under the same conditions (blowing air volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality.

For this reason, not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1, the power supply circuit board 55 that is an important component related to each heating source, and the filter circuit board 54 The cooling effect such as is not affected at all. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as overheating and quality deterioration of these components.

Next, FIG. 50 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heat sources are driven simultaneously in the cooking device 1. FIG.

In FIG. 50, since the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven, the integrated controller MC executes "abnormality processing mode B". It is a time chart when

When the induction heating source 9 finishes the heating operation as shown in FIG. 50, the first cooling fan 60 is in the "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation is finished, as described with reference to FIG. do. Specifically, as described above, only one of 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes is selected as the “heat dissipation operation time Th1” (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60 .

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 measures the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and operates until the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.

For example, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects that the object to be heated N is blowing over the top plate 15, the induction heating source 9 disposed inside the upper space 300A is immediately turned off as described with reference to FIG. Driving is stopped.

In FIG. 50, ET1 indicates the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped.
On the other hand, if the cooking process of the oven heat source 188 has not yet finished when the heating operation of the induction heat source 9 is urgently stopped, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 Until the timing of ET3 shown in FIG. 48, the operation is continued under the same conditions (blowing air volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 50, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (blowing air volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality while the oven heating source 188 is being driven.
Then, based on the time when the drive of the oven heating source 188 is finished, the oven is operated for "heat radiation operation time Th5" and "heat radiation operation time Th6".

The "heat radiation operation time Th5" corresponds to the "heat radiation operation time Th1". Further, the "time Th6 of the heat radiation operation" corresponds to the "time Th2 of the heat radiation operation".

“Heat radiation operation time Th5” and “heat radiation operation time Th6” are defined to be a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the oven heat source 188 finishes the heating operation. This time is determined by the integrated control unit MC grasping the operation information of the heating chamber control unit 159, and based on the operation information from the integrated control unit MC, the IH control unit 90 determines 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes. Choose only one of the minutes.

In the case of cooking with the oven heat source 188 alone, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated, but may be operated as shown in FIG. In this case, the "heat dissipation operation time To2" is the time until the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. That is, it may be changed from time to time. Alternatively, it may be adjusted to the “heat dissipation operation time To1” of the third cooling fan 128 .

As described above, when the induction heating cooking and the oven heating cooking are being performed at the same time, even if the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and the power supply to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is suddenly stopped, the upper space 50, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 for cooling the inside of the 300A are at least as high as before the occurrence of the abnormality during the period until the drive of the oven heating source 188 is finished. Operation is continued under the same conditions (blowing air volume).

For this reason, not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1, the power supply circuit board 55 that is an important component related to each heating source, and the filter circuit board 54 The cooling effect such as is not affected at all. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as overheating and quality deterioration of these components.

The heat dissipation operation times (Th1, Tm1, To1, Th2, etc.) are guaranteed even if the user presses the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97 to turn off the main power. In other words, the integrated control device MC has a control program that cuts off its own power supply circuit after finishing the heat dissipation operation as described above.

(Basic operation during oven cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC presumes that some cooking will start and preliminarily starts. Therefore, even if induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking is not actually performed in the upper unit 100, oven heating cooking can be started as it is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, the main power switch 97 must first be turned on to start oven cooking.
If the main power switch 97 is pressed again, the switch will be turned off, so that all of the heating cooking that is being executed will be stopped at once (however, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129, which will be described later, are immediately turned off). The operation is not stopped, and heat dissipation operation is continued until certain conditions are met, as described later).

Next, the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked such as food is put into the heating chamber 113, and then the control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, in the case of grilling fish or meat, the heating time and heat power are set. However, when the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating power is automatically set by the heating chamber control section 159 . The selection of this control menu will be explained later.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated controller MC, and controls the presence or absence of energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the energization time period, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), thermal power, and the like.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature in the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmits detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measuring unit 158. FIG. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature and controls the energization of both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (feedback control). Note that the temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as a "second temperature sensor".

Also, when the control method for timer cooking is input from the central operation unit 40M, both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is energized for the set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the temperature data detected by the temperature sensor TS2.

After the door 114 is closed, when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start cooking by heating in the oven (heating chamber 113), the integrated controller MC controls the heating chamber control unit. 159 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 . Alternatively, the heating chamber controller 159 may directly output a drive command signal to the third cooling fan 128 .

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. However, unlike microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A without cooling the inverter circuit 121 substrate.

Then, the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown into the heating chamber 113 through the gap between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole through the detection window 161 .

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. As shown in FIG. Then, while cooling the upper case 169, it reaches the communication port 173 and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated from the beginning in the case of oven heating cooking (see FIG. 44). If it were to operate, the cooling air RF6 would pass through the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reach the inside of the duct 153 . However, since magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no temperature rise (see FIGS. 16 and 17).

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114 .

Cooking objects such as food placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, etc. due to radiant heat from the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such water vapor, soot, and the like are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG.

After that, the cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward. After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 passes through the air outlet 20 and is discharged into the room while being attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward (see FIG. 15).

In the first embodiment described above, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC controls the overall condition of the heating cooker 1 up to a certain stage. When the section 40R is operated, the subsequent induction heating control is entrusted to the IH control section 90. FIG. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed with the IH control unit 90 .

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated controller MC may be changed between the heating chamber controller 159 and the microwave heating controller 130 .

For example, after any control menu of induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating is selected, any one of the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 Fundamentally, a control operation related to heating may be performed.

In that case, when a new input is performed by the input operation unit 40 (including heating stop), control is performed by the integrated control device MC once, but when the input is not performed, IH control is performed as it is. Cooking may be performed by any one of the unit 90 , the heating chamber control unit 159 , or the microwave heating control unit 130 .

(Control during fried food cooking by IH control unit 90)
A specific control operation example of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the IH control unit 90 when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one of the single cooking modes using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the heating cooker 1.

When "fried food (automatic cooking)" is selected in the control menu for induction heating cooking by operating the left operating part 40L or the right operating part 40R, the edible food placed in the object to be heated (metal pot) N is selected. The oil temperature is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the heating power of the IH coils 17L, 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the fried food cooking (automatic) control menu, the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a fried food cooking process, and a heating power increasing process, as shown in FIG.
Further, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30, information showing necessary information and reference information (for example, estimated time required for preheating, etc.) appears in the form of characters, graphics, or the like. Also displayed is the fact that the priority cooking is for which the power is not restricted (suppressed) by the power control unit 72 .

Therefore, the user can recognize that electric power is preferentially secured during the cooking of the fried food even if microwave heating or oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts driving at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rises rapidly. The temperature rises from the room temperature (for example, 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

Since this temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93, when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180° C., the IH control unit 90 adjusts the amount of induction heating, that is, the inverter output, and tries to maintain the target temperature as it is (based on such temperature detection information, the control operation that automatically adjusts the high-frequency thermal power to approach the target temperature is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

After that, a display command is issued to the integrated control unit MC, and a voice guidance is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95, such as "The temperature of the oil has reached a suitable temperature. Please add ingredients."

When the user puts ingredients such as frozen croquettes into the cooking oil, the cooking process 1 starts from this point.
Since the edible oil is rapidly cooled by the cold ingredient (croquette) from the time of its introduction, the temperature drops sharply as shown in FIG. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the movement of such a temperature drop, the heating power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) is immediately raised to the predetermined heating power of 1500 W or 1800 W, and the oil temperature rises again. (temperature feedback control). In this way, when the target temperature T1 is reached again (or after a predetermined time has elapsed), the frying process is immediately shifted to the heating power increasing process.

In the thermal power-up process, control is performed so that the oil temperature is maintained between a second temperature T2 higher than the target temperature T1, which is 225°C, and an even higher upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3, which is 230°C. Device 90 controls inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 51, the thermal power value is intermittently driven at about 900W.
The process after reaching the first temperature T1 is called a "fried food finishing process", and is an important process for finishing the fried food crispy. If a sufficient amount of heat is not applied in the heat-increasing process, the fried food cannot be fried well. Note that the frying process is not limited to a predetermined time, so if the user presses the input key 43R1 (or the input key 43L1), the frying process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the (automatic) fried food cooking control menu, the period from the fried food cooking process to the heating power up process is defined as the "execution time period of the priority control menu". Power reduction is prevented by starting the heating source or changing operating conditions. That is, the induction heating IH control unit 90 always grasps whether or not the control menu being executed is in the "execution time period of the priority control menu", and if it is in the execution time period, It has a function to notify the effect to the outside.

As is clear from the above description, when a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is completely monitored by that IH control unit. It is entrusted to the control of the control unit 90 .

In the "linked cooking mode KM3", which will be described in detail later, when the control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "cooking process" starts from the "fried food cooking process" for actually heating the food to be cooked. become. That is, the preheating process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display of Integrated Display Unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display section 30 and various input keys of the central operating section 40M, right operating section 40R and left operating section 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 59. FIG.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section immediately after the heating cooker 1 is started. FIG. 53 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the left operation section of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 54 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the left operation unit and integrated display unit of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section during compound cooking of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display section during compound cooking of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display section during compound cooking of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display section during compound cooking of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 59 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display section and the central operation section during compound cooking of the heating cooker 1. FIG.

FIG. 52 will be described. When the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display section 30 is not activated, so no information is displayed.
With the main power switch 97 turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 52, 30A is a display text notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.

When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 having information on various cooking recipes. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After the display screen 1 of FIG. 52 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. In the display screen 2A, the character display "caution for bumping" is one of the caution displays 30E.

Here, "bumping" means, for example, when heating a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew, the inside of the food is overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden boiling. A phenomenon that causes violent boiling in water. Hot liquid droplets can be hazardous as they erupt from the hot liquid. It is said that the timing and cause of the occurrence of bumping are contamination or impact from outside. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 and induction-heated, attention is drawn to stirring the food to be cooked. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 30N.

The three display screens of display screen 1, display screen 2A, and display screen 2B shown in FIG. 52 may be called a common screen 30Z. Forms other than these three may be included in the common screen 30Z.

In the display screen 2B, 30E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and that the inside of the heating chamber 113 should not be touched carelessly. When the integrated controller MC detects that the heating chamber 113 is not sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the state is automatically switched to the display screen 2.例文帳に追加Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Also, the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to concurrently provide the contents of the alerts on the display screens 2A and 2B by voice.

As is clear from display screens 1 to 2A and 2B in FIG. 52, these displays are performed using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, instead of partially displaying in any one of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above, the three areas 30L to 30R cannot be identified in order to secure as wide a display area as possible. , so that it appears to the user that the entirety of the integrated display section 30 is being displayed.

The display screen 1 to the display screens 2A and 2B correspond to ST3 in the operation steps of FIG.
After a certain period of time, for example 10 seconds, has passed since the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B were displayed, the display content changes to prompt the user to select a heating source (heating means) (corresponding to operation step ST4 in FIG. 38). .

Therefore, next, the case of induction heating cooking will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 53 describes the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the combined cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 53 is a plan view of the left display section 31L and the left operation section 40L for the left heating source 17HL. The state shown in FIG. 53(A) is before the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL is pressed.

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated controller MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL. Then, as shown in FIG. 53B, the integrated control device MC causes the individual light emitting section 27L3 to emit light to indicate that the operation input has been received.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for an input, the individual light emitting section 27L1 is flashed. In addition, since the selection of the control menu is also waiting for input, the individual light emitting section 27L2 immediately behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 53B, the asterisk figure indicates that the light-emitting display section 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heating power of the heating power display section 67L, which indicates the heating power stage during induction heating cooking, is set to "3", the light emitting section of the heating power display section 67L is continuously illuminated from the left side until the heating power of 3 is displayed (or change blue to red) and show the user the magnitude of the firepower.

When the user wants to change to a thermal power that is not the default setting thermal power, if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed, the thermal power decreases or increases by one step each time the key is pressed. or red light emitting part) expands from the left to the right or shrinks from the left to display the thermal power adjustment status to the user.

Next, FIG. 54 will be described.
54A and 54B are diagrams for explaining the operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
In FIG. 54, the diagrams of states A to C drawn on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L. The state before the operation is started is state A in FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 53, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display section 27L3 emits light as shown in state B of FIG.
In state B, the light-emitting display section 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, when the left input key 43L2 is pressed, the heating power is lowered. It should be noted that the increase or decrease in thermal power can be seen from the luminous state of the thermal power display section 67L immediately behind.

Next, the case where the "single (heating) cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9 is performed will be described.
In order to simplify the explanation, the case where the left heating unit 17HL is used will be explained.

When the input key 43L2 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, the heating power level below 1 is specified. A "third specific screen" 30ST for keeping warm is displayed on the display screen 30D.

Further, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific screen" corresponding to fried food is selected. screen" 30ST is displayed.
Since the default temperature is set to 180° C. in the “third specific screen 30ST” for fried food, the characters “fried food 180° C.” may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once again, the "third specific screen 30ST" for preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for fried eggs may be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A of FIG. 54, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 displays a "container schematic diagram" 280 such as a pot, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. , has a wide horizontal display area.

In the space where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, the characters "Heat retention (left IH)" are displayed, indicating that the temperature of the heat retention is approximately 80°C. An explanation 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soup or the like. At the stage of this display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left side display portion 31L. However, as shown in FIG. 54, the heat retention temperature may be displayed as "80° C.".

Next, in state B of FIG. 54, when the input key 44L is pressed, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time it is pressed, and is displayed as in the display screen 3B. The example of the display screen 3B indicates that "fried food" has been selected. After a certain period of time has passed in this state B, the control menu for the left heating unit 17HL is determined to be "fried food", and the IH coil 17L is started to drive. As described with reference to FIG. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiling" and "boiling" in addition to "fried food".

In the case of the display screen 3B, since the default temperature is set to 180° C., the characters “fried food 180° C.” are displayed on the left side display portion 31L as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180°C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180°C. In addition to this, the integrated display unit 30 displays "that the preheating temperature has been reached", and is expected to have the effect of prompting the user to insert ingredients.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature in this fried food (automatic) control menu, the input key 43L2 can be used to lower the temperature, and the input key 43L3 can be used to raise the temperature.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the display screen 30D are combined to form a horizontally long wide display area. A warning 30G indicating the start of preheating and not leaving the cooker 1 during the preheating operation is displayed in the space provided.

Next, in the state B of FIG. 54, when the input key 44L is pressed to select "appropriate temperature" as another control menu, a display screen 3C is displayed. As shown in this display screen 3C, the control menu "appropriate temperature" is a control mode recommended for warming the pan or the like to the set temperature (default temperature is 180° C.) and for cooking eggs. The recommendation sentence 30H is displayed so that such a meaning can be understood. At the stage of this display screen 3C, text information "preheating 180° C." is displayed on the left side display portion 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST is displayed in the individual display sections (left display section 31L, right display section 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation sections (right operation section 40R, left operation section 40L). Also good.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the heating cooker 1 is operated. A scene in which the combined cooking mode KM2 is executed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC, "warm up" is displayed in the front-rear center of the first area 30L.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menu), "warm", is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

In the rear BK of the specific sentence 30J of "heat up" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, the characters "oven" are displayed in a slightly smaller size, and on the front FR side, the characters "manual range" are displayed in slightly smaller sizes. be.

Then, when the user selects the control menu, the next candidates are found to be "Oven" and "Manual Range". If, at this stage, the (left) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the character "warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "manual range".
Further, when the (right) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the characters "warm" are changed to "oven".

In FIG. 55, the target temperature information 30T of "80° C." is displayed in the second area 30M on the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, if the temperature of the food is 80°C, the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80°C.

In order to increase the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M to 85° C., the right input key 43M2 located just before the second area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if it is desired to lower the temperature to 75° C., the left input key 43M2 should be operated once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the number of the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number of 80° C., a downward pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

Since the shape of the symbol 30UP and the (right) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user is instructed to operate the right input key 43M2 in order to increase the temperature, heating power, etc. is easy to understand.

Conversely, since the shape of the symbol 30DN and the (left) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user can operate the left input key 43M2 to lower the temperature, heating power, or the like. easy to understand. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display of the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, it is devised to avoid operation errors (wrong input keys) during the user's input operation.

In FIG. 55, 30K is a heating source display section that displays in characters that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189 . As described above, 30P is reference information automatically displaying that the control menu is recommended for warming side dishes. The contents of this reference information may be separate additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 37, information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time according to the operation of the input key 43M3.
That is, in the first embodiment, the above-mentioned reference menu corresponding to each control menu (for example, "warm up") is one-to-one so that the user does not hesitate whether to select each control menu (for example, "warm up"). Information 30P is displayed.
Further, when the reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 55, when the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touch-operated, the reference information 30P1 is changed to the reference information 30P. can be displayed in the third area 30R instead.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 is another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the heating cooker 1 is operated to implement the combined cooking mode KM2.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1, etc. shown in FIG. 56 are all one type of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "manual range", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC of the linked cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "range manual" and the default value of the control conditions (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are set. displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 55, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 55 is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as one of the second specific screens 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual" and the display screen 5ST of FIG. .

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, a control menu specific sentence 30J of "manual range" is displayed in a large size in the front-rear center of the first area 30L.

In the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Also, in the adjacent third area 30R, microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is included in the composite cooking mode, but since it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 is used in this "range manual", it is shown in FIG. Such a heating source display section 30K (indicating that it is the microwave heating source 189 by characters) may not be displayed.

If the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST is to be lowered by one step to 200 W, the left input key 43M2 is operated once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the right input key 43M3 located just before the third area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if it is desired to shorten the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, the left input key 43M3 is operated once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 56, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number of the output (500W) in the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number of 500W, a downward pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 56 indicates the minimum heating power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum firepower (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only firepower greater than this firepower can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. That is, here again, the symbol 30UP indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 5 is still another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed. In other words, the display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which it changes at any time according to the user's input operation.

When the left input key 43M1 corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once in the state of the display screen shown in FIG. 56, as shown in FIG. can.

The display screen 6ST in FIG. 57 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, the specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "boiled under leafy vegetables", is displayed in a large size.
Information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard" in the second area 30M, and if the cooking is started as it is, the food will be heated at 500W. The microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. In other words, the "standard" heating power level when using the microwave heating source 9 differs depending on the individual compound cooking menu, and is not always the same output (eg, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 57, as described in FIG. 55, a heating source display section 30K displaying characters indicating that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189 is displayed. As described above, 30P is a recommendation (reference information) indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes. The contents of this recommendation sentence may be other additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds.

Instead of the recommendation sentence 30P in FIG. 57, as described in FIG. 55, the reference information 30P1 indicating the main point of each control menu shown in the classification 2 in FIG. Also good.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 is still another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed. The display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which it changes at any time according to the user's input operation.
FIG. 58 shows a scene in which a range grill (RG) control menu called "RG cooking" is selected.

As described above, the “RG cooking” is a control menu that allows cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113 .
A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to a certain extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are 3 types. The term "simultaneously" as used herein does not mean that the timings for both the start and end of heating are exactly the same, and it is sufficient that the time zones of the heating operations overlap even partially.

On the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 58, first, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat for 1 minute, and then the microwave heating is stopped and only the oven heating source 188 is used for 5 minutes. It turns out that it is a heating control (time control) pattern of heating.

The use of the abbreviation "RG" rather than the term "range grill" is intended to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if more characters are to be displayed, the exclusive area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, the heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes (however, it is shorter). When the time is up, it is displayed in units of 10 seconds).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be appropriately changed by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 58, the display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which first the microwave heating source 189 alone heats for 1 minute (microwave output 500 W), and then the oven heating source 188 alone heats for 5 minutes. is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen. It should be noted that display screen 7ST1, in which both microwave heating source 189 and oven heating edge 188 are driven for the first minute, is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance ("function setting" by the input key 43KP described above).

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59 shows the state of the display screen 6ST displaying the control menu "boil under leafy vegetables" shown in FIG. It is a schematic plan view for explaining the operation of.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display section drive circuit 63 causes the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M4 to emit light in a uniform color.

After that, when the input key 43M1 for selection of the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 57 is displayed in the first area 30L by default.
At this display stage, all four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can accept input. Therefore, the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to those four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS for start starts emitting light continuously, and is indicated by the dotted line circle in FIG. , it changes to flashing. Then, the presence of the input key 43MS is emphasized with light.

When the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 59, the mode shifts to the composite cooking mode KM2. In the case of heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation is started immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43R1 or 43L1 once after shifting to the composite cooking mode KM2. In the linked cooking mode KM3 as well, after giving a command to shift to the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 (input key 43MS), the same is true.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the respective input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are valid, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are caused to emit light in the first light emission form (continuous light emission). A light-emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63) is provided.
When the reference information 30P and 30P1 are displayed, the integrated control device MC causes only the light-emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the start selection section (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light-emitting mode (flashing). Configuration.

With the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for a command to start the heating operation (in the combined cooking mode KM2) by blinking the light emitting part 27M6. In addition, since the light emitting part 27M6 is also compatible with the touch input key 43MT capable of stopping the microwave heating and oven heating operations, the light emitting part 27M6 emits light even after the heating operation has started. In this case, the input function of the input key 43MT is valid, and a command to stop heating can be issued by touch operation.

At the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display section driving circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS serving as the start selection section to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 may continuously emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection unit.

(Basic operation during heat cooking in linked cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 68. FIG.
FIG. 60 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display section 30 and the central operation section 40M during cooperative cooking. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing respective input operations and processes when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is implemented and when the independent cooking mode KM1 is implemented. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the independent cooking mode. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 60 is displayed.
Even if the input key 43M1 has been pressed first and the operation for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in FIGS. When the key 43MC is pressed, the process changes to the input process for the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43M1 is touched after the input key 43MC, a plurality of targets of the linked cooking mode KM3 are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) (linked cooking mode KM3). Further identification information (including graphic marks, name of the cooking item) 330 is displayed to identify the cooking item (which is the menu).

In FIG. 60, the number of “cooking items” that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the integrated display section 30 is three. That is, there are three items, ie, "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef", and the number of items to be cooked is called "the number of cooperative cooking menus".

In this Embodiment 1, there are eight cooperative cooking menus in total. Details will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

In FIG. 60, 330 is identification information, which in the first embodiment is information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger).
There are eight pieces of identification information 330 . In other words, there are also eight linked cooking menus. 331 is additional information presented to the user regarding cooking the food (for example, hamburger).

In FIG. 60, the additional information 331 is displayed as "When the start button is pressed, heating of the left IH starts". This means that the induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation section 40M. However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L after pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 60, identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, gratin) is displayed above the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
Under the identification information 330, identification information 330B indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In the following description, reference numeral 330 is used when identification information is collectively referred to.

Similar to switching the display of the "compound cooking mode KM2" described in FIGS. 55 to 59, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, the food (eg, hamburger) that can be cooked in the linked cooking mode KM3. The display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of is changed by moving upward or downward sequentially. That is, the identification information 330 can be sequentially displayed at a predetermined position (front-rear central position) of the first area 30L by forward feeding and reverse feeding.

In this Embodiment 1, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described above. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the cooking items is cycled. Conversely, if the right input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the cooking items is cycled. This will be described in detail in FIGS. 82-84.

The default display for the linked cooking menu is "Hamburger" as shown in FIG.
Identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (hamburger) is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). By operating the input key 43M1 in this state, the identification information of another cooking object can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 74).

The "first specific screen" 30SP referred to in Embodiment 1 refers to the display screen of the integrated display section 30 shown in FIG. The display contents of the first specific screen SP are not always the same because they change from time to time depending on the user's input to the central operation unit 40M and the operating state of the heating cooker 1 .

Main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG.
(1) Identification information 330 is displayed in the first area 30L. In principle, this identification information 330 is always displayed even if the heating process in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG. 93(B), there are some exceptions.
(2) A pair of heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L corresponding to the heating sections of the induction heating source 9 used are displayed in the first half of the oblong area obtained by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R. be. Either one of the heating portion specifying portions 333R and 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating portion identifying portions 333R and 333L change in color and brightness, for example, as shown in FIG. or one).
(3) In the rear half of the horizontally long area obtained by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a horizontally long strip-shaped process display section 332 is displayed. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed during the period from before the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 to the completion of all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode. In addition, according to the progress of the cooking process, the contents are updated as needed by a method such as reversing black and white or changing the color so that the current cooking process can be understood. More on this later.
(4) Additional information 331 that serves as a reference for cooking is displayed on the right side of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L, but is exceptionally displayed in a wide range covering the entire integrated display section 30. (see display screen 10C in FIG. 93).

When the input key 43MS is pressed in a state where the identification information 330 of the target cooking item (for example, hamburger) is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, the cooperative cooking mode for heating and cooking the cooking item is activated. The command to execute KM3 is issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 73).

In cooking (for example, hamburger) using the induction heating source 9 in the cooking process 1, either one of the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended according to the cooperative cooking mode. For example, in order to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP for hamburger is as shown in FIG. 60, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes according to the progress of the cooking process and also changes depending on the food to be cooked. The example shown in FIG. 60 explains that it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS in order to start induction heating cooking.

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61 shows the operation after step ST4 in the flow chart 6 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG.

After the step (ST4) of displaying/informing to prompt the selection of the heating means, the right heating unit 17HR can be used to select cooking by heating with the right operation unit 40R (SP1). Also, the left heating unit 17HL can be used to select cooking by heating with the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Further, after step (ST4), the central operation unit 40M can select cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (SS1). In addition, the central operation unit 40M allows selection of heat cooking using the heating chamber 113 with the oven heating source 188 (SS2).

Furthermore, the combined cooking mode KM2 can also be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). The single cooking mode KM1 can also be selected (SS3B).

After the step (ST4), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be selected by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In FIG. 61, CH1 is the first layer selection means for selecting three types of heat sources. That is, as the selection means of the first layer, the input key 43MC and the input key 43M1 of the central operation section 40M, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L as an individual operation section, and the input key of the right operation section 40R There are a total of four of 43R1.

As described above, "coordinated cooking" means that a single cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; hereinafter the same) is heated in different places and independently under heating operation conditions (hereinafter, "control conditions"). ) refers to cooking using two or more heat sources that can be set.

More specifically, in the “coordinated cooking” in Embodiment 1, the heating locations for one food to be cooked are above the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113 .
The two types of heating sources whose heating operation conditions can be set independently are the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 . Note that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 perform heating operations in the same time zone or with a time difference.

"Cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment is composed of "first cooperative cooking" and "second cooperative cooking".
The “first cooperative cooking” means first cooking in the left heating section 17HL by the induction heating source 9 and then cooking in the heating chamber 113 using microwaves. The "first cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A) defines the cooking process of this "first cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence.

On the other hand, the “second cooperative cooking” means first (collaborative) cooking by microwave heating or the oven heating source 188 inside the heating chamber 113, or by these two heating sources, and then induction cooking. Heat cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL by the heating source 9. FIG.

The "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2B) defines the cooking process of this "second cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence.
In the case of the second coordinated cooking mode, normally (default setting conditions), for either or both of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, which are the heating sources used first, the coordinated The integrated control unit MC performs processing for restricting operations corresponding to menus other than the cooking mode KM3.

The selection of "first cooperative cooking mode" and "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A, SR2B) is not something that the user judges each time and performs selection operation, but the cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode. When the corresponding identification information 330 (for example, the name of cooking "hamburger") is selected, the integrated control device MC automatically selects (determines).

In this Embodiment 1, the heating units of the induction heating source 9 that are used when executing the "cooking" menu are both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the course of implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, when only the left heating unit 17HL is used, the right heating unit 17HR can be freely used irrespective of the cooperative cooking during execution of the cooperative cooking mode. can. However, if the power control unit 72 finds that the total value of the power consumption during cooperative cooking and the power consumption of the right heating unit 17HR used individually exceeds the limit value, the right heating unit 17HR is used. or forcibly lowering the thermal power is issued by the integrated controller MC.

In FIG. 61, CH2 is the second layer selection means for selecting the control menu. That is, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the selection means of the second layer is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.

On the other hand, in the composite cooking mode KM2, the selection means of the second layer is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.
Furthermore, in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, the selection means of the second layer are the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation section 40L. Similarly, the right operation unit 40R has two input keys 43R2 and 43R3.

That is, in the first embodiment, the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 are forwarded and reversed to display them at predetermined display positions of the integrated display section 30. All keys are the input key 43M1. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu or a control menu, the same input key 43M1 can be used to display the desired cooking menu or the like, resulting in good operability.

As shown in FIG. 61, at the stage (SR5) when the induction heating cooking is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L to specify the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. (SR6). Also, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

Note that, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is basically not set in advance, so the user can cook for any desired time.

In addition, at the stage (SR5) when induction heating cooking is started using the right heating unit 17HR, the user operates the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R to increase the thermal power (power consumption) in the right heating unit 17HR. can be specified (SR6).

Furthermore, when the right heating section 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Furthermore, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the cooking process 1 by the left heating unit 17HL is ended by the input key 43L1, the cooking process in the linked cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next cooking process 2 (described in detail in FIG. 64).

When the induction heating process is finished in the cooking process of the first cooperative cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When this cooperative cooking restart command is issued (SR9), the microwave output value during microwave heating may be increased or decreased by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, in some cases, the microwave power is fixed at, for example, 500 W and the cooking process proceeds.

When the microwave heating cooking (cooking process 2) is terminated by the input key 43MT, the operation of all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is terminated at this termination point (SR11). That is, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is the same as the canceled state. However, if there is a cooking process 3 after the cooking process 2, the setting state of the linked cooking mode KM3 is maintained.

Although it is not the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, after this, the user may operate the central operation unit 40M (by the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1) to further perform microwave heating cooking.

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 61 show operation steps when microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays control menus (11 types) of the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 for microwave heating and oven heating. (See FIG. 34).

Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, one control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the control menu of the single control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3). However, as described above, only the combined cooking mode KM2 can be selected on the central operating unit (common operating unit) 40, so the third specific screen 30ST is not displayed on the integrated display unit 30. FIG.

Next, by pressing the input key 43MS, execution of one combined cooking mode KM2 or single control mode KM1 is commanded (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). In the description of FIG. 34, the entire cooking mode is described as a combined cooking mode, but strictly speaking, the menus such as "manual range" are control patterns for the single cooking mode KM1, but the combined cooking mode KM2 should be selected. and cannot be selected. In other words, the actual situation includes the control menu for the single heating mode KM1. This was explained in FIG.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the control menu of "range grill (RG) cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit. 1 control menu for combined cooking mode KM2).

On the other hand, if the same input key 43M1 is operated, "warm" can be selected, which is cooking with the microwave heating source 189 alone and is one control menu of the single cooking mode KM1. Due to the restriction of the central operation unit (common operation unit) 40M, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the corresponding third specific screen 30ST is displayed. cannot be displayed.

After starting microwave heating or oven heating, the heating conditions (for example, heating time) may be changed (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, the execution of one control menu is commanded to stop (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 61 show operation steps when performing induction heating cooking with the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to select cooking by the right heating unit 17HL (SP2). Then, even if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is not operated, the induction heating control menu is automatically determined after a certain period of time (SP3). The "induction heating control menu" referred to here is the IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the cooking menu of the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" displayed on the integrated display section 30 by operating the input key 43MC by the first specific screen 30SP. .

Execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
"Single cooking" in step SP5 means that the induction heating source 9 alone is used as the heating source.
If the user operates the input key 43R2 or 43R3 to issue a command to change the thermal power of the induction heating after induction heating has started, the integrated controller MC changes the thermal power, which is one of the control conditions. (SP6).

In both the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the start command for the cooking process in which microwave heating is performed is the input key 43MS. The input key 43MS is also used to start the cooking process of the single cooking mode KM1 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are independently driven.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the induction heating source 9 does not have a dedicated switch (button or input key) for instructing the start of cooking, but a dedicated switch or input key (input (In addition to the key 43MS) may be provided.

When the input key 43R1 is pressed, a command to stop the right heating unit 17HR is issued (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43L1 should be pressed. In this way, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are used both for selecting a heating unit to start operation and for ending cooking.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9. As shown in FIG. Moreover, it is a schematic diagram which shows that the heat source used receives the restriction|limiting of operation|movement in the case of cooperative cooking.
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 62 is the "first cooperative cooking mode" described in FIG.

The "first cooperative cooking mode" of this example uses the induction heating source 9 in the cooking process 1, and operates the microwave heating source 189 in the cooking process 2 after the heating operation is finished. Also, in the cooking step 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 62, one cooperative cooking mode KM3 consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the cooperative cooking mode to when the input key 43MS is pressed.

P2 is the heat cooking period (cooking step 1). Note that this cooking process 1 does not include a "preheating process" in which the food to be cooked is not actually heated.
In P3, since the cooking by the heating means used in the cooking process 1 is switched to the cooking in the cooking process 2 in which another heating means is used, the operation of the heating means used in the cooking process 1 is temporarily stopped and another This is a rest period (also referred to as “transition period TR”) until heating by the heating means is started. The length of this pause period depends on the user's operation timing. In other words, if the user issues an instruction to start the cooking process 2 earlier, this pause time will be shorter.
P4 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 2) by the heating means used in the cooking step 2 (a single heating source or a plurality of heating sources may be used).

In this Embodiment 1, as one of the linked cooking modes KM3, a "linked preheating cooking mode KM4" is provided.
The associated preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail later, but an example of a cooking menu using the associated preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger". In the case of this "hamburger", the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, but at the start of the cooking process 1, the heating operation of the preheating process does not stop (that is, the power supply for the induction heating of the preheating process is not stopped). , the energization of the heating source in the cooking process 2 becomes concurrent in a certain period of time).

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (the induction heating source 9 in the above description) that has started operating before the cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking process 1, and the cooking process During period 1, the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or microwave heating source 189 may be driven simultaneously.

Unless otherwise contradicted, the following description is based on the premise that the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is included in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

As is clear from FIG. 62, at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (on the first specific screen 30SP), , the left operation part 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable.

Specifically, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This "invalidation" means that the input key 43L1 does not transmit a valid command signal to the integrated control device MC, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the integrated control device MC does not accept the command signal. It has both the meaning of not treating it as a valid command signal. In any case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

On the other hand, even when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR can be used. This is because the integrated controller MC first determines (in the control program) that the right heating unit 17HR is not used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, the right operation unit 40R is not subjected to the "prohibition of use" processing as described above. Even when other cooking is being carried out, it is not limited at all.

Therefore, in the induction heating source 9, only the left heating section 17HL is "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Also, from the perspective of the entire induction heating source 9, the use of only a portion (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted". When the right heating unit 17HL is not being used for other cooking, the right heating unit 17HR may also be occupied. The control program may be changed so that the "exclusive" state is set when the input key 43MS is pressed after finishing the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

Here, the exclusive use of the induction heating source 9 will be described with a focus on the function of the input operation unit 40 .
As described above, the input operation section has an input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating section 17HL.
This input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started. That is, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the function of selecting the left heating portion 17HL is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after induction heating is started, the heating operation can be instantaneously stopped.

On the other hand, the input operation section has an input key 44L. This input key 44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
The "control menu" in this case includes "boiling", "boiling", "cooking", "frying (automatic)", etc., and only one of them can be selected.

To select cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. When this input key 43MC is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed if the above-described "permission conditions" are satisfied.
At the stage when this first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 62), or when the "input command for start" for shifting to the linked cooking mode is performed by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 63), the linked The cooking mode KM3 is entered and, at the same time, the heat source to be used is "occupied".

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the "occupied state" will be described.
There are two methods by which the integrated control device MC makes the left heating unit 17HL in an exclusive state.
(1) First method:
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled. Other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, 44L all disable input functions.
In this case, high-frequency power starts to be supplied to the left IH coil 17L after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the input key 43MS is pressed.
Therefore, in order to stop the induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) that has been started, the input key 43L1 should be pressed once. At the same time when the supply of high-frequency power is started, the input functions of the input keys 43L2, 43L3, etc. whose input functions have been invalidated are restored.
To start heating again in this state for additional heating, the input key 43L1 is similarly pressed once (the linked cooking mode is not canceled even at this stage).

(2) Second method:
The input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 and 43L4 in the left heating section 17HL are disabled. However, only the input key 44L remains valid even after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is determined for the first time only when the input key 44L is pressed once after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Thereafter, when high-frequency power is supplied to the left IH coil 17L and induction heating is started, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, etc. are immediately restored. Therefore, the induction heating operation can be immediately stopped by pressing the input key 43L1 once. Further, by pressing the input key 43L1 again, the induction heating operation can be restarted (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not canceled even at this stage).
These are described later in FIG.

In both the first method and the second method, the input function of the input key 43L1 is invalidated until a certain point in order not to select the left heating section 17HL.
In the following description, the first method will be selected, but the adoption of the second method does not affect the basic effects obtained by the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the cooking step 1 (P2), after the induction heating is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to increase or decrease the heating power. can do.

In the cooking process 1, it is first necessary to press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L only once, and at this time, the left operation unit 40L sends an induction heating start command to the integrated controller MC. .

The operation of the heating start command by the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is omitted, and the induction heating cooking is performed at a certain thermal power (weak or standard thermal power) after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time of input by the input key 43MS. A method of starting with .

Further, in the cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.
When this operation for stopping the heating operation is performed, the cooking process 1 ends immediately. However, the cooperative cooking mode itself is not canceled.

Therefore, the heating operation (linked cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation for restarting the heating operation is the same as in the single heating mode KM1 as described with reference to FIGS. 53A and 53B. You only have to press it once again. Further, when the user designates (changes) the heating power after the induction heating operation is started, pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3 decreases or increases the heating power by one step each time the input key is pressed. You can set the firepower you want.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated food is moved to the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the metal dish used for induction heating can be housed in the heating chamber 113 as it is and subjected to microwave heating. Since the food inside cannot be heated by microwaves, it is necessary to transfer it to a lidless metal container, heat-resistant glass, or porcelain container.

During the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwave generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is guided into the heating chamber 113, and the heating and cooking period (P3) begins. Cooking step 2) (P4) begins.

After starting with the input key 43MS, the control conditions for microwave heating can be arbitrarily set by the user by operating various input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). ). However, depending on the individual cooking items targeted by the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the change of the control conditions may be partially restricted. For example, since the output of microwave heating is basically 500 W, the control program is designed so that the user cannot arbitrarily increase or decrease the output during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the cooking step 2 (P4), even if the microwave heating control conditions (for example, heating time) are not set, a predetermined time (default time) specified in the control program is set. There are two types: one is to automatically end the cooking process when the process has passed, and the other is to end the cooking process at an arbitrary stage by the user operating the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M.

Also, once the cooking process 2 is stopped, it is treated as having finished all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, the input key 43M1 is operated again to set the control menu such as "manual range", and additional heat cooking is performed, as in the case of implementing the combined cooking mode KM2. You can also If the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 prescribes that the cooking process 3 is followed by the cooking process 2, the cooking process 3 is started after the cooking process 2 through the transition period TR.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this cooperative cooking mode KM3, only the left heating section 17HL of the first heat source 9 is used, so during the preparation period (P1) to the cooking process 2 (P4), the right heating section The use of 17HR is not subject to any restrictions. Therefore, during the period of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, another heat cooking can be performed simultaneously in the right heating section 17HR. For example, the right heating unit 17HR may be used to start, for example, "water boiling" in the IH control menu using the right operation unit (first operation unit on the right) 40R.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source, and is an example of slightly changing the configuration of FIG.
FIG. 63 is a slightly modified version of FIG. 62 regarding the start timing of the operation of the heating source used (the induction heating source 9 in this case) being restricted in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The example shown in FIG. 63 is the step of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, that is, the time point when the identification information 330 indicating the cooking name of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP). In this case, the left heating source 17HL is not yet fully occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL can be operated for input, and can select cooking from the IH control menu (for example, "water boiler") in the single cooking mode KM1.

That is, during this preparation period P1, a new input operation (single cooking mode KM1) can be performed by the left operation unit 40L.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated controller MC. This point is different from that of FIG. All the input keys of the left operation unit 40L may be invalidated. The meaning of "invalidate" in FIG. 63 is the same as that explained in FIG.

Next, basic operations of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in Embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. FIG.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit 40 and the cooking process, etc. from selection to transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input operations and displays up to transition to the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 69 is a flow chart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 70 is a flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker.

FIG. 64 will be described.
FIG. 64 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) in which the cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL and the cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113. FIG.
In FIG. 64, when the input function of the main input key is active and related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is indicated by a blank rectangular frame. Note that not all input keys are drawn.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the heat cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating section 17HL, the cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating section 17HL.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, it is necessary to press the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 of the left operation section 40L. In addition, since control conditions such as heating power and heating time are automatically displayed by default setting, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when entering the cooking period P2, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (actually, even if the input operation signal reaches the integrated controller MC, the integrated control ignored by the device MC).

In FIG. 64, broken-line frames indicate that the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled.

When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so the induction heating operation is stopped at this stage, and the heat cooking period is resumed. P2 ends.

Next, the heating pause period P3 is entered. That is, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all enabled (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame).

In the first embodiment, "when the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the central operation unit (common operation unit) 40M is restored, and the heating of the cooking process 2 is performed. The meaning of "the operation start and end are executed according to instructions from the central operation unit 40M" will be explained.

"Restoration of the input function" as described above does not mean that the function is unconditionally revived immediately after the cooking process 1 ends. For example, if the door 114 remains closed from before the cooking process 1 to after the cooking process 1 is finished, the integrated controller MC does not enable the function of the disabled input key. In other words, it is effectively revived when the door 114 is opened. Considering the user's operation for the next cooking process 2, the conditions and timing for reviving the input function are appropriately determined so as to match the actual user's operation (including opening and closing the door). there is

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all maintained valid, so the left heating unit 17HL is separated during the transition period TR or the cooking period P4. (In this case, the control menu is selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches the input keys 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started. Then, by pressing the input key 43MT, the cooking process 2 can be terminated at an arbitrary timing.

Note that the cooking process 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has passed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 ends, regardless of whether the user terminates it arbitrarily or automatically.

Therefore, immediately after the end of the cooking process 2, when additional heating is desired in the heating chamber 113 again with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. of the central operation unit 40M are pressed. By operating the key 43MS, cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2 can be performed. However, since the central operation unit 40M cannot directly select the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 to restart the single cooking mode KM1, once the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected, and the control menu is selected, For example, a method of selecting "warm" is adopted.

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 is completed. Immediately after finishing the cooking process 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooperative cooking mode is entered. It is also possible to perform a process of waiting for a user's input (operation of the input key 43MS) by providing guidance to be handled as a part of KM3.
In this way, after finishing the cooking step 2, the user takes out the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 and checks the doneness of the food. A method of touching an input key MS waiting for an additional operation can be adopted. This method can also improve usability for the user.

FIG. 65 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65, four inputs are required for the operating procedure until the transition to the composite cooking mode KM2. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS. Then, when the mode is shifted to the composite cooking mode KM2, the operation of the input key 43R1 or 43L1 is required to actually operate the induction heating source 9 for heating.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65, four times of input are required for the operation procedure until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS.

When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered as described above, after operating the input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M, the user must first operate the right heating unit 17HR by operating the input key 43R1 on the right operation unit 40R. do.

When the user selects to use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operating unit 40L.

In this way, after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation unit corresponding to the heat source can issue a command to start the heating operation. In addition, the heating stop operation can also be performed from the same operation unit, so that the user does not get lost in the positions of the operation unit and input keys when starting and ending heating.

Next, FIG. 66 will be described.
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram in which the horizontal axis shows various processes in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis shows the user's operation and the operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

FIG. 66 shows the steps up to the start of the cooking operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
In item A on the left side of FIG. 66, "user operation" indicates various input operations on the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" step, five operations A1 to A5 are performed.

A1 "pressing the relay button" means operating the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
A2 "menu selection" is to select one desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made with the input key 43M1.

A3 "Heat source selection" is an operation to select either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed with the input key 43M2. This example shows a case where the right heating unit 17HR is selected.
"Pressing the start button" in A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
A5 "pressing the right IH input button" is to operate the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R.

In item B on the left side of FIG. 66, "cooking process" indicates the type of process up to execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The process referred to here is different from the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 described above.
B1 "selecting cooperative cooking mode" indicates a step of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the object to be cooked.
"Grill heat source standby" in B2 indicates the period during which the oven heat source 188 is on standby. "During heating" in B3 indicates the induction heating period by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 66, "left IH display section" refers to the left display section 31L.
"Lights out (no operation is accepted)" in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left side display section 31L. As described above, the user performs input operations while viewing the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the time of input (operation A4 in FIG. 66) for commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It is a stage. Therefore, since the user may use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left display unit 31 is not activated as part of setting the left heating unit 17HL to the "dedicated state". At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

C2 "turn off (accept normal operation)" means that no information is displayed on the left side display section 31L. However, at the stage where the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP has been completed. Therefore, it has been decided that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL has disappeared. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the left heating unit 17HL to the "dedicated state". For this reason, at this stage, the input function of the left operation unit 40L can be accepted. By actually pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operating unit 40L, it becomes possible to select a control menu (for example, "water boiler") of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 66, "right IH display section" refers to the display content of the right display section 31R.
"Lights out (no operation is accepted)" of D1 means that no information is displayed on the right display section 31R.
As described above, the user performs input operations while viewing the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until the time of input (operation A4 in FIG. 66) for commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It is a stage. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user uses the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right display unit 31 is not activated when the right heating unit 17HR is set to the "dedicated state". At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

After that, when the time point of the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 66) has passed, the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been completed.
The "heating standby state" of D2 refers to a state of waiting for the user's operation A5 after the user has decided to use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, it is at the stage of waiting for a command to start the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR.

The "preheating display" of D3 means displaying information on the preheating state on the right display section 31R. For example, to display information on the actual temperature rise until the preheat (target) temperature (e.g. 180°C) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG.
The "initial screen of cooperative cooking" of E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 94).
"Menu change" in E2 means operating the input key 43M1 to select one target cooking item from the cooperative cooking modes and selecting the corresponding cooperative cooking menu (Fig. 95). (A)).

E3 "Change selected heating source (select right IH)" refers to selecting the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is performed with the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 95 ( B)).
E4 "Right IH input button pressing guidance display" means that in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation section 40R is operated in order to start cooperative cooking. It is meant to indicate that it is necessary. That is, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking (see FIG. 96(A)).

The "IH preheating display" of E5 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating operation. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information about the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180° C. is reached, for example. On the other hand, in the integrated display section (central display section) 30, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating" or "preheating completed" is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP ( See FIG. 96(B)).

In item F on the left side of FIG.
As indicated by F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooked, a total of five voice notifications are made.
The notification content of F1 is, for example, "This is a hamburger steak. It will be cooked on the IH and then finished on the range grill." In other words, although the first specific screen 30SP also displays the food to be cooked and the cooking process, the user is notified of the same information by voice.

The notification content of F2 is, for example, "This is deep-fried chicken. Cook it on the range grill and then finish it on the IH." That is, in response to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the explanation of the cooking process are displayed in real time.

The notification content of F3 is, for example, "Right IH". That is, since the user has performed the right IH (right heating unit) 17HR in operation A3, the result of the selection of the heating source is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "heating will start when the right IH input button is pressed". In other words, the user is requested to perform an operation A4 of the start button (input key 43MS) following the menu selection operation A3. When this operation A4 is performed, an operation of the "input key" on the right operation section 40L is requested. The input key here is the input key 43R1.

The notification content of F5 is, for example, "Start preheating the pot at 180°C".
After the cooperative cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR is started, and the temperature of the object to be heated N such as a pan placed on the top plate 15 reaches the target temperature of 180°C. Preheating operation is started and this fact is reported.

In item G on the left side of FIG. 66, "left IH driving section" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of FIG. 66, "right IH driving section" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating process" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven and the preheating process is being performed.

In the item J on the left side of FIG. 66, the “microwave grill driving unit” refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B that constitute the oven heating source 188, and the operation of the microwave heating source. 189 refers to the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 . In other words, it generally shows the operation of the driving unit for carrying out the above-described "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

Next, FIG. 67 will be described.
FIG. 67 shows a case of cooking "hamburger" in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Similar to FIG. 66, the horizontal axis indicates various processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the vertical axis indicates the user's operation and operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 67 are the same as those explained in FIG.
In FIG. 67, the content of the operation in A11 is to start preheating in order to cook a hamburger steak, and then select the left heating unit 17HL in order to perform the cooking step 1 (corresponding to the cooking step B11 in FIG. 64). and press the input key 43L1.

A12 "IH off/on button depression" means that the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL as an input switch and presses the input key 43L1 in order to end the hamburger cooking step 1.

A13 “open the grill door” is an operation for the user to open the door 114 .
A14 "pressing the start button" means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
A15 "pressing the time button" means pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

A16 "pressing the start button" means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
A17 “pressing the cancel button (cancelling during grill heating)” means pressing the oven heating source 188 .
A18 "pressing the cancel button" means pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, all the series of heating operations in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (cancellation of the cooperative cooking mode).

In item B (cooking process) in FIG. 67, B11 "IH heating process" indicates the induction heating process in the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
The "grill heating standby step" of B12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 waits until the user's operation A14 is performed.
B13 “grill heating step” indicates a heating step using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 .

B14 "grill heating extension waiting step" indicates a waiting period during which the user waits for a judgment as to whether or not to issue an extension step after the grill heating step of B13 is temporarily completed.
The "extended heating step" in B15 means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven (energized) again because the user performed operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extension waiting step in B14. start). The extended heating process is started by pressing the enter key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 67, the "extended heating step" B15 can be performed not only once but many times if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the operator presses the cancel button in A18, the cooperative cooking mode is canceled at the time of canceling the input key 43MT (for canceling the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode). To cook in room 113, oven heat source 188 and microwave heat source 189 must be operated in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display section) in FIG. 67, C11 "preheating display" is to display the target preheating temperature in the preheating process in the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L (FIG. 87, FIG. 89). For example, a preheating target temperature (for example, 180° C.) is displayed.

C11a-C11d indicate progress displays 1-4. For example, progress display 1 is a display of "preheating", and "progress display 4" is a display of "appropriate temperature". This "appropriate temperature" indicates that the object to be heated (pot, etc.) N is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180°C). During the period of the preheating display (C11), progress displays 1 to 4 (C11a to C11d) are performed according to the progress of preheating (temperature rise). In FIG. 67, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating section 17HL is performed on the left display section 31L.

The “cooking process” of C12 indicates that the object to be heated N is being cooked after the left heating unit 17HL reaches the preheating target temperature (for example, 180° C.). That is, it is displayed that the cooking process 1 has started. As is clear from the cooking steps of C11 and C12, no user operation is performed during this period (no operation is required). In other words, after the operation A11 is performed, the user's operation input is not required until the operation A12.

Item E (central display portion) in FIG. 67 indicates the display contents of the integrated display portion 30 .
The "IH preheating display" of E11 indicates that preheating has been started by the left heating section 17HL on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 97A). .

In FIG. 67, "IH heating display" at E12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is ready for heating because the preheating is completed (see FIG. 97(B)). That is, it indicates that it is the stage of proceeding to the cooking process 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

E13 "grill door open/close operation guidance display" is to prompt the user to move the food to be cooked (to perform the cooking process 2) to the heating chamber (heating chamber) 113, since the induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed. There is (see Figure 99). One example of the additional information 331 in this scene is the indication "please put the food in the heating chamber".

As shown in FIG. 98, during the induction heating cooking by the left IH coil 17HL, if the user wishes to stop the heating operation at an arbitrary timing, the additional information "press the left IH turn-on button". 331 may be displayed. The "cut-on button" referred to here is the input key 43L1.

In FIG. 67, E14 "alternate display of heating power change display and start guidance display" indicates that the heating power in range grill cooking (combined heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and furthermore, in such a heating chamber It is displayed that grill heating cooking can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 100).

In FIG. 67, E15 "grill heating display" means that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2) (see FIG. 101).

In the first embodiment, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to simultaneously heat the food from the inside and outside by the synergistic effect of microwaves and radiant heat.

In FIG. 67, E16 "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" means that the grill heating step B13 is completed, so that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3) and the grill can be heated again. This is for display (see FIG. 102(A)).

Also, if the user does not desire extended heating, pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT) displays that the linked cooking mode can be ended without extended heating (see FIG. 102(B)). These two types of information are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds in the first specific screen 30SP.

The "time setting display" of E17 displays the result of setting the extended time when the heating cooking time is extended by the input key 43M3 and the grill is heated again (see FIG. 103). After this time setting display, the "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) in FIG. 67, the content of notification at F11 is "start preheating the pot at 180° C.". This is to notify by voice that the preheating process has been started by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating process B11.

In FIG. 67, the notification content of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature, please start cooking". It notifies that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached a target temperature (for example, 180° C.), and prompts the right operation unit 40R to start heating.

FA1 in FIG. 67 is notification of the first reference information. This "first reference information" FA1 is referred to as "reference information 1" in the following description. Note that the purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 31L and 31R using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 1".

The notification of reference information 1 (FA1) is performed when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has passed since the cooking process 1 (G12 in FIG. 67) by the left IH coil 17L was started. This will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 67, the notification content of F13 is "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself and put the food in the refrigerator". This is because the cooking process 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR is over, so the food should be moved to the heating chamber 113 for the cooking process 2, and because the top plate 15 and the like are hot, it calls attention. be.

The notification content of F14 is "Press the start button to start heating the range grill". This notifies that the input key 43MS can be operated to start range grill cooking.
The notification content of F15 is "Begin standardizing finish of range grill". This notifies that cooking process 2 of the range grill is started and cooking (for example, hamburger) is completed. It should be noted that "start standard" means that the heating power for microwave grill cooking is "standard".

FA2 in FIG. 67 is notification of the second reference information. This "second reference information" FA2 is called "reference information 2" in the following description. Note that the purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 31L and 31R using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 2".

The reference information 2 (FA2) is notified after a predetermined elapsed time (second elapsed time TN2) from the start of the cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 67) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113. It is done when the time has passed. Alternatively, it is performed when the predetermined temperature (second elevated temperature TN2) is exceeded from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 67) is started. These will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The notification content of F16 is to notify that cooking on the range grill is finished and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). In addition, if the cancellation button (input key 43MT) is operated, it is also notified that the series of cooperative cooking modes KM3 is terminated without extended heating. Furthermore, since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high, the user is reminded to clean the inside of the refrigerator after it cools down.

The notification content of F17 is that after the cooking step (B13) of the range grill is completed, the user will operate extended heating to start further heating for 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After the notification of F17, the notification of F16 is performed again. If the user further instructs extended heating, such notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH driving section) in FIG. 67, G11 indicates the induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows the induction heating operation for the cooking step 1 that follows the preheating step.

In item J (microwave grill driving unit) in FIG. 67, J11 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and the cooking process 2 is executed during this period.
J12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven for the extended heating step.

Next, FIG. 68 will be described. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various processes and operations when "fried chicken", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode. As in FIGS. 66 and 67, the horizontal axis indicates various processes in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis indicates the user's operation and the operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

In FIG. 68, the operation content of A21 of item A (user's operation) is to first select the left heating unit 17HL and press the input key 43L1 in order to cook fried chicken. This starts the preheating process (see G21 in FIG. 68).

The operation of A22 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 . At this stage, induction heating (preheating) has already started in the left heating section 17HL.
The operation of A23 is called "depressing the start button" and is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By this operation of A23, the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. In addition, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 .

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating portion 17HL ends, the grill heating step B23 of the “range grill driving portion” in the heating chamber 113 is started.
As described above, even if the oven heating source 188 is energized, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately. have decided.

The operation of A24 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating step B23 by the "microwave grill driving unit" is completed. Thereby, the object to be cooked (food) can be taken out from the heating chamber 113 .

On the other hand, before the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is taken out from the heating chamber 113, the cooking utensil for fried chicken (the object to be heated N such as a special pot) is heated in the left heating unit 17HL (cooking step G22). (in this case, no cooking oil is poured). Therefore, when the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 is placed on the preheated food N, the cooking process 2 by the induction heating source 9 is performed (at this point, cooking oil, seasonings, etc. are added). you can)
.

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M3 called the time button in order to repeat the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill drive unit".
The operation of A26 is to press the input key 43MS to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation of A27 is to press the input key 43MT in order to end the grill heating step B23 at an arbitrary point in the middle. This cancels the cooperative cooking mode.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 68, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is an IH preheating step, which is a step of preheating in the left heating section 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and waits for the heating start operation A23.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is an IH heating step, which is a cooking step 2 in which the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user heats.

Next, in FIG. 68, item C (left IH display section) will be described.
The display of C21 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating.
The displays C21a to C21d are sequentially displayed during the period of display C21. C21a is progress display 1, C21b is progress display 2, C21c is progress display 3, and C21d is progress display 4.
The display of C22 is the completion (cooking process) display of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Item E (central display portion) in FIG. 68 will be described.
The display of E21 is an IH preheat display, and it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating (see FIG. 104(A)).
E22 is a grill door opening/closing operation guidance display, which urges the door 114 to be opened and the object to be cooked (food) to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 104 (B). )reference).

E23 is an alternate display of heating power change display and start guidance display, and when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit", it is possible to adjust the heating power and to start cooking by pressing the input key 43MS. What can be done is displayed (see FIG. 105(A)).

E24 is a range heating display, which indicates that the heating power for cooking can be changed when the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and displays the remaining time until the end of cooking after it has started (Fig. 106). reference).
E25, as shown in FIGS. 107A and 107B, alternately displays the extension operation guidance display and the IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking step B24, which is performed by driving the "microwave grill driving section", is completed, the time is extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to display that the heat cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it displays that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL is completed. That is, these two types of information are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds in the first specific screen 30SP.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking process B24, which is being performed by driving the "microwave grill drive unit", will be performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 108).
.

In FIG. 68, item F (informing means) will be described.
The notification of F21 is a voice notification that the preheating process has started by the preheating target temperature and the left heating unit 17HL, for example, "preheating of the pot will start at 180°C."
The notification of F22 is "Soon the left IH will reach the set temperature. Please put the food in the refrigerator". It notifies that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target temperature (for example, 180° C.), and prompts the user to put food or the like in the heating chamber 113 so that the range grill cooking in the heating chamber 113 can be started. be.

The notification of F23 has the content of "The heating of the range is started with the start button." In other words, it is notified that the input key 43MS is pressed to start range grill cooking.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "range, start finish standard". In this case, "finishing standard" means that the thermal power is at a standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 68 is notification of the third reference information. This "third reference information" is referred to as "reference information 3" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 3".

The reference information 3 is notified after a predetermined time (third It is performed when the elapsed time TN3) has passed. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

The notification of F25 relates to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, the content is "The cooking of the range grill is finished. You can extend the cooking by pressing the time button. Please take out the food from the inside and start cooking with the IH."

The notification of F26 is for notifying that the cooking on the range grill is to be performed again after the cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, a notification saying "Microwave grill, starting 2 minutes" is performed. This means that since the extension time is set to 2 minutes, cooking on the range grill will start for 2 minutes.

FA5 in FIG. 68 is notification of the fifth reference information. This "fifth reference information" FA5 is called "reference information 5" in the following description. Note that the purpose of this reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display section 30 using characters or graphics. The display in that case is called "reference display 5".

The reference information 5 is notified after a predetermined time (fifth It is performed when time TN5) has passed. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 68, in item G (left IH driving section), the preheating process of G21 is the preheating process by the left heating section 17HL and indicates the driving period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 68, G22 similarly indicates the heating operation (driving of the inverter circuit 81L) period for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (microwave grill drive unit), the heating step J21 indicates the drive period by the oven heat source 188 and the microwave heat source 189 . In addition, since the linked cooking mode described in FIG. 68 is for cooking "fried chicken", it is sufficient to drive only the microwave heating source 189 in practice.

Next, FIGS. 69-71 will be described.
69 to 71 show the process of notifying the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 69 shows the case of cooking a hamburger as the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
This FIG. 69 is a flow chart corresponding to various steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG.
In this Embodiment 1, the hamburger is prepared in the cooking step 1, for example, by the left heating unit 17HL, and in the cooking step 2 by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, the cooking process 2 uses both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 .

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking step 1) is started on the object to be heated N already heated to the preheating temperature (for example, 180° C.) in the left heating unit 17HL, and as described in FIG. The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking." The "set temperature" is the preheating temperature set by the user. The default value is 180°C. Also, this cooking process 1 is not started from the time point when the IH coil 17L starts induction heating. The start time is when the object to be cooked (in this case, a hamburger) is placed on the object to be heated N that has reached the preheating temperature and heating is started.

In the next step SA2, the elapsed time measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
A clock circuit 96 measures the elapsed time TN1.

At step SA3, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded.
When grilling a hamburger, the amount (weight) of the hamburger, the time to bake, and the degree of heat to bake are important. , if the standard time is "7 minutes", the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

If the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know the approximate timing of turning the hamburger upside down (turning it over) halfway through, in the above example, the user can indicate the timing of turning upside down by the notification FA1 after 5 minutes have passed. can know. The actual content of the notification is, for example, "Five minutes have passed since the start of heating. Heating will be completed in two minutes."

In addition, in the case of other cooperative cooking modes, for example, the notification is such that the timing of adding water, seasoning, or cooking liquid can be known on the way.

If the elapsed time TN1 has passed, step SA3 becomes "Yes", the process proceeds to step SA4, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1.
Further, in synchronization with this, reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed by the left display section 31L.

After step SA4, it is determined whether or not the user wants to stop the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if there is a stop command, the process proceeds to step SA6.

At step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As described with reference to FIG. 67, a voice notification F13 to the effect that "The pot is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself and put the food into the chamber."

A user moves the food to be cooked (hamburger in this case) into the heating chamber 113 . In this case, if the metal pot used for induction heating is not used, instead use a tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a dedicated saucer 145 (not shown). . A hamburger is put in such tableware or saucer and placed in the heating chamber 113 .

Alternatively, the object to be heated N used for induction heating may be put into the heating chamber 113 as it is for cooking. However, it is limited to the object N to be heated (radio wave transparent or open type) that can be cooked by microwave heating.

When the integrated controller MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is in a closed state, in the next step SA7, as described in FIG. ” is performed.

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes "Yes", and as the cooking step 2, range grill cooking is started.
As explained with reference to FIG. 67, a voice notification F15 is given with the content of "the range grill finishing standard will be started" (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189, which serves as a heating source for the range grill, is driven with standard heating power. For example, operation is started with an output of 500 W as described above.
Also, the upper heater 163A of the oven heating source 188, which serves as the heating source for the range grill, starts to be energized at 1000W.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the time of step SA10 is started (SA11). When it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has passed (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies the second reference information (reference information 2). In synchronism with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 2 (FA2).

The notification content of the reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has passed since the cooking process 2 was started. If the standard time of the cooking process 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, and the elapsed time TN2 is set to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the cooking process 2 can be finished 30 seconds before the end of the cooking process 2. can know.

In general, it is said that when a food material is heated to some extent, the degree of heating of the food material progresses rapidly. In particular, if the food is not used to cooking with heat, there is a concern that the food will be overheated. Therefore, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified before the end of the cooking step.

Similarly, in the cooking step 2, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified before the end of the cooking step. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to finish the cooking and pay attention to and prepare for the next step.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After that, the notification of F16 shown in FIG. 67 is performed. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3). Further, if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, all the "hamburger" cooking processes in the linked cooking mode are terminated.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
In FIG. 70, "fried chicken" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the cooking process 1 is performed with the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). The cooking process 2 is, for example, the case of using the left heating unit 17HL.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 70, there is also a cooking process 3, and this process is performed by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).
FIG. 70 is a flow chart corresponding to various steps of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG.

As described with reference to FIG. 68, when the cooking process 1 is started (A23), for example, a voice notification F24 saying, "Microwave, finish standardization is started" is performed. In this case, "finishing standard" means that the thermal power is at a standard level. For example, a heating operation is started with a microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

At next step SB2, measurement of the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the cooking object is started. In other words, the measurement of the rising temperature TN3 of the basic food material (chicken) for "fried chicken" cooking is started.
The temperature detection circuit 93 measures the temperature TN3.

At the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When chicken, which is a food material for fried chicken, is heated by microwaves, the temperature rises. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the measured result of this temperature reaches a predetermined temperature rise TN3.

The rate of increase of the temperature TN3 varies depending on three factors: the amount (weight) of the fried chicken, the baking time, and the degree of heat. The temperature rise pattern when cooking a predetermined amount (e.g., 300 g) of "fried chicken" material with standard heating power (e.g., microwave with an output of 500 W) is determined by the integrated control device MC as control data from the results of prior experiments. I have.

In other words, the integrated controller MC has data indicating that when finishing with a standard microwave output (500 W), it is better to raise the temperature to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the user is notified when the temperature reaches the elevated temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can know in advance that the time to end the (microwave) heating of fried chicken is approaching by the voice notification of reference information 3 (FA3). In addition, in synchronism with this, it is also possible to know from the reference display 3 of the integrated display section 30 .

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to excess cooking time). It should be noted that the user may stop in the middle. For example, if the control program is to stop the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130 one minute after the temperature rises to TN3, the temperature rise The heating operation may be arbitrarily stopped before one minute elapses after receiving the notification of the reference information 3 that the temperature has risen to TN3.

After that, the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 using the induction heating unit 17H. For this purpose, the user needs to move the food in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15 . This point will be explained with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 70, step SB7 is notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in the cooking process 2. FIG. This is determined by the elapsed time TN4 or the temperature rise TN4 from the time when the user puts the food to be cooked on the food N heated to a high temperature by preheating after preheating is completed in the induction heating unit 17H.

At this step SB8, the user does not operate the input operation section 40 at all. Simply move the food to be cooked. Therefore, as the starting point of the elapsed time TN4, information obtained by detecting the timing when the temperature of the object to be heated N is lowered is adopted. Since the temperature of the object to be heated N suddenly drops when the object to be cooked is placed or thrown in, the temperature detecting circuit 93 detects the point of time and counts the elapsed time from this detection time.

Step SB8 after this is a scene for judging an instruction for carrying out the cooking process 3 in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking process 2 is finished. The user performs the operation of A26 shown in FIG. For that purpose, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before this step SB7, it is necessary for the user to return the food that has been induction-heated (cooking step 2) on the top plate 15 to the heating chamber 113 again. This point will be explained with reference to FIG.

At the next step SB9, the cooking process 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification of F26 notifies that the range grill is to be used for cooking again after the cooking of the range grill is finished. For example, a notification saying "Microwave grill, starting 2 minutes" is made.

At the next step SB10, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start of the cooking process 3 is started.
A clock circuit 96 measures the elapsed time TN5.

At the next step SB11, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN5 has passed.
In the stage before starting the cooking process 3 (the stage before step SB8), for example, when the cooking of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to be performed for 2 minutes, the elapsed time is , for example, 1 minute and 30 seconds. In other words, it is set 30 seconds before the cooking process 3 ends.

If the elapsed time TN5 is exceeded, the process proceeds to step SB12.
At step SB12, reference information 5 (FA5) is announced by voice. The reference information 5 is, for example, guidance such as "heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend the heating time further, please set the time." In addition, since it is known that the final cooking process will be completed, the user can start preparations for taking out the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 113 from the point of time when this reference information 5 is notified. In synchronism with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 5 (FA5).

At the next step SB13, the cooking process 3 is automatically stopped.
In addition, the notification of F25 shown in FIG. 68 is also performed. This notification relates to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, the content is "The cooking of the range grill is finished. You can extend the cooking time by pressing the time button. Please take out the food from the oven." Note that the cooking process 3 can be stopped by opening the door 114 without the user operating the input operation unit 40 .

Next, FIG. 71 will be described.
This FIG. 71 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. 71 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 68 and 70. FIG.
In FIG. 71, #1 to #9 indicate user's operations and state changes of the heating cooker 1. In FIG. Other symbols correspond to FIGS. 68 and 70. FIG.

In FIG. 71, the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1 before starting the cooking process 1 in order to cook "fried chicken" (operation A21 in FIG. 68). Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is started. The object to be heated N in this case is a metal frying pan for tempura, and a certain amount or more of edible oil is put therein.

On the other hand, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and puts the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
Then, after closing the door 114, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this time, the microwave heating source 189 operates to start the cooking step 1 of microwave heating cooking. Then, reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 70 (SB4 in FIG. 70).

During the cooking process 1, preheating of the left induction heating portion 17HL is completed (for example, the heated portion N is heated to 180° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of preheating is notified to the user by voice, text, etc. (#2).

The user can stop the microwave cooking at any timing during the cooking process 1. To stop, open door 114 . If the input key 40MT of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the selection of "fried chicken" in the cooperative cooking mode is cancelled.

The opening of the door 114 immediately stops the microwave heating operation, and the cooking process 1 ends (#3).
Next, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N preheated on the top plate 15 (#4).

Then, the cooking process 2 is started in the left heating section 17HL (#5).
In the cooking process 2, since the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed first before starting preheating, an induction heating start command is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated controller MC at that time. Sent.

The user does not need to operate the input operation unit 40 to start the cooking process 2 (#5).
The cooking process 2 starts when the food to be cooked is placed on the food N that has been actually preheated to be heated.
The end of the cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user operating the left operation unit 40L.

The user then moves the food item again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start the cooking process 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
When a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has passed since the cooking process 3 by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 67), reference information 5 ( Notification of FA5) is performed.

The reference information 5 (FA5) is information including guidance such as, for example, "Heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend the heating time further, please set the time." In addition, since it is known that the final cooking process will be completed, the user can start preparations for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the time when this reference information 5 is notified. In synchronism with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 5 (FA5).

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking process 3 ends (#7). Note that this cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately when the user opens the door 114 .
After that, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N preheated on the top plate 15 (#8). In this case, since the object to be heated N is maintained in a heated state by induction heating, induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (#9). In this case, if the object to be heated N is already preheated, the object to be cooked is simply moved to the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 as it is.

Induction cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 40L. In other words, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L corresponding to the left heating section 17HL.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 71 can shorten the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 .
That is, the food (to-be-cooked food) is put into the heating chamber 113 and the cooking process 1 is started before the completion of preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of preheating.

Since preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred to the food N to be heated on the top plate 15 after the cooking process 1 is completed, and the cooking process is completed. 2 can be started.

Note that the cooking process 3 and the cooking process 4 are not necessarily required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the user's wishes, the cooking process may be completed as required.

Also, in FIG. 71, the "left IH coil driving period" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished. , the driving of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time by the left operation unit 40L after the cooking process 2 is finished. Specifically, when the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is pressed, the overheating operation of the left heating section 17HL is stopped. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 67, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start preheating again before the cooking process 4.

Next, FIG. 72 will be described.
Similar to FIG. 71, FIG. 72 shows operation steps when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. FIG. 72 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 68 and 70. FIG.
In FIG. 72, #1 to #9 show user's operations and state changes of the heating cooker 1, as explained in FIG. Other symbols correspond to FIGS. 68 and 70. FIG.

A difference between FIG. 72 and FIG. 71 will be described.
FIG. 72 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after waiting for the completion of preheating of the object to be heated N by the induction heating source 9 and its notification (#2).

When the completion of preheating of the object to be heated N by the induction heating source 9 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L and 31R, and when the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of preheating of the object to be heated N, the user is notified by the voice of the heating chamber. A door 114 of 113 is opened, and ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) are put into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this time, the microwave heating source 189 operates to start the cooking step 1 of microwave heating cooking. Then, reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 70 (SB4 in FIG. 70). After this, the steps are the same as those shown in FIG.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 72, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 is longer than in FIG.
However, after waiting for the completion of preheating of the induction heating source 9 or the notification of the completion of preheating, the food (the food to be cooked) is started to be heated in the heating chamber 113. Therefore, at the end of the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113, There is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately by moving the food to be cooked. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

In FIG. 72, the "left IH coil driving period" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished. , the driving of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time by the left operation unit 40L after the cooking process 2 is finished. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 72, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start preheating again before the cooking process 4.

Next, FIGS. 73 to 75 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 74 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until transition to the linked cooking mode. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results.

FIG. 73 will be described. Since steps ST2 to ST4 have already been described with reference to FIG. 38, they will be briefly described.
Step ST2 is a step in which the IH control unit 90 determines whether or not there is an abnormality. The presence or absence of an abnormality in the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 is also diagnosed by the integrated control device MC.

At the stage of step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display a message that "there is no abnormality and cooking can be started". At this stage, the integrated control device MC also confirms whether or not it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 40 for the upper limit value of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance for prompting selection of the heating means.
In this step ST4, the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, and 2B) is displayed on the integrated display section 30, and caution information is also displayed (see FIG. 52).

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key (for example, 43M1) other than the input key 43MC has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. At step STR1, it is checked whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, the usage status of the heat sources used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
This permission condition and determination result will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

At step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 43MC is pressed, it is determined whether or not the individual heating cooking is selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are the individual operation units, and the combined cooking mode KM2 is set by the central operation unit 40M. Determine if selected.

When the input key 43MC is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the "cooperation cooking mode KM3" is started as described above.
On the other hand, if the input key 43MC has not been operated and the input key 43M1 has been touch-operated, the determination in step STC is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 73, steps STR1 and STR2 are "permission conditions" determination steps for determining whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Step STR1 is a step of judging "permission condition 1".
Here, "permission condition 1" is
(1) the peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more;
(2) if there is a power reduction command signal received from the external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are satisfied, the determination at step STR1 is "Yes".

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) If the induction heating source 9 is provided with a central heating section, the central heating section is not in heating operation.
(2) one or both of the oven heating means 188 or the microwave heating means 189 are not in heating operation;
(3) Neither the right heating section nor the left heating section of the induction heating source 9 is in heating operation (or only one is in heating operation).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step STR2 will result in a "Yes" determination. Then, it proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 74).
If the determination is "No" in steps STR1 and STR2, the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning of "5000 W or more" in the "permission condition 1" will be explained. To simplify the explanation, the following explanation does not particularly refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the upper cooling fan 60 and the like.

The reason why the required demand (preliminary securing of power demand) when implementing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is 5000 W or more is that the maximum (instantaneous) power during operation of each heating source when executing the cooperative cooking mode is as follows. Because it is a street.
(1) Range operation (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) During oven operation: 2000 W (upper heater: 1000 W, lower heater: 10
00W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500 W (microwave heating source 189: 500 W, upper heater: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for the automatic control menu (fried food and appropriate temperature) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate simultaneously.
That is, the total power of the microwave heating source 189 "1000 W", the oven heating source 188 "1000 W (2000 W is alternately energized at 1000 W)", and the induction heating source 9 "1500 W" is the maximum power. is 3500W.

When the demand (prior security of power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed from this state, since the remaining demand is insufficient for the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, the thermal power of the right heating unit 17HR is lowered to 1500 W (from 3000 W) to start cooperative cooking. can do.

If the demand (prior securing of power demand) is 4000 W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is frying food (maximum 1500W required), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If cooperative cooking is to be performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR must be reduced. However, if the heating power is lowered while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heating power of the automatic control menu cannot be lowered.
Ultimately, 4000 W cannot ensure the required thermal power for the automatic control menu (fried food and two types of appropriate temperature).

As is clear from the above description, before starting the cooperative cooking mode, the electric power (3500 W) necessary for cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) necessary for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand of 5000 W, which is the total value (prior security of power demand).

Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
In the linked cooking mode of Embodiment 1, the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (first linked cooking mode) (see FIG. 61). ).
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in reverse order.

The steps in FIG. 74 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
At step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 to display information on the cooperative cooking mode. As shown in FIG. 60, in order to select a cooking menu for each linked cooking mode, "name of food to be cooked" (for example, "hamburger") 330 is displayed as one type of identification information.

At the next step STR4, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 60, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed upward or downward in sequence. The display changes as you move. In this first embodiment, there are eight types of food to be cooked in total. Therefore, if the left input key 43M1 is operated once in the state of FIG. switch to

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), it is determined as "Yes" in step STR5, and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step of selecting one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed on the first specifying screen. By operating a pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select either one of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L.

It should be noted that the right heating section 17HR may be set as a default, the heating section specifying section 333R may be displayed first on the first specifying screen 30SP, and the process may proceed to step STR7. In the example described with reference to FIG. 60, when hamburgers are cooked by cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set by default, and the heating unit specifying unit 333L is configured to preferentially select the left heating unit 17HL. was displayed.

In the next step STR6, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. If the input key 43MT is operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation program proceeds to step STR8.
In step STR8, control conditions such as the finally selected heating section (for example, the right heating section 17HR) and the output value during microwave heating being 500 W are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, Proceeding to the next step STR9, the cooperative cooking mode is entered from this stage. That is, after this, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the cooking in the linked cooking mode is automatically started.

The display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in step STR8 include process information such as that the right heating unit 17HR is used in the first cooking process 1, and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the next cooking process 2. is displayed on the process display section 332 . The contents and changes of these display screens will be described later in detail.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered, induction heating cooking is started at the time when the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R is pressed. As described with reference to FIG. 39, the induction heating is not started immediately. Note that step MS4 shown in FIG. 39 follows from step STR9.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If, for example, 30 minutes have passed since the operation of the input key 43MC and the state is still circulating between steps STR3 to STR7, the main power is automatically turned off, or the step Alternatively, the process may return to ST4 (see FIGS. 73 and 76).

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
This FIG. 75 shows the judgment processing of steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG.
Step STX1 is the step of operating the input key 43MC.
The next step STX2 is a step in which the integrated control unit MC investigates the latest state of the heating cooker with respect to the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above.

The next step STX3 is a stage of determination processing corresponding to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. In this step STX3, the integrated control unit MC compares with the latest state of the heating cooker with respect to the permission conditions 1 and 2, and determines whether or not the permission conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied. .

In step STX3 of FIG. 75, notification 1 to notification 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the speech synthesizer 95. FIG.
In addition, display 1 to display 4 indicate the contents displayed in the integrated display section 30. FIG. Note that these displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP displayed from the time of step STR3 in FIG. 74, but are displayed on the integrated display section 30 where the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. It is a thing. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the premises (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode are satisfied.

Next, FIG. 76 will be described.
The control form in FIG. 76 is for a (second) linked cooking mode different from the (first) linked cooking mode in FIG. 74 . There are two heating sources used in this cooperative cooking mode of FIG. It is part 17HL. 76 is largely different from that of FIG. 74 in step STR11.

In the above-described "heat up" (automatic range) of the range grill cooking (compound cooking) menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. to automatically stop microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. The default value of the "target temperature" here is 80° C., but this can be set to a higher temperature side or a lower temperature side by the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (for example, 70° C.), the temperature measuring unit 158 detects the high temperature early, and microwave heating is performed while the cooking is incomplete. There is a concern that the heating will stop.

Therefore, in the control shown in FIG. 76, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right side display section 31R and the left side display section 31L indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time. display (STR12). Furthermore, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as well. Further, it is more certain if the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice. The left and right display portions 31L and 31R are displayed because the user has not selected any of the left and right heating portions 17HL and 17HR at this stage.

In addition, since the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied is not displayed at this stage, it is displayed on the right side display portion 31R and the left side display portion 31L. Alternatively, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in FIGS. 73 and 75, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determine whether or not to shift to the cooperative cooking mode, but step STR11 in FIG. corresponds to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, it is possible to inform the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode.

At the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that cooking cannot be started because the temperature of heating chamber 113 is too high, the temperature of heating chamber 113 can be quickly lowered by opening door 114, which is beneficial to the user. You may make it convey information together.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used during execution of the cooperative cooking mode regardless of the cooperative cooking.
In Embodiment 1 of FIG. 77, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9 first, and the heating source used next is the microwave heating source. 189 and oven heating source 188 .

When the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode has already progressed to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating section 17HL to perform another cooking. When the left operation unit 40L is operated, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, it is determined that the usage does not exceed the total power regulation value of 5000 W, for example, in the same manner as the "permission condition 1" described above.

When the determination of "No" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH8, and the maximum power amount when using the left heating unit 17HL and the heat sources (microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188) during cooperative cooking For example, the maximum thermal power value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the total value with the amount of electric power does not exceed the regulation value of the power control unit 72, and the limit value is notified to the user by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, even if the electric power used by the left heating unit 17HL (heat power for induction heating) is reduced from the state of the heat source in which the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being executed, the allowable total amount of electric power is exceeded. , disabling processing of the left heating unit 17HL is performed in step SH8. Specifically, the fact that the device cannot be used is displayed on the left display section 31L, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies it by voice. The reason why it cannot be used is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .

In the next step SH3, the user's input operation result is analyzed and it is determined whether or not it is a "permitted control menu" that does not correspond to a prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as a "prohibited control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance in consideration of the amount of power to be used (required for cooking). one is specified.
Both (automatic) frying and rice cooking adopt a control method that is assumed to use a large amount of power in the cooking process. There is concern that power supply to (the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) may be disrupted.

For the above reasons, it is determined in step SH3 whether or not the item corresponds to the "permission control menu". For example, a check is made to see if it is one of the allowed control menus, "Boil water".

In step SH3, if it is determined that the item does not correspond to the "permission control menu", the above-described non-permission processing is performed, and the inability to use is notified.

If the judgment of "Yes" is received in step SH3, the process proceeds to step SH4, the driving mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 values are determined. After that, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and induction heating cooking is started (SH5). After that, it is monitored whether or not the stop command from the user is the input key 43L1 (SH6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is stopped immediately. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left display portion 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of cooking by voice (SH7).

At step SH8, if a change to a permitted condition (for example, lowering the thermal power) can be made, the change is made and notified.
Further, if there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL to be used cannot be permitted to be used, the non-permission is notified. Then, if the change processing is successful, the process returns to step SH2.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when additional heating is performed after finishing the heating of the first used heat source in the cooking process of one cooperative cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 78 is for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, in which the microwave heating source 189 used second is driven for a period of time set by the user (for example, 5 minutes). For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 is omitted.

In Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 78, the heat source used in the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is the default right heating section 17HR as described with reference to FIG. The heating sources used in the subsequent cooking step 2 are microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 .

A scene in which the user uses the microwave heating source 189 in order to perform the cooking process 2 in the one linked cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 77 will be described.
After finishing the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR, when the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is operated next, the integrated controller MC receives the operation signal (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, driving of the inverter circuit 121A is started (SJ2), and measurement of the set time for timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) is started (SJ3).
The output value of microwave heating is the default value (500 W), but the user can change the heating power by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, which constitute the oven heating source 188, are started to be energized by the heating chamber controller 159. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is started at the same time as the oscillation operation of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is started.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized while the magnetron 122 is oscillating. In other words, the food to be cooked is simultaneously heated by microwaves and electric radiation heat (cooking step 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period. The explanation of time is omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT for instructing the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
When the input key 43MT for instructing the stop of heating is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeated within the set time of timer cooking. When the set time for timer cooking has passed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is made for the user to decide whether or not the once-stopped microwave cooking is to be continued for a predetermined period of time or a period of time specified by the user. Specifically, on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, for example, "Would you like to extend the heating time? If you want to extend the heating time, please press the time key."

The reason why such an extension is allowed is that if the user judges that the heating is still insufficient as a result of looking at the heating state of the food to be cooked, it can be quickly heated (in this case, microwave heating and electric radiation heating) is resumed, and the food to be cooked is finished in a better state.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that the operation signal has been received, and if the operation signal has been received, "Yes" is determined.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. If the input key 43M3 is operated once before the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooking time is set to be extended by a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes), or if the input key 43M3 is pressed once, the cooking time is extended by 3 minutes. You may set the program, such as 5 minutes for 2 consecutive presses. Also, even if the cooking is started again, the heating operation can be immediately stopped by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press it within "retention time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11 to terminate the operation of the final cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. do. Then, the fact is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the voice synthesizing device 95 also performs a notification operation (SJ11). If the door 114 is not opened even once from step SJ8 and the holding time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may issue an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC stores the control conditions for operating the microwave heating source 9, the micro heating source, and the oven heating source 188 in chronological order in the storage device MM. Automatically memorize (at the time of this memorization, the end date and time of the cooking process are recorded at the same time).

After that, when a predetermined command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the previously stored cooperative cooking mode and control conditions are called from the storage device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the next cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed. It has a reproduction function that is used to implement the It should be noted that all cooking histories (including information on the date and time of cooking execution) are called up not only for the previous linked cooking mode but also for several times in the past or for a certain period of time (for example, one month). A configuration in which the user selects the item may be used. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to the "function mode", the user can make various settings regarding the reproducibility of the cooking history.

As described above, since the oven heating source 189 also starts to be energized at the start of the RG cooking process, the integrated display section 30 displays whether or not to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. do not display information about However, if the sequence is to first operate the microwave heating source 189 and then operate the oven heating source 188, or if they are operated in reverse order, the time extension of the microwave heating and the oven heating source The 188 time extensions may be separately configurable.

Next, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be described.
FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

FIG. 79 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and particularly shows the steps of the support operation when the user makes a mistake in the input operation or hesitates about the operation.

The steps in FIG. 79 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 (step SL1).

Identification information 330, 330A, and 330B for selecting a cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP as information of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 60) (step SL2).

At the next step SL3, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 74, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is sequentially moved upward or downward. The display changes in shape, and identification information 330 corresponding to another cooking object is displayed in the central portion of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In FIG. 79, the step of selecting one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described in FIG. 60 is omitted.

At the next step SL4, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. If the input key 43MT is operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. That is, it returns to the state of the initial screen during standby.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SL5.
Next, when an input key that is not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is operated among the input keys on the central operation unit 40M, step SL5 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, the "input key not necessary for setting the cooperative cooking mode KM3" is, for example, the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Also, they are the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation section 40R.

As described with reference to FIG. 62, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 43MC, the right heating unit 17HR is occupied, so the input itself with the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R is invalid. . However, it is assumed that the user may not notice it.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is not correct. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is reported immediately. If the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and controlled by the integrated control unit MC so as not to detect whether or not the input keys of the right operation unit 40R are touched, erroneous operations of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, if the input itself from the input key 43R1 or the like is validated and the integrated control device MC does not regard it as a valid signal, an erroneous operation can be detected.

At step SL11, after notifying that the operation is incorrect, the process proceeds to step SL12. At step 12, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation and the content of the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, the process returns to step SL3, and it is recommended to redo the operation.

At step SL5, if there is no erroneous input key operation, the determination at step SL5 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL6.
At step SL6, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If the operation is performed, the process proceeds to step SL13, and detailed information such as correct operation contents is displayed. In addition, at this stage, an overview of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

In the next step SL7, when it is determined that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8 for starting the cooking process 1 according to the cooperative operation program. In addition, before the cooking process 1, a preheating process for starting the preheating operation may be started. If the input key 43MS is not operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 80 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and particularly shows the steps of the support operation when the user makes a mistake in input operation or hesitates about the operation.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display section 30. FIG.
Further, the second specific screen 30SP displays a control menu for cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 (see FIG. 55) (step SL21).

At the next step SL22, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been further operated. As described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, by operating the pair of left and right input keys 43M1, specific sentences 30J indicating names (including abbreviations) of control menus that can be employed in the composite cooking mode KM2 are sequentially displayed upward. Alternatively, the display changes as it moves downward, and a specific sentence 30J of another control menu is displayed in the center of the first area 30L.

At step SL22, if the input key 43M1 is not operated, the display of the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "warm" defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

If the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step SL28.
At step SL28, as described above, the specific text 30J indicating the name (including the abbreviation) of another control menu that can be employed in the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL23. move on.

At the next step SL23, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control conditions such as the heating time information 30S displayed in the second area 30M can be changed to other control conditions (see FIG. 58).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 becomes "No" determination, and the process proceeds to step SL29. At step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

At the next step SL25, if an input key not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 is operated among the input keys on the central operation unit 40M, it is determined "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, the "input keys not necessary for setting the combined cooking mode KM2" are, for example, the input keys 43KP and 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. Also, they are the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation section 40R.

At step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, when the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated by the voice synthesizer 95, an erroneous operation is reported immediately. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

At step SL31, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the content of the correct operation and the content of the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, the process returns to step SL22, and it is recommended to redo the operation.

At step SL24, if there is no erroneous input key operation, the determination at step SL24 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL25.

At step SL25, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it is operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, and detailed information such as correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27 for starting the cooking process 1 according to the operation program of the composite cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation part in linked cooking mode)
Next, FIGS. 81 to 108 will be described.
These figures show the control operation of the input operation section 40 and the display section (the integrated display section 30 and the left side display section 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 81 is a plan view showing the control operation of the input operation section 40 and the display section (integrated display section 30/left display section 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the reference FG is the user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 330B corresponds to the three cooking items "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef", respectively. These identification information 330, 330A, 330B are displayed simultaneously.

In FIG. 81 and the following FIG. 82, illustration of the process display section 332 is omitted in the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330 . In the examples of FIGS. 81 and 82, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL".

The individual light-emitting portion 27M6 adjacent to the input key 43MS blinks as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG. 81, guiding the user to operate this input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source used first in the cooperative cooking mode is the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light emitting display portions 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG.

Then, when the input key 43MS is operated, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered. At this time, since the input function of the input key 43L1 is valid, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the left heating section 17HL performs cooking.

At the same time, the heating power display section 67L indicating the heating power level during induction cooking in the left heating section 17HL lights up (the number of lighting heating power display sections is determined by the default value).
Even if an operation to use the left heating unit 17HL individually (regardless of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is performed while the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, the left heating unit 17HL is controlled by the integrated controller MC as described above. When the operation is prohibited (occupied state), the light emitting display section 27L3 does not emit light as shown in FIG. Also, the heating power display section 67L is not lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if there is an operation to temporarily use the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the left heating unit 17HL can not be used is displayed as reference information in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 . For example, a display such as "The left IH cannot be used because cooperative cooking is in progress" or "The left IH and heating chamber cannot be used at present because cooperative cooking is in progress" is displayed.

As is clear from the above description, the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is present in the left and right central portions on the top surface of the top plate 15, so the user's line of sight naturally goes to the center. get together. Selection of the cooperative cooking mode and guidance display until the start of cooking are also centrally performed on the integrated display section 30 in the central portion.

Furthermore, at the stage where the cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heat source, is finished, an input key 43MS for proceeding to the next heat source is also provided on the central operation unit 40M.
In other words, the main input operations such as selection of the cooperative cooking mode, start of the first cooking process 1, and start of the next cooking process 2 are all concentrated in the front left and right central portions (central operation portion 40M) of the heating cooker 1. can be done.

Next, FIG. 82 will be described.
FIG. 82 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation unit 40M and the left operation unit 40L and the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated display unit 30 simultaneously displays three pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the linked cooking menu, as shown in FIG. 82(B). (Display screen 8A).

Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 82, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL".

When the left input key 43M1 is pressed once more, the identification information 330 (named "hamburger") displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 moves backward, and instead The identification information 330B of "roast beef" displayed in front is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 is displayed one by one in a certain order. is updated with

When the right input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen 8D in FIG. 82B is switched to the display screen 8C every time the input key 43M1 is pressed.
Although only four cooperative cooking menus are shown in FIG. 82, there are a total of eight cooperative cooking menus as described above. These display screens 8A to 8D are all the first specific screen 30SP.

Next, FIG. 83 will be described.
FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooperative cooking menus when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 83, the eight linked cooking menus are displayed (forward or backward) in the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43M1.

Next, FIG. 84 will be described.
FIG. 84 is a list showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
As shown in FIG. 84, there are several kinds of process display portions 332 in the stage immediately before starting the cooking process, depending on the cooking menu (eight kinds from hamburger steak to gratin).

As for the additional information 331, as shown in the additional information A and the additional information B, it is unified over the entire cooperative cooking mode. Note that the additional information A and the additional information B are alternately displayed at regular intervals (for example, every 5 seconds).
Furthermore, in the additional information B, the reason why the heating part of the induction heating source 9 to be used is displayed as "changeable" is that there are two heating parts, the left heating part 17HL and the right heating part 17HR.

Next, the cooking process for the eight types of food shown in FIG. 84 will be briefly described.
Part 1: Cooking menu for microwave grill cooking from induction heating source 9 (4 types)
Hamburg steak: appropriate temperature preheating → appropriate temperature cooking → range grill cooking
"Appropriate temperature preheating" refers to preheating an object to be heated N such as a frying pan to an appropriate temperature (e.g. 18
0°C). In the appropriate temperature state, as cooking step 1, appropriate temperature heating cooking (
by induction heating source 9). Cooking oil is not added to the object N to be heated.
The range that the user can set as the "appropriate temperature" for the induction heating source 9 is 140
°C to 220°C in 20°C increments.
During microwave grill cooking, a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds
Between) can change the firepower so that the finished state can be changed.
Roast beef, paella, gratin: Same as hamburg steak above.

Part 2: Cooking menu from microwave grill cooking to cooking with induction heating source 9 (4 types)
Fried chicken: preheating fried food → microwave grill heating → fried food cooking
"Frying food preheating" means that a specified amount of cooking oil (2
00 g or about 220 CC or more) and specified with the induction heating source 9
preheated to the temperature of
The range that the user can set as the above "fried food preheating" with the induction heating source 9 is 1
40° C. to 200° C. in 10° C. increments.
During microwave grill cooking, a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds
Between) can change the firepower so that the finished state can be changed.
Tonkatsu, tempura: Same as "Karaage" above.
Stir-fried vegetables: appropriate temperature preheating → range heating → appropriate temperature cooking
"Appropriate temperature preheating" refers to preheating an object to be heated N such as a frying pan to an appropriate temperature.
The appropriate temperature state is realized by the induction heating source 9 .
After that, as the cooking step 1, microwave cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 .
The range that the user can set as the "appropriate temperature" for the induction heating source 9 is 140
°C to 220°C in 20°C increments.

Next FIG. 85 is a plan view showing the control operations and display contents of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIGS.
The identification information 330 of three cooperative cooking modes is displayed on this 1st specific screen 30SP. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, identification information 330 of "hamburger" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 in the front-rear direction. At the same time, the additional information 331 and the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in list form on the first specific screen 30SP.

When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, either the right heating section selection mark 334R or the left heating section selection mark 334L is displayed. Allows the user to select one of

The example of FIG. 85 is a case where the default setting is made to recommend the left heating unit 17HL. As shown in FIG. 85, the left heating section selection mark 334L displayed with "LEFT" in white characters is always displayed in the initial first specific screen 30SP.

Either one of the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L can be selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. For example, if the left input key 43M2 is pressed, the left heating section selection mark 334L can be selected, and as shown in FIG.
Conversely, by pressing the right input key 43M2 in the state of FIG. 85, the right heating section selection mark 334R can be selected.

When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (by pressing the input key 43MC) (see FIG. 62) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 63), the left heating unit 17HL It will be in an exclusive state for execution of cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL (the integrated control device MC) does not accept settings for other control menus.

Therefore, the user places the object to be heated N such as a frying pan above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then induction heating starts automatically. The operation of pressing the input key 44R is omitted, and induction heating is automatically started in the left heating unit 17HL after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the input key 43MS is pressed. You can
When the heating operation in the left heating section 17HL is started as described above, the dedicated state of the right heating section 17HR is released. Therefore, the input of the single cooking mode can be immediately started with the right operation unit 40R.

There is also a method of canceling the occupied state of the right heating section 17HR when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. Since it can be changed, at the time of selecting the left heating section selection mark 334L, as described above, the exclusive state of the right heating section 17HR is not released.

The above-mentioned ``appropriate temperature of 180°C'' means that the temperature for preheating the object to be heated N such as a metal pot or a frying pan, which is a container in which the object to be cooked, ie, hamburger steak, is placed is 180°C. That is, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the heating power level so that the temperature of the bottom surface of the object to be heated N becomes 180° C. by the functions of the inverter circuit 81L, the temperature detection circuit 93, and the like.

As the preheating temperature rises, the heating power display section 67L for indicating the heating power level during induction heating cooking does not display the heating power level, but indicates the degree of increase of the preheating temperature and the degree of reaching (approaching) the target preheating temperature. degree).

In FIG. 85, the dashed circle in the thermal power display section 67L indicates the current temperature range, and as the temperature rises, the dashed circle gradually moves to the right. . That is, the state of temperature rise can be known from the light emission state of the thermal power display section 67L. Details will be described with reference to FIG.

The additional information 331 displays, as shown in FIG. 85, "We will notify you when the set temperature is reached."
On the other hand, the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed in a belt-like character so as to cross the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display section 30 horizontally.

As can be seen from the display section 332 of the cooking process in FIG. 85, when the hamburger is to be cooked together, the preheating process is first started by the induction heating source 9, then the cooking process 1, and finally the range grill heating (RG Cooking step 2 for heating) is started.

As shown in FIG. 85, the user's fingertips FG and line of sight are placed in front of the right front of the integrated display section 30, in other words, the central operation section 40M, in order to operate the input keys 43MS until the moment the cooperative cooking mode is started. It is in.
After that, the user's line of sight moves toward the left heating unit 17HL as indicated by the arrow. That is, when the object to be heated N containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating unit 17HL, the user's line of sight moves leftward.

After starting the cooperative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body move from the center to the left, as shown by the large, horizontally long arrow in FIG. However, this movement to the left is not large and does not impose a burden on the user himself.

Next, FIG. 86 will be described.
FIG. 86 is a plan view showing the control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, and shows changes in preheating temperature in chronological order.

FIG. 86(A) shows the portion of the thermal power display section 67L on the left side. The dashed circle in FIG. 86(A) indicates the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheating temperature is 180° C., the four heating power display units 67L emit light from the beginning of the induction heating cooking process. The leftmost light emitter is blinking as indicated by the dashed circle. This flashing state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheating temperature rises, the current temperature rises, so the position of the above-described "blinking portion" moves to the right in sequence. And when the preheat temperature is reached, the blinking part disappears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86(B), at the beginning of the preheating step of the induction heating, if either of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation section 40L is operated, the target value of the preheating temperature is set. can be changed.

For example, each time the left input key 43L2 is pressed, the preheating temperature can be lowered by one step. Conversely, each time the right input key 43L3 is pressed, the preheating temperature can be increased by one step. In this way, the process of changing the preheating temperature is displayed on the left side display section 31L each time as shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described.
FIG. 87 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

When the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL reaches the set preheating temperature, the heating power display unit 67L stops blinking.
When heated to the preheating temperature in this manner, the integrated display section 30 displays "preheating completed" by the additional information 331 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the display contents of the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 change. Specifically, from the display of IH preheating, the stage of "IH heating" of the next cooking process 1 is displayed in white characters.
From this information, users can easily understand that the stage has come to implement induction heating in earnest. That is, it can be seen that the object to be heated N such as a frying pan placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object to be cooked.

A pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L has a function of designating thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. Therefore, when the preheating process is shifted to the full-scale heating process (cooking process 1), each time the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are touched, the heat power value data table is raised by one step. You can select a specific firepower that is one step down. As a result, the user can freely raise or lower the temperature of the object to be heated during induction heating.

Next, FIG. 88 will be described.
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
As shown in FIG. 88(A), when the preheating process is finished, the integrated display section 30 displays to the user that the cooking process 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Further, the cooking process 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L.

The switching of the display between (A) and (B) in FIG. 88 is automatically repeated at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. After the full-scale induction heating cooking process 1 is started, only the display of FIG. 88(C) is displayed. Firepower at this point is shown to be "slightly weak". Furthermore, it is shown that the user can adjust this heating power level (information indicating output level 30 V. In this case, the heating power of induction heating). (D) of FIG. 88 is an example showing the situation immediately after finishing the cooking step 1 (induction heating).

Next, FIG. 89 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. The display contents of FIG. 88 are slightly changed, and the additional information 331 includes a preheating temperature value (for example, 180° C.). The display contents shown in FIG. 88(B) may be changed as shown in FIG.

FIG. 89 shows a stage in which the induction heating cooking process 1 has not yet started when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting section 27M6 is in a blinking state as indicated by the dashed circle.

If the user is requested to press the input key 43MS again in order to clarify the timing of starting the next cooking step 1 after finishing the preheating step, a step of pressing the input key 43MS is added as shown in FIG. You can In that case, as shown in FIG. 89, the individual light-emitting portion 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS may be used for notification. FIG. 89 shows an example in which the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is flashed to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, as indicated by the dashed circle.

88 and 89, even if the input key 43M1 is operated, the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 including "manual range", "automatic range", etc. cannot be displayed on the integrated display section 30. FIG. At this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT to stop the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, even if the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed, the cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL to be used first can only be finished, and the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3 is not completely canceled (cancelled). .

Next, FIG. 90 will be described.
FIG. 90 shows a scene in which the user ends the induction heating cooking process 1 by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already been completed, the thermal power indicator 67L does not emit any light.

On the other hand, on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 indicates that the cooking process 2, that is, the stage of "range grill cooking" (RG cooking) has progressed. indicate. Specifically, from the white display of IH heating, white letters indicate that the stage of RG cooking, which is the final cooking process 2, has progressed.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the cooking step 2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are combined is now being performed.

A command to start the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 also needs to be given by the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90, the individual light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS is in a flashing state, as indicated by the dashed circle, prompting the user to operate the input key 43MS. .

On the other hand, since the stage of FIG. 90 is after the user himself/herself has finished the induction heating cooking process 1 with the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L, the exclusive use of the left heating section 17HL is cancelled. Therefore, by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be started for cooking in the independent cooking mode KM1 different from the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, another cooking menu can be started with the induction heating source 189 by inputting with the left operation section 17HL. However, since the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has not been canceled yet, another cooking using the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2) cannot be performed. Only the exclusive use of the left heating unit 17HL is released.

Next, FIG. 91 will be described.
FIG. 91 shows that when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the stage of “range grill cooking” (RG cooking) in the cooking process 2.

Specifically, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display section 30 in five stages such as "slightly weak" and "weak". This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating the microwave output level" described in FIG. Therefore, the user can select the output level of microwave heating by operating the pair of input keys 43M2.

Next, FIG. 92 will be described.
FIG. 92 shows that, as in FIG. 91, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the stage of the cooking process 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), the second area 30M displays the output level of microwave heating in five stages from "strong" to "weak". Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the heating intensity of the microwave according to the finished state of the food to be cooked. It should be noted that the heating intensity can be adjusted in this manner only within a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) after entering the cooking step 2, as described above.

In the final cooking process 2 described with reference to FIG. 92, the user's operations and line of sight concentrate on the range of the integrated display section 30 and the central operation section 40M. Therefore, the user can concentrate on completing the cooking process 2 while standing in the front center of the cooking device 1 .

In the middle of the cooking process 2, when the user wants to take out the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 from the heating chamber 113 and directly check it, the user can open the door 114 at an arbitrary timing. When the door 114 is opened, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 instantly stops the transmission of microwaves, and the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is also stopped.

When the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating is instantaneously started again. When the door 114 is opened during the cooking process 2 as described above, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 continue to operate.

Next, FIG. 93 will be described.
FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation in the final stage after the cooking process 2 in FIG. 92 and the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user arbitrarily terminates the final cooking process (cooking process 2), the user operates the input key 43MT once. When this button is pressed, the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 ends. However, the series of control sequences has not been canceled at this point. Therefore, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again after temporarily stopping in this way, it is necessary to perform an input operation again on the central operation unit 40M.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the RG cooking is completed, if the time is set again with the input key 43MS within a certain time, the microwave heating can be performed again so that additional heating can be easily performed. (Note that the additional time may be controlled such that if the input key 43M2 or 43M3 is pressed once, it will be one minute, and if it is pressed twice, it will be two minutes).

As shown in FIG. 93(B), the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display screen 10A so that the user can know the timing to end the RG cooking process, which is the final process of cooking with heat (cooking process 2). After that, the display screen 10B changes to the displayed contents. Then, it is configured to display that the cooking process 2 will soon end. The display screen 10B of FIG. 93(B) displays that the cooking process 2 in the heating chamber 113 will end in 12 seconds.

On this display screen 10B, the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the transition of the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, the load of the food to be cooked is determined, and the integrated control unit MC determines the arrival time until completion. Perform a process to predict and display the result.

Instead of detecting the temperature rise of the food to be cooked or the heating chamber 113 to predict when the cooking will be finished, the user may set a timer in advance so that the cooking process 2 is finished by time control. In this case, the load determination as described above is unnecessary.

As described above, when the user sets the timer in advance and finishes the cooking process 2 by time control, the reference information 2 can be notified (step SA13, FA2) as described with reference to FIG. . That is, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to display the display screen 10B after the display screen 10A, and matches the reference information 2 as part of the notification (FA2). displaying.

The display screen 10C of FIG. 93(B) indicates that heating can be started again within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds, or 15 seconds if the door 114 is opened) immediately after the cooking process 2 is finished. This is an example.
The "time button" referred to in this display screen 10C is the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 has reached a high temperature due to the cooking just before this, additional information 331 such as "Caution for grill high temperature" is displayed to enhance the user's safety.

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the user can stop the cooking process (induction heating) of the linked cooking mode KM3 at any time even in the stage of the cooking process 1 (induction heating). , the input key 43MT should be pressed once. However, in order to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and not proceed to the cooking step 2, it is necessary to further press the input key 43MT once.

On the other hand, at the stage of cooking process 2 (in this case, range grill) in cooperative cooking mode KM3 as shown in FIGS. , the input key 43MT should be pressed once. Also, in this case (assuming that there is no cooking process 3), there is no cooking process to proceed to next, so there is no need to press the input key 43MT once again. It should be noted that even if the input key 43MT is pressed twice, no inconvenient operation is started.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, details of changes in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 during the period until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 66 is started will be described in detail.

94 to 96 show the relationship between the contents of the displays E1 to E5 and the input operation section described in the item E "central display section" in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes and operations described in FIG. is shown.

The state of FIG. 94 shows the stage of "E1: initial screen of cooperative cooking", which is the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the central operation unit 40M. It shows the relationship with
FIG. 95A shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of "E2: change menu" and the central operation unit 40M. This is the step of operating the input key 43M1 to select one target cooking item from among the linked cooking modes, and selecting the cooking menu of the corresponding linked cooking mode KM3.

FIG. 95(B) is the stage of "E3: Change selected heating source (select right IH)". It shows a step in which the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made with the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 96A shows the stage of "E4: right IH input button pressing guidance display". This is the stage where the first specific screen 30SP displays that the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation unit 40R must be operated in order to start cooperative cooking. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking.

FIG. 96B shows the stage of "E5: IH preheat display". At this stage, the first specific screen 30SP indicates that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating operation. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information about the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180° C. is reached, for example. On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress", "preheating completed", and "Notice that the set temperature is reached" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 97 to 103 show the relationship between various processes and operations for cooking the "hamburger" (coordinated cooking mode) explained in FIG. It shows the correspondence between the contents of E17 and the input operation section.

FIG. 97A shows the stage of "E11: IH preheat display" described in item E (central display portion) of FIG. On the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed that the right heating unit 17HR has started preheating, so that the set temperature will be reached (additional information 331).

FIG. 97B shows the stage of "E12: IH heating display" described in FIG. 67 as well. At this stage, since the preheating is completed, the additional information 331 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR is ready for heating. In other words, it indicates that it is the stage of proceeding to the step of induction heating (IH heating).

The stage of FIG. 98 shows the contents of the display performed after a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the display of FIG. 97 is displayed. This display of FIG. 98 is not described in item E of FIG.

The stage of FIG. 98 indicates that the user needs to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation section 40L in order to finish the cooking process 1 by the induction heating source 9 currently being executed.

Next, FIG. 99 shows the stage of "E13: grill door opening/closing operation guidance display" described in FIG. At this stage, the induction heating (cooking step 1) has been completed, so the additional information 331 prompts to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (to perform the cooking step 2).

Next, FIGS. 100(A) to 100(C) are the stage of "E14: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display" explained in FIG. At this stage, it is displayed that the heat power in the range grill cooking (compound cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and furthermore, it is displayed that the grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS). are doing.

In FIG. 100(C), the input key 43MS is in a flashing state as indicated by a dashed circle, indicating that it is waiting for user's operation. Note that the displays of FIGS. 100A and 100B are alternately performed, for example, every five seconds.

Next, FIGS. 101(A) to 101(C) are the stages of "E15: grill heating display" explained in FIG. Here, the object to be cooked is heated in the heating chamber 113 by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 2).

FIG. 101(A) shows that the heating power can be adjusted, and FIG. 101(B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to perform combined heating. FIG. 101(C) shows that this RG cooking process (cooking process 2) will end in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

Next, FIGS. 102A and 102B are the stage of "E16: alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" described in FIG. Here, since the RG heating process has ended, it is displayed that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3) and the grill can be heated again.

It is displayed that if the user does not desire the extended heating, the cooperative cooking mode can be ended without extended heating by pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT) once. Note that the first specific screens 30SP having the contents of FIGS. 102A and 102B are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The next FIG. 103 is the stage of "E17: display of time setting". Here, if the input key 43M3 is used to extend the cooking time and the input key 43MS is pressed, the food can be cooked again inside the heating chamber 113 for the extended time.

FIG. 103 shows the result of setting the extension time (the extension time is 2 minutes and 30 seconds). After this time setting display, "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, FIGS. 104 to 108 will be described.
FIGS. 104 to 108 show the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooking of “fried chicken” (cooperative cooking mode) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 explained in FIG. 68. In FIG. The contents of the displays E21 to E26 described above and the state of the input operation section are shown.

FIG. 104A shows the stage of "E21: IH preheat display". Here, it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is performing the preheating operation. In other words, induction heating has already started for the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL.
FIG. 104B shows the stage of "E22: grill door open/close operation guidance display". Here, the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is urged to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 68).

Next, FIGS. 105(A) to 105(C) are the stage of "E23: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". Here, when cooking fried chicken by driving the "microwave grill driving section", it is displayed that the heating power can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

The displays of FIGS. 105A and 105B are alternately performed, for example, every 5 seconds.
Further, when the door 114 remains open, the display of FIG. 105(C) is performed. Even if the input key 43MS is pressed with the door 114 open, the heating operation will not start. If the door 114 is left open, even if the command signal from the input key 43MS reaches the integrated controller MC, the heating start command will not be issued from the integrated controller MC unless the door 114 is closed.

Next, FIGS. 106A and 106B are the stage of "E24: Microwave heating display".
FIG. 106(A) displays that the heating power for cooking can be changed when the "range grill drive unit" is driven. The period during which the heating power can be adjusted is limited to a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) after the cooking step 1 (heating in the microwave) is started.

FIG. 106B shows the content displayed after cooking has started, and is an example of displaying the remaining time until cooking is finished. This stage is the stage where the cooking process 1 is started.

Next, FIGS. 107(A) and 107(B) are the stage of "E25: alternate display of extension operation guidance display and IH preheating completion display". Here, after the cooking process B24 (see FIG. 68), which is performed by driving the "range grill drive unit", is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the heat cooking time. ,it's shown.
The display screen of FIG. 107(A) and the display screen of FIG. 107(B) are alternately displayed as the first specific screen 30SP at, for example, intervals of several seconds.

FIG. 108 shows the stage of "E26: display of time setting". Here, it is displayed that the cooking step B24 is further extended to, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. It should be noted that if the "range grill (RG)" heating is completed at the stage of FIG. 108, then the cooking process 2 can proceed to the left heating section 17HL, which has already been preheated.

(Operation management system for home appliances)
Next, FIGS. 109 to 118 will be described. 109 to 118 relate to an operation management system for home electric appliances using the heating cooker 1, which is the subject of the present disclosure.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the heat cooker 1 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 109 shows the control operation on the heating cooker 1 side. FIG. 110 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing exchange of information among the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the heating cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 111 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing exchange of information among the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the heating cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG.
FIG. 112 is a plan view showing display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display section 30 immediately after startup in the cooking device 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display section immediately after startup in the heating cooker 1. FIG.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display section 30 immediately after startup in the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display section 30 immediately after activation. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in FIG. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing exchange of information with the refrigerator 401 when the cooperative cooking mode is performed in the heat cooker 1 .

FIG. 109 will be described.
The operation steps shown in FIG. 109 are stipulated in the control program for executing the cooperative cooking mode of the integrated control device MC.
An inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent before this first step SD1. That is, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the stage of step ST2 in FIG.

The operation steps shown in FIG. 109 are after the user's operation (A23) shown in FIG. In step SD1, when the cooking process 1 is started by selecting, for example, "fried chicken" as the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, the heating of the ingredients is started by microwaves.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in FIG. At this stage, as shown in notification F24 in FIG. 68, "Range, finish standardization will begin" is announced by voice.

Next, measurement of elapsed time TN3 from the time of step SD1 is started (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG. Although step SB2 in FIG. 70 measures the temperature rise, step SD2 in FIG. 109 measures the elapsed time TN1.

In the next step SD3, the content of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 that has been started is collated. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, and the integrated control device MC can check that the cooking of "fried chicken" is being executed.
It is also understood at this point that the cooking process 1 uses the heating chamber 113 for cooking the fried chicken. In other words, it can be seen that the heating chamber 113 is not used after the cooking process 1 is finished.

It should be noted that step SD3 may be omitted and a dedicated program may be prepared for each linked cooking mode (for example, fried chicken, hamburger steak, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not it is in a specific cooperative cooking mode. This "specific cooperative cooking mode" is, for example, as follows.
(1) Deep-fried chicken, hamburgers, gyoza dumplings, and other foods that can generally be classified as side dishes.
(2) Items to be cooked in individual cooperative cooking modes (eg, hamburger) and items that are usually eaten together (eg, soup, French fries).

If "No" at step SD4, the operation of FIG. 109 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether the cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113 or not. If "No" at step SD5, the operation of FIG. 109 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SD6. At step SD6, an inquiry signal RQ3 (see FIG. 110) is issued to home gateway 411 in order to inquire about the inventory information of the foodstuffs stored in refrigerator 401. FIG.

At the time when the main power switch 97 of the heating cooker 1 is turned on, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the heating cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG.
In the first embodiment, the conditions are further narrowed down, and the stock inquiry signal RQ3 is sent at the stage when it is found that the stock information is highly likely to be required (step SD6 in FIG. 109).

In the next step SD7, stock information of ingredients is acquired from the home gateway 411. FIG. Then, the integrated control device MC temporarily stores it in the storage device MM.

In the next step SD8, the received food inventory information is analyzed.
In this step SD8, the presence or absence of ingredients highly relevant to the cooking (in this case, fried chicken) being executed in the cooperative cooking mode is searched. The “relevance” here refers to a food ingredient (for example, frozen vegetables) that is often eaten together with a side dish such as fried chicken, or rice as a staple food. Therefore, in this step SD8, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted, and the following description will be made.

If the determination at step SD7 is "No", the process of FIG. 109 is terminated and the user is not informed of anything.

At the next step SD9, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed. Then, in the next step SD10, it is notified that the cooking process 1 will soon end. Note that this notification is not shown in FIG. Also, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after completion of the cooking process 1, another cooking menu that makes effective use of the heating chamber 113 that is no longer used for cooking fried chicken is announced.
As described above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether or not the user has performed an operation to stop the cooking process 1. In this step SD12, if the user performs a stop operation, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, the end of the cooking process 1 is notified (F25: see FIG. 65).
Then, when the user takes out the object to be cooked (food for fried chicken) from the heating chamber 113 and places it in the object to be heated (such as a frying pan) N that has already been preheated to a high temperature, the cooking process 2 is performed. begin. At this stage, the edible oil put into the object to be heated N has already reached an appropriate temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, the user can know the recommended cooking menu at step SD8 before the cooking process 1 ends.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from the refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use the heating chamber 113 to perform another cooking before the cooking process 2. can.

As described above, for the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 of "fried chicken", the rice that is the staple food can be thawed and warmed cooking (rice) can be prepared at the same time, so cooperative cooking can be started. It is possible to shorten the substantial total time from the beginning to the end. As a result, user convenience can be improved.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has finished the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is used within a short time after the cooking process 1 is finished, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 may be high.
As described above, in the "heating" (range automatic) control menu using microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the target temperature is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when high heat remains in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits the automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, if the heating chamber 113 that has finished the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is to be used after that, the control menu (single heating cooking) of "range manual" should be selected. In other words, the user can set the microwave heating time.

As described in FIG. 62, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used, but the cooking process 1 is finished. The processing (by the integrated control unit MC) of continuing the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 is not performed until after the stage. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Furthermore, even if the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking is finished in the heating chamber 113, if a control method is adopted in which the exclusive state of the heating chamber 113 is continued until after that (after the cooking process 2), Only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8, the control program may exceptionally cancel the occupied state of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

Next, FIGS. 110 and 111 will be described.
FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 are diagrams explaining in chronological order the exchange of information with the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power supply of the heating cooker 1 is turned on.
With reference to FIG. 110, the following description assumes that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time they are installed in the kitchen KT.
Home gateway 411 issues a command signal to alarm device 445 to monitor in the "home mode" (step SE1 in FIG. 110). "Home mode" refers to a driving pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. When all the residents are out, it switches to "answering mode".

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the heating cooker 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 110). Heat cooking is started according to the user's input operation.

In the heat cooker 1, as described with reference to FIG. 109, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the start of the cooking process 1 (step SD1). . This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives detection information from the human detection unit 413H that detects the presence and movement of people in the kitchen KT, so it determines that it is a cooking scene, and mutually cooperates with the heating cooker 1. Switch to operation (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401 .
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from the communication section 446 of the home gateway 411 to the wireless communication section (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. FIG. Transmission and reception of other signals are also performed by wireless communication between communication unit 446 and a communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401 .

Refrigerator 401 retrieves the inventory of food stored in refrigerating compartment 401B and a plurality of freezing compartments 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own storage unit (step: SE4). The food stored in the refrigerator has various forms, such as partially processed food at home and bagged food purchased outside. Many proposals have already been made for methods of identifying and retrieving such inventory information, and the use of images taken with cameras, the use of RF tags, two-dimensional codes, and the like are known.

In addition, a method of manually inputting data such as the name of food and its attributes when putting food into the refrigerator 401, or a method of optically or magnetically automatically reading information such as food and accumulating inventory information, etc. Various methods have been proposed.
In Embodiment 1, any method may be used because there is no restriction on the identification of the food when the food is placed in the refrigerator 401 or after the food is stored.

Refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as reply signal RS1.
Home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data sent by reply signal RS1 in storage device 450 (SE5). Here, "temporarily" means a period from when the data of the inventory information is sent again from the refrigerator 401 until it is received, and does not mean that the storage is continued over a long period of time. The latest stock data in the storage device 450 is always overwritten and saved.

In the heat cooker 1, as explained in FIG. 109, when the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, an inventory inquiry signal is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 109). RQ3 is sent (SE6).

In the home gateway 411, the latest inventory data stored in the storage device 450 is transmitted from the communication section 446 to the wireless communication section 49 of the heating cooker 1 as an inventory data signal RS2.

In the cooking device 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the storage device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of FIG. 109, the integrated control device MC selects another cooking menu (ingredients and dishes) directly related to one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode being executed from the stock data. name, etc.) is notified (SE8).
In the example of FIG. 109, only "fried chicken" was described as the cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, but as shown in FIG. But it's okay.

Next, FIG. 111 will be described.
FIG. 111 is a diagram explaining the operations after step SE8 in FIG.
When all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (SE9), the heat cooker 1 sends main data indicating the content of the cooperative cooking (hereinafter referred to as "cooking execution data") to the home gateway 411. is transmitted as signal BS1.

Here, "cooking implementation data" refers to at least one of the following information.
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the name of the food to be cooked (including abbreviations) such as "fried chicken" and "stir-fried vegetables".
(2) Information about the weight or volume of the food to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (for example, microwave output 500 W, thermal power 1500 W during induction heating, or "medium heat") (4) Information indicating the time required from the cooking process 1 to the end of the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (or the final cooking process) (6) All the time from the start of the preheating process Information indicating the time required until the end of the cooking process 2 (7) Information identifying the heating source (for example, the left heating unit 17HL) that performed the heat cooking operation (8) Information regarding restrictions imposed on the user during the next heat cooking ( Example: The heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature, so range (automatic) heating cannot be performed.)
(9) Information related to user safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113

The "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food to be cooked" is information such as "fried chicken: 300 g", for example. This can be estimated by the integrated controller MC from the temperature rise rate of the food (deep-fried chicken) in the cooking process 1 .

The “cooking implementation data” can be useful information for home gateway 411 and refrigerator 401 .
Also, the “cooking implementation data” can be useful information for the alarm device 445 as well.

For example, among the "cooking execution data", "(4) information indicating the time required to finish the cooking process 2", "(5) information indicating the end time", and "(6) completion of all the cooking process 2 "Information indicating the time required to reach" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411 . By accumulating these data, it is possible to estimate the time zone during which cooking is concentrated in the kitchen KT.

Furthermore, among the "cooking execution data", "(9) information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440 as well. This is because the "deviation" between the current temperature on the heating cooker 1 side and the estimated temperature optically measured by the temperature monitoring device 440 side can be known.

The “cooking implementation data” can be useful information for the refrigerator 401 . For example, since the "cooking implementation data" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate the time zone during which cooking is concentrated, the timing at which food will be stored in the refrigerator 401 after that can be assumed.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information representing the state of the external environment from an external electrical device (for example, an air conditioner or a cooking appliance) and controls the operating state of each part such as a cooling device is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019. -211153, etc. However, in the conventional proposals, the environment information provided from the heating cooker 1 side is often ambiguous, and is not necessarily useful from the refrigerator side. On the other hand, the "cooking implementation data" of the first embodiment is suitable for specific control menus and has a high utility value.

The home gateway 411 converts the "cooking data" sent by the sending signal BS1 to the refrigerator 401 as a signal BS2 including the "cooking data". The contents of the "cooking implementation data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS1 and the "cooking implementation data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS2 may be basically the same, but may be different. The "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 includes information useful for the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445. It may be transmitted to the refrigerator 401 after being deleted.

Refrigerator 401 analyzes the contents of the "cooking execution data", and collects and analyzes data useful for the operation of refrigerator 401 (SE10).
Next, in refrigerator 401, the operating conditions of refrigerator 401 are changed based on the analysis result of the "cooking implementation data" (SE12).

Central control unit 447 of home gateway 411 stores the “cooking implementation data” in storage device 450 . Also, the “cooking history data” of the schedule management unit 451 is updated. As a result, the execution date and time, time zone, cooking menu (for example, cooking name “fried chicken”), and other related information (for example, estimated fried chicken “300 g”) of this one heat cooking (cooperative cooking) are recorded.

Further, the schedule management unit 451 recommends specific ingredients such as "frozen rice" and cooking menus from the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 in the recorded "cooking history data". (See step SD8 in FIG. 109), the recommended facts may be included. When the actual state of daily cooking is accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 using artificial intelligence or the like improves the ability of "learning and prediction", so the value of providing information to the user gradually increases. improves.

After finishing all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heating cooker 1 transmits an operation end notice signal BS3 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
After that, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end notice signal BS3, it terminates the "mutual cooperation operation mode". Further, the alarm device 445 is switched to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). Thereby, regardless of whether or not the user is in the kitchen KT, the temperature change inside the kitchen KT is monitored.

(Inventory information display example 1)
112 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the periphery of the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
This FIG. 112 shows the scene of step SD11 in FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 112 is the stage in which "fried chicken", which is one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode, is being executed.
While the cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113, the integrated display section 30 displays that there is "frozen rice" as inventory information. Note that the voice synthesizing device 95 also informs by voice in the same manner.

If the input key 43MT is pressed once in the state of FIG. 112, the microwave heating cooking of the cooking process 1 is stopped. The setting of the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is taken out from the heating chamber 113, and the food to be cooked is placed on the food N to be heated placed on the left heating unit 17HL, from that point onwards (cooking step 2) ) induction cooking can be started. As shown in the integrated display section 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L is pressed at the initial preheating start stage as described in FIG. 68 (see operation A21 in FIG. 68). Therefore, there is no need to newly operate the left operation unit 40L.

As described with reference to FIG. 89, in order for the integrated control device MC to clearly grasp the timing of transition from the preheating process to the cooking process 1 on the data, when the cooking process 1 shifts to the cooking process 1, the input key 43MS is displayed to the user. You may be asked to press once.

(Inventory information display example 2)
113 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display section 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
This FIG. 113 is an example in which the display contents of the integrated display section 30 of FIG. 112 are changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 113(A), the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 displays time saving information 333 indicating that the cooking time can be reduced, and cooking recommendation information 338 of "heating".

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display "You can heat/defrost in the heating chamber." In other words, it indicates that the heating chamber 113 can be used for “warming” and “thawing”.

In FIG. 113A, symbols 335U and 335D are symbols indicating that there is other information, and if one of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to these symbols is pressed, the following information is displayed. Information is displayed.

In FIG. 113(A), symbols 336 and 336D are symbols indicating that there is other information, and if one of the input keys 43M3 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to these symbols is pressed, the following information is displayed. Information is displayed.

In FIG. 113A, if the user operates either the input key 43M2 or 43M3, the next information is displayed, thereby reducing the user's hesitation in the operation.

Another example shown in FIG. 113B displays refrigerator information 334 in characters in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 .
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display two types of individual ingredient information 339, "frozen rice" and "oden". ing. In other words, the user is informed that the refrigerator 401 has “frozen rice” and “oden” as ingredients.

The individual ingredient information is information specifying one food item. The “ingredient information” of the refrigerator 401 means an aggregate of the individual ingredient information 339 .

The display of FIGS. 113A and 113B may be performed alternately every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In any case, the user can understand that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 during the cooking process 1 by using the food information stored in the refrigerator 401 .

Next FIG. 114 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
This FIG. 114 is an example in which the display contents of FIG. 52 are improved.

In FIG. 114, the display screen 1, the display screen 2A and the display screen 2B are the same as those explained in FIG. 52, so the explanation is omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. This display screen 2C prompts the user to perform an input operation by a recommendation sentence 30R1 to select a heating source.

Next, FIG. 115 is an enlarged plan view showing transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
This FIG. 115 is still another example in which the display contents of FIG. 52 are improved.
In FIG. 115, the display screen 2D is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

The display screen 2C of FIG. 115 informs the user that the heat cooker 1 is automatically checking the food information in the refrigerator 401 . In other words, it notifies that the stock information acquisition operation is being executed.

It has been explained that the stock inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted in step ST2 shown in FIG. The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D of FIG.

Next, FIG. 116 is an enlarged plan view showing transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
After the display screen 2D shown in FIG. 115, the display screen 2E notifies the user that the ingredient information has been acquired. Furthermore, immediately after that, the display screen 2E notifies that there are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "dumplings" as specific ingredients. Note that the heating source can be freely selected before the display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in FIG. 38) immediately after the display screen 2C appears, the display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed.

(Example of home gateway operation)
FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the operation of the home gateway.
The home gateway determines whether or not the schedule management unit 451 enters the "cooking time zone" while the alarm device 445 is operating in the "home mode" as described with reference to FIG.

The 'cooking time period' may be manually input by the resident through the input unit 449 (see FIG. 4). For example, on weekdays, 6:30 am to 7:30 am may be set as the cooking time zone.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operation time zone of the heating cooker 1 in the past, for example, 30 days, and the average time zone is "from 6:20 am to 7:30 am". I have determined that there is.

In the above situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the cooking time zone.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, it means that it is in the average time zone (6:20 to 7:30 am) as described above, so "Yes" is answered. Then, the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human sensors 452 and 453 of the human detector 413H have detected a person.
For example, when a resident moves in the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1 or stops in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1, such human movement is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to next step SF3.
In step SF3, whether or not the door (not shown) of refrigerator 401 has been opened is determined based on the operation information from refrigerator 401 side. When it is sensed that the door has been opened and then closed (SF4), the latest status of food stored in refrigerator 401 is checked in the next step SF5.

Confirmation of inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described in FIG.

Refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as reply signal RS1, as described with reference to FIG.
Therefore, the main control section 447 of the home gateway 411 compares the collected latest inventory information data with the inventory information data sent from the refrigerator 401 last time. exit.

In step SF6, if there is a change from the previous inventory information data, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with new data (SF7).

Then, preparation is made for the arrival of the stock inquiry signal RQ1 from the heating cooker 1.例文帳に追加
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 before the main power switch 97 of the heat cooker 1 is turned on, and promptly receives an inquiry from the heat cooker 1. It operates in such a way that it can provide inventory information.

It seems that it takes a certain amount of time to investigate the inventory of food stored in the refrigerator 401 in detail, and when the door of the refrigerator 401 is left open, the light from the outside lighting becomes disturbance light. There is also a concern that it will become an obstacle to optical detection, image analysis, and the like. Under such circumstances, inventory information is quickly acquired immediately after the door of the refrigerator 401 is closed.

With the configuration as described above, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the reply signal RS1 for inventory data collection described with reference to FIG. In other words, the system is such that the heating cooker 1 can acquire the latest inventory information.

(Display of individual ingredient information during heating pause period)
FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing another operation program for acquiring the individual ingredient information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 of the heat cooker 1. FIG.

The operation program of FIG. 109 is a method of automatically acquiring stock information and notifying a recommended cooking menu in the middle of the cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113 .
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 118, during the "heating pause period" between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode, it is notified that another cooking can be performed, and according to the user's instruction, It is designed to let you know.
Therefore, the operation by the operation program of FIG. 109 and the notification method by the operation program shown in FIG. 118 do not contradict each other. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (used together).

The heating cooker 1 described up to FIG. 109 is
(1) Operating the induction heating source 9 (IH) single cooking mode KM1
(2) Single cooking mode KM1 for operating the microwave heating source 189 (microwave)
(3) Operating the oven heat source 188 (oven) single cooking mode KM1
(4) both or one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source through a transition period TR in which the start and end timings are determined depending on the user's input operation, Linked cooking mode KM3 that operates sequentially
is executed according to the user's input operation.

Furthermore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR,
During the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC controls at least one of a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 after the cooking process 1 is completed, and individual ingredient information of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu. The configuration is characterized in that one is notified by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 118, after the cooking process 1 is finished, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 even during the transition period TR (“heating pause period P3” in FIGS. 62 to 64). (simultaneously with the cooking step 2) can be notified, and the notification can be made according to the user's instruction.

In FIG. 118, step SG1 is the step of selecting the cooperative cooking mode and selecting the cooking menu desired by the user (for example, "fried chicken") from the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, it is determined whether or not the cooking process 1 of the selected cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed in the heating chamber 113, as in step SD5 of FIG.
If this step SG2 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, the home gateway 411 is inquired about inventory information. In this step SG3, among the inventory information, especially the information on frozen food and reheated food is acquired. Although FIG. 118 omits the step of stock information reception and temporary storage such as step SD7 in FIG. 109, the same processing is performed in the operation program of FIG.

In the next step SG4, it is determined whether or not the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber 113 has ended.

If the cooking process 1 has ended at the stage of step SG4, the transition period TR (“heating suspension period P3” in FIGS. 62 to 64) starts from that point. In other words, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking is suspended, and it is at the stage of waiting for the start command of the cooking process 2 from the user.

In such a transition period TR, in step SG5, it is determined whether or not another heat cooking can be performed. This is a process corresponding to step SD8 in FIG.

If step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, and the integrated display unit 30 and voice synthesizer 95 notify that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113. FIG. If the determination result of step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

At the subsequent step SG6, if a specific input key of the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) is operated, it is determined "Yes".

In step SG7, one or a plurality of other cooking menus (for example, "heating gyoza") that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 are displayed. The place to be displayed may be the integrated display section 30 displaying the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8 to wait for a start command of the cooking process 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
FIG. 119 is an enlarged plan view showing the peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 120 is also an enlarged plan view showing peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. As shown in FIG. FIG. 121 is also an enlarged plan view showing peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 119 shows a display example of the integrated display section 30 in the scene of step SG6 in FIG. As is clear from FIG. 119, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see FIG. 21) of the integrated display section 30 are combined into one to form a horizontally elongated display area.

In FIG. 119, 338 is recommended information indicating in characters that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and 337 is the operation of the input key 43M2 for displaying the suggested contents of the cooking menu of the recommended information. It is a display guidance part explaining.

In the state shown in FIG. 119, the individual light-emitting portion 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 blinks as indicated by the dotted circle to prompt the user to perform an input operation. If one of the (two) input keys 43M2 is pressed in this state, the individual ingredient information 339 such as specific recommended cooking (for example, "frozen rice") can be displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. can.

In FIG. 119, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the display screen is switched to that shown in FIG. The recommended information 338 shown in FIG. 119 changes to the content shown in FIG.
In FIG. 120, 339 is individual ingredient information that indicates in characters another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 119 . In the example shown in FIG. 120, the weights and freezing temperatures of refrigerated "gyoza" and frozen "rice" are displayed. In other words, the individual ingredient information also includes information on the name, weight, and refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.) of one ingredient. Note that related information such as expiration date information and storage start time (date) in the refrigerator 401 may be included.

Next, FIG. 121 shows display contents that are automatically switched after a few seconds have passed while the display contents shown in FIG. 119 remain unchanged. In other words, when several seconds elapse without pressing the input key 43M2 after the state shown in FIG. 119, the display screen is switched to that shown in FIG. After several seconds have passed in the state of FIG. 121, the display of FIG. 119 is automatically displayed.

119 to 121, during the cooking process 1, after the cooking process 1 ends, the integrated control device MC controls the cooking menu executable in the heating chamber 113 and the cooking menu related to the cooking menu. At least one of the stock information of the refrigerator is notified by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, after the cooking process 1 is completed, during the transition period TR (“heating pause period P3” in FIGS. 62 to 64), another heating chamber 113 can be executed (simultaneously with the cooking step 2), and can be notified of the information of ingredients used for "another cooking" according to the user's command.

For this reason, for example, one cooking A (eg, fried chicken) in the cooperative cooking mode enters the stage of cooking process 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, and in the heating chamber 113, the cooking A separate cooking B (from thawing to warming of frozen rice) can be performed simultaneously. In other words, when eating cooking A and cooking B in one meal, the cooking can be done in parallel instead of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A. As a result, the overall cooking time can be shortened, improving the user's convenience.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated N placed above the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit AN (integrated control device 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that provides information about cooking;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a common operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the heating unit,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is for executing a cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC
(1) receiving an input from the shared operation unit 40M and selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(2) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed according to commands from the individual operation units 40L and 40R;
(3) during the cooking step 1, disable some or all of the input functions for the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M;
(4) when the cooking process 1 is finished, reviving the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are executed according to commands from the shared operation unit 40M.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

For this reason, in the central operation unit 40M, after selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode, the start and end of the heating operation of the cooking process 1 are performed according to the first mode corresponding to the heating unit. of the input function for said second heating means HM2 in the central operating part 40M, which can be determined by the individual operating part 40R or the second individual operating part 40L, and during the duration of this cooking step 1 (from start to finish). Since some or all of them are disabled, even if the user erroneously operates the central operation unit 40M, the heating operation of the cooking process 1 will not stop unintentionally. In other words, user's erroneous operation can be prevented, and cooking failure can be prevented.

Further, when the cooking process 1 is finished thereafter, the input function for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M is restored, and the cooking process 2 using the heating chamber 113 is controlled by the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, by improving the operability for the user, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can be widely used for various types of cooking.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The second heating means HM2 comprises a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) using different heating principles,
The integrated control device MC combines a single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R with a plurality of the heat sources of the second heating means, and a combined cooking mode KM2 that automatically advances cooking;
The integrated control device MC selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 according to an input from the shared operation unit 40M.
disclosed the configuration.

For this reason, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide variety of heat cooking for various types of food.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the shared operation unit 40M and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units,
The integrated control device MC displays the cooking process information 332 including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display unit 30 before the cooking process 1 starts, and until the cooking process 2 ends. continue to make such representations;
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, the user can easily know the information of the cooking process from the integrated display section 30, so that it is possible to provide a heating cooker with high operability even though it is a composite heating cooker.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
further comprising a door 114 for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber 113,
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting opening and closing of the door,
When the integrated control device MC detects that the cooking process 1 is completed and the door 114 is closed after the completion of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC controls the operation of the second heating means in the shared operation unit 40M. restore the input function,
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, the heating operation is not started while the heating chamber 113 is open, and a highly safe heating cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen (see FIG. 52) on the integrated display unit 30 of the notification unit AN before the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed instead of the standby initial screen,
The first specific screen 30SP displays a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") to which the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be applied.
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user can easily recognize the desired cooking menu, and the cooker with high operability can be provided.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
When the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 instead of the standby initial screen by the integrated control device MC,
The second specific screen 30SC displays a control menu to which the combined cooking mode KM2 can be applied (for example, "range grill menu").
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, the user can easily recognize the desired control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2, and the cooker can be provided with high operability.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen on the integrated display unit 30 before the single cooking mode KM1 is selected, and displays the standby initial screen when the single cooking mode KM1 is selected. Instead, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed,
The third specific screen 30ST displays a control menu (for example, "water boiler") to which the single cooking mode KM1 can be applied.
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, in the single cooking mode KM1, the user can easily recognize the desired control menu (for example, "water boiler"), and the cooker with high operability can be provided.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
It has a first heating unit 17HR (on the right side) and a second heating unit 17HL (on the left side) separated in the horizontal direction,
The individual operation units 40L and 40R have a first individual operation unit 40R corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit 40L corresponding to the second heating unit 17HL.
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the two heating units 17HR and 17HL can be used, so that the range of selection of the cooking place by the user is expanded, and a highly convenient heating cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The shared operation unit 40MC includes an input key 43M1 for selecting a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, and an input key 43M2 for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected with the input key 43M1,
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking process 1, the input functions of the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 are disabled.
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, during the cooking process 1 (from the start to the end), the input key 43M1 for selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43M2 for setting the control conditions are mistakenly pressed in the central operation unit 40M. Even if it is operated, the situation that the heating operation of the cooking process 1 stops unintentionally does not occur. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can prevent user's erroneous operation and cooking failure.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the shared operation unit 40M and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
The first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30,
The first specific screen 30SP includes identification information 330 of the cooking menu, information (331) indicating the heat source used in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, and information (332) indicating the progress of cooking. , information on the control conditions applied to the cooking menu (see FIG. 88, 30V), displaying at least one of the information;
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that allows the user to know various information about the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, eliminates the user's anxiety, and prevents the user from misunderstanding and erroneous operation. can.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The shared operation unit 40M further includes an input key 43MC for selecting the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
When the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input key 43MC, the common operation unit 40M is limited in the input function for new cooking using the second heating means.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 62).

Therefore, even if the input key 43M1 and the control condition setting input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M are erroneously operated, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will not be unintentionally stopped. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can prevent user's erroneous operation and cooking failure.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
At the stage where the starting unit 43MS determines to start the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the common operation unit 40M is limited in the input function for new cooking using the second heating means. ,
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 63).

Therefore, even if the input key 43M1 and the control condition setting input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M are erroneously operated, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will not be unintentionally stopped. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can prevent user's erroneous operation and cooking failure.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The shared operation unit 40M includes a selection unit 43M1 for displaying a second specific screen 30SC for selecting a control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2, a start unit 43MS for shifting to the operation for the combined cooking mode KM3, and and a termination unit 43MT that cancels the operation of the combined cooking mode KM2,
The start part 43MS and the end part 43MT are shared for starting and canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 21).

Therefore, there is an advantage that necessary input keys can be installed in necessary sizes in the central operation unit 40M where the installation space is restricted. can.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
When the end unit 43MT is operated once in the cooking process 2, the cooking process 2 is completed, and when it is operated once again, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 is canceled.
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, depending on the number of times the input key 43MT of the termination portion is operated, the cooking process 2 can be terminated or the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 can be cancelled.
As a result, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability by using one input key (end portion) 43MT.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B,
The upper space 300A is provided with upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air without passing through the lower space 300B and pass the cooling air,
In the lower space 300B, lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are arranged to introduce outside air without passing through the upper space 300A and pass the cooling air,
The integrated control device MC is cooled by the upper cooling fans 60, 61.
disclosed the configuration.

Because of this configuration, the operation and cooling of the induction heating source 9 in the upper space 300A and the cooling of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the heating chamber 113, etc. in the lower space 300B do not influence (interfere) each other. Can run independently without receiving.
Furthermore, since the integrated control device MC is also cooled by the cooling air flowing inside the upper space 300A, overheating of the internal components of the heating cooker 1 is prevented, and stable operation can be expected.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The central operation unit 40M has a start input key (start unit) 43MS for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and an end input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. ,
The start of the heating operation in the cooking step 2 is executed by the start input key 43MS,
The end of the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is executed by the end input key 43MT.
disclosed the configuration.

Therefore, since the heating operation of the cooking process 2 can be started and ended centrally in the central operation unit 40M, the user can start and end the cooking process 2 by operating the central operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the second disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit AN that provides information about cooking;
a controller MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification part AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the control unit MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a common operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The control unit MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The linked cooking mode is for executing a cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking process 2 by the first heating means HM1,
The control unit MC
(1) receiving an input from the shared operation unit 40M and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed according to commands from the common operation unit 40M;
(3) during the cooking process 1, some or all of the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R are disabled;
(4) when the cooking process 1 is finished, reviving the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation units 40L and 40R;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are executed according to commands from the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

Therefore, in the central operation unit 40M, after selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and shifting to the cooperative cooking mode operation, the start and end of the heating operation of the cooking process 1 can be determined by the common operation 40M. Moreover, during the period (from the start to the end) of this cooking process 1, some or all of the input functions for the first heating means HM2 (induction heating source) in the individual operation units 40L, 40R are disabled. Therefore, even if the user erroneously operates the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the heating operation of the cooking process 1 will not stop unintentionally. In other words, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can prevent user's erroneous operation and cooking failure.

In this first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 relating to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated N placed above the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that provides information about cooking;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a common operation unit 40M and individual operation units 40L and 40R for the heating units 17HL and 17HR,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes at least two of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2,
A first cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 is used in the cooking step 1 and the second heating means HM2 is used in the cooking step 2, and the second heating means HM2 are used in the cooking step. 1 and a second cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 is used in the cooking step 2;
The linked cooking mode KM3 includes a linked preheating cooking mode in which a preheating step by either the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2 is performed in addition to the cooking steps 1 and 2. including KM4,
The integrated control device MC
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, display the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units;
(2) displaying a plurality of cooking menu candidates (for example, "hamburger steak" and "fried chicken") on the first specific screen 30SP;
(3) automatically determining one of the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode when one of the cooking menu candidates is selected;
(4) requesting input of control conditions to be applied to the selected cooking menu from the shared operation unit 40M;
(5) during the preheating step, the cooking step 1, and the cooking step 2, restricting input functions in the individual operation unit and the common operation unit 40M;
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

For this reason, in one heating cooker 1, since the linked cooking mode KM3 with different heating locations and heating means can be selected, the cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected, after confirming the desired cooking menu candidate on the dedicated display screen (first specific screen 30SP), it is possible to shift to the cooperative cooking mode operation.

Furthermore, during the preheating process, the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R and the common operation unit 40M are restricted to prevent erroneous operations by the user and prevent cooking failure. It is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can prevent the

In this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 regarding the 4th disclosure was disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object to be heated placed on the upper surface of the main body 110;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber;
A notification unit (integrated display unit 30, speech synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that provides information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means and a common operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. death,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for a cooperative cooking mode KM3 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2, and is a "first cooperative cooking mode" of a type that uses the first heating means for the cooking process 1; a "second cooperative cooking mode" of the type that uses the second heating means for step 1;
In both the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode",
(1) making a decision to select the cooperative cooking mode and start the cooking process 1 in the shared operation unit 40M;
(2) When the cooking step 2 is executed by the first heating means HM1, the cooking step 2 is finished by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, and the cooking step 2 is finished by the second heating. When executed by the means HM2, it is performed by the shared operation unit 40M,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

For this reason, in one heating cooker 1, since the linked cooking mode KM3 with different heating locations and heating means can be selected, the cooking device is highly convenient and can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode, the common operation unit 40M selects the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and decides to start the cooking process. Since the termination is performed by the individual operation unit 40L, 40R or the common operation unit 40M corresponding to the heating means in charge, the operation rule is simple, and it can be expected to prevent user's operation error and confusion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability even though the heating source and the input operation unit 40 are two (two or more) or more.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The shared operation unit 40M is provided with a termination unit 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode from the stage of the cooking process 1 up to the cooking process 2. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, when it is desired to cancel the operation of the cooperative cooking mode for some reason, regardless of the stage of the cooking process, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode can be easily stopped by the end portion (input key) 43MT of the common operating portion 40M. Since the mode can be canceled, the user can easily cancel the cooperative cooking mode, which has the effect of good operability.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation at the stage of operating the common operation unit 40MC, and the display at the stage of operating the individual operation unit It was the structure provided with the individual display parts 31L and 31R which operate|move.

For this reason, the user can acquire reference information for operation at both the stage of operating the common operation section 40M and the stage of operating the individual operation sections 40L and 40R, and the operability can be improved.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the notification unit AN includes the integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation when the common operation unit 40M is operated, and the individual operation unit 30. Individual display units 31L and 31R that perform display operations at the stage of operating the unit,
The integrated display section 30 is configured to display information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 during the period from the start to the end of the cooperative cooking mode.

Therefore, the user can grasp the progress of the cooking process by looking at the display on the integrated display unit 30, and can improve the sense of security and convenience.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the end portion 43MT allows the user to optionally perform the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2. has an end function that can end at the point of
When the termination unit 43MT is operated once, the termination function is exhibited, and when the termination unit 43MT is operated twice in succession, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled. Ta.

Therefore, it is possible to stop cooking and cancel the cooperative cooking mode according to the number of operations of the end portion 43MT of the shared operation portion 40M, thereby enhancing the operability of the shared operation portion 40MC.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, at the stage of performing the operation for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and starting the cooking process in the shared operation unit 40M, the In this configuration, part or all of the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R are restricted.

Therefore, even if the individual operation units 40L and 40R are erroneously operated at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and shifting to the cooking process 1 in the shared operation unit 40M, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is input. It is expected that the user's sense of security will be improved, and operability will be improved.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, when the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode is started by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the The shared operation unit 40M has a configuration in which the input function for new cooking using the second heating means is restricted.

Therefore, even if the shared operation unit 40M is erroneously operated while cooking in one cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not affected, and the user It can be expected to improve the sense of security of the user, and the operability can be improved.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, at the stage where the operation for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and starting the cooking process is performed in the shared operation unit 40M, the The integrated display unit 30 is configured to display the first specific screen 30SP on which the identification information of the cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed.

Therefore, while referring to the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be advanced, and the user's operability can be improved.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the integrated control device MC controls the cooking steps of the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode. 1 is completed or before that time, the notification unit AN (the integrated display unit 30 or the voice synthesizer 95) indicates that the cooking process 1 is completed or prompts preparation for the next cooking process 2. In this configuration, information for user operation support" is notified, and a shift to a waiting period TR for waiting for an instruction from the user is started.

Therefore, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be efficiently advanced, and the user's operability can be improved.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and an oven heating source 188 for heating the .

Therefore, in the heating chamber 113, the food to be cooked can be heated by a combination of microwaves, radiant heat, etc., and two heat sources with different heating principles can effectively and efficiently heat various food to be cooked. can be expected to heat up. As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker 1 that can handle various types of food.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the interior of the main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B,
The upper space 300A has upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce outside air without passing through the lower space 300B in order to cool the inside of the upper space,
The lower space 300B has lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air without passing through the upper space 300A in order to cool the inside of the lower space 300B,
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are configured to operate while at least one of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is driven.

Therefore, the upper space 300A is cooled by the outside air by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 regardless of which one of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is driven. For this reason, important electric parts related to the overall function of the heating cooker 1, such as the microcomputer, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, etc., which are the core parts of the integrated control device MC accommodated in the upper space 300A. A similar cooling effect can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to expect the effect of being able to prevent quality deterioration and malfunction due to overheating.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment further includes an abnormality detection unit EM inside the main body 110, and the abnormality detection unit EM detects the temperature of the upper space 300A. When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC detects an abnormality. The operation of the cooking mode KM3 is canceled to stop the driving of all the heating means during the heating operation.

Therefore, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit EM, all the heating sources automatically stop operating, and the safety is high. Even in that case, since the upper space 300A is cooled by the outside air by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, etc. accommodated in the upper space 300A are It is possible to maintain the cooling effect of important electrical components related to the overall function of the cooking device 1 . Therefore, it is possible to expect the effect of being able to prevent quality deterioration and malfunction due to overheating.

Furthermore, regarding the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the abnormality detection unit EM further has a function of detecting an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 ("abnormality 4" detection function),
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 during execution of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC switches to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. , the driving of all the heating means during the heating operation is stopped, and the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is immediately stopped.

Therefore, when an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is detected, all the heating sources automatically stop operating, which enhances safety. Moreover, since the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are immediately stopped, if the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are out of order, the situation can be avoided from becoming serious.

Furthermore, with regard to the fourth disclosure, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the heating chamber 113 has a door 114 for freely opening and closing the front opening,
The shared operation unit 40M has an input key 43MS for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and deciding to start the cooking process 1,
The control unit MC has a function of detecting the opening and closing of the door 114 during the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. 2, if the opening of the door 114 is detected, the driving of the second heating means HM2 is stopped, and subsequently, if the closing of the door 114 is detected, the common operation unit 40M , the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is restarted only when an operation for restarting the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is performed.

Because of this configuration, when cooking is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2, the door 114 is opened halfway for checking the food to be cooked, etc., and then the door is closed. If 114 is closed, simply closing the door 114 will not resume cooking.
Therefore, when the door 114 is closed by mistake, it is possible to avoid a so-called "dry-frying" state in which the heating operation is started in a state where no food to be cooked is placed inside the heating chamber 113, and the safety is high. Configuration.

In this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 regarding 5th disclosure was disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 located inside the main body 110 and having an opening closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for respectively heating an object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least on the left and right sides of the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information on heat cooking,
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that start to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively;
lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
an anomaly detection unit EM;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
Cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 1;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) notifying that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled;
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues until the stop condition A is satisfied.
A heating cooker 1 was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can widely handle various types of cooking.
Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking process 1 is stopped. Since the cooling operation is continued only for a necessary period, overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented.

That is, since the upper space 300A accommodates the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, the integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional parts of the heating cooker 1, the temperature of these components can be adjusted. Since it can be maintained normally, it does not lead to malfunctions or deterioration in quality.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is configured to continue until the stop condition A is satisfied,
The stop condition A depends on the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51). Alternatively, the stop condition A is dependent on the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51).

For example, the first cooling fan 60 is configured to perform "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 ends or until the temperature of the top plate 15 drops below the reference temperature. (Refer to heat dissipation operation time Th1).

Therefore, even after the abnormality is detected in the middle of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the heating operation of the cooking process 1 is stopped, the sufficient cooling operation is continued, so that the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented from being overheated.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The integrated control device MC has a function of restricting the heating means to be used in the cooking process 2 from being used for other cooking during the cooking process 1, and the function is limited to the cooperative cooking mode. is canceled if the operation of the
The configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 61-63).

Therefore, since the heating means up to the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be secured in advance, it is possible to avoid a situation where the desired heating means cannot be used in the second stage of the cooking process, thereby avoiding user confusion and inconvenience. It is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key (decision unit) 43MS for determining the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, a first individual operation unit 40R for instructing the start and stop of the operation of the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2. and an operation unit 40M for instructing the stop of
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key (end unit) 43MT for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 60-65).

Therefore, since the heating operation of the cooking process 2 can be started and ended centrally in the central operation unit 40M, the user can start and end the cooking process 2 by operating the central operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker with good operability.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The central operation unit 40M is arranged in the left-right central part of the main body 110 so as to be operable from above,
The input key (decision unit) 43MS and the input key (termination unit) 43MT are arranged in the central operation unit 40M.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 20, 21, and 60-65).

Therefore, the central operation unit 40M can be operated from above the main body 110, and the operation start and end of the cooperative cooking mode can be centrally performed, so that a heat cooker with good operability can be provided.

In this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 regarding 6th disclosure was disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 located inside the main body 110 and having an opening closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for respectively heating an object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least on the left and right sides of the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information on heat cooking,
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that start to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively;
lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
an anomaly detection unit EM;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
Cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 2;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) Notifying that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled by the notifying unit EM;
(4) the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped;
(5) The operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 continues until the stop condition B is satisfied.
A heating cooker 1 was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can widely handle various types of cooking.
Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is stopped. Since the cooling operation is continued only for a necessary period, overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented.

That is, since the upper space 300A accommodates the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, the integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional parts of the heating cooker 1, the temperature of these components can be adjusted. Since it can be maintained normally, it does not lead to malfunctions or deterioration in quality.

As described above, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is configured to continue until the "stop condition A" is satisfied,
The "stopping condition A" depends on the temperature of the installation space of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51). Alternatively, the "stop condition A" is dependent on the elapsed time from the stop of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (see FIGS. 48 to 51).
Further, when the induction heating source 9 was not driven, it was operated at least until the driving of the other heating sources was stopped (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

On the other hand, the "stop condition B" is as follows.
As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the lower cooling fan 129 is operated for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, the "time Tm2 for heat dissipation operation" is fixed at 3 minutes.

As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the lower (third) cooling fan 128 is operated for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time Tm2 of heat dissipation operation" is fixed at 3 minutes.
On the other hand, in the case of oven heating cooking: Immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is kept constant. It is operated until the temperature drops below. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.

In this way, the cooling operation of the heating chamber 113, the microwave oscillation source 122, and the like in the lower space 300B continues even after the abnormality is detected. It does not cause deterioration, etc.

In this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 regarding 7th disclosure was disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 located inside the main body 110 and having an opening closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for respectively heating an object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least on the left and right sides of the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information on heat cooking,
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that start to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively;
lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
an anomaly detection unit EM;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
Cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking process 2 by the first heating means HM1,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 1;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) Notifying that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled by the notifying unit EM;
(4) the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued at least until the heating operation of the second heating means is stopped;
(5) the operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is continued until the stop condition B is satisfied;
A heating cooker 1 having a configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can widely handle various types of cooking.
Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is stopped. Since the cooling operation is continued only for a necessary period, overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented.

Further, since the operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is continued until the temperature of the lower space 300B including the heating chamber 113 and the like also drops, overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented.

Note that the upper space 300A accommodates the integrated control device MC, the power circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, the integrated display unit 30, etc., which are important functional parts of the heating cooker 1. Since it can be maintained normally, it does not lead to malfunctions or deterioration in quality.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The stop condition B of the lower cooling fans 128, 129 is determined by the temperature of the heating chamber 113 or the second heating means HM2.
disclosed the configuration.

As described in the first embodiment, the "stopping condition B" is as follows.
First, the operation of the lower (fourth) cooling fan 129 is, as described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, “heat dissipation operation” for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation ends. That is, the "time Tm2 for heat dissipation operation" is fixed at 3 minutes.

As described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the lower (third) cooling fan 128 is operated for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time Tm2 of heat dissipation operation" is fixed at 3 minutes.
On the other hand, in the case of oven heating cooking: Immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured every 10 seconds, and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is kept constant. It is operated until the temperature drops below. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.

As a result, when the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated, if an abnormality is detected and the second heating means HM2 is stopped urgently, the temperature of the lower space 300B including the heating chamber 113 and the like will rise. The operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is continued until they drop. Thereby, overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented.

In this first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 relating to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
a heating chamber 113 located inside the main body 110 and having an opening closed by a door so as to be freely opened and closed;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for respectively heating an object to be heated N placed above the heating portions 17HR and 17HL arranged at least on the left and right sides of the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) AN that notifies information on heat cooking,
upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that start to operate when the first heating means HM1 is driven and when the second heating means HM2 is driven, respectively;
lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that start operating when the second heating means HM2 is driven;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
an anomaly detection unit EM;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
Cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 and a cooking process 2 by the first heating means HM1,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC
(1) stopping the heating operation in the cooking step 2;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) Notifying that the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been canceled by the notifying unit EM;
(4) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues until the stop condition A is satisfied.
A heating cooker 1 having a configuration was disclosed (see FIGS. 45 to 47 and FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, by using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can widely handle various types of cooking.
Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs during the heating operation, the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is stopped, but the operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues the cooling operation for the necessary period until the stop condition A is satisfied. Therefore, overheating of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 can be prevented.

In this Embodiment 1, the following heating cooker 1 was disclosed.
i.e.
a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed;
an abnormality detection unit EM of the top plate 15;
a notification unit AN;
The top plate 15 is arranged on the upper part, and a main body 110 having the abnormality detection part EM and the notification part AN is provided inside,
The interior of the main body 110 is partitioned into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S,
In the IH coil installation space CK partitioned inside the upper space 300A, an induction heating source 9 for heating the object to be heated and an upper cooling fan for cooling the heat-generating electronic parts (heat sink 82) of the induction heating source 9 are provided. (first cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61),
In the lower space 300B, there are a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is closed by a door 114, a microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a heat source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113. The oven heating source 188 that heats the food to be cooked, the microwave heating source 189, and the exothermic electronic components of the oven heating source 188 (radiator 122H, inverter circuit board 121, etc.) are cooled with cooling air, and the cooling air is cooled. a lower cooling fan (third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan) 129 that discharges via the outside of the IH coil installation space CK,
integrated control located in the upper space 300A for controlling the operation of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower cooling fans 128, 129; having a device MC,
When at least one of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 is driven, the integrated controller MC drives the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 to cool outside air. introduced into the upper space 300A,
The integrated controller MC performs a preheating step of preheating the food on the top plate 15 using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 for one food. a function of a linked preheating cooking mode KM4 that executes the cooking step of heating the food using at least one of the oven heating sources 188 in the same time period;
The integrated control device MC drives the induction heating source 9 and at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 during cooking to detect an abnormality occurrence signal from the abnormality detection unit EM. When receiving the abnormality signal, the notification unit AN notifies the user, the induction heating source 9 is urgently stopped, and the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower cooling fans 128, 129 are operated in the same manner as before receiving the abnormality occurrence signal. continue to operate under
A heating cooker 1 having a configuration has been disclosed.

Because of this configuration, even if the induction heating source 9 is emergencyly stopped when an abnormality occurs, the integrated control device MC, the power supply circuit board 55, the filter circuit board 54, and the integrated display section 30, which are important functional parts of the heating cooker 1, can be controlled. , etc. can be maintained at a normal temperature, which does not cause malfunctions or deterioration of quality.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which at least one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are linked. has KM3,
The linked cooking mode KM3 has a cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9 and a cooking process 2 performed in the heating chamber 113,
When the induction heating source is urgently stopped during the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC cancels the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and cooks in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4. exit the
The heating cooker 1 of the structure was disclosed.

For this reason, when the induction heating source 9 is emergencyly stopped due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the other heat sources are effectively used for heat cooking regardless of the restrictions of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (relationship with occupation of the heating source). can be executed, and it can be expected to improve user convenience.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, outside air is directly introduced into the IH coil installation space CK by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 without passing through the lower space 300B, and the outside air is introduced into the IH coil installation space CK. Forming an upper air passage AH for discharging to the outside of the IH coil installation space CK,
The integrated control device MC and the inverter circuit board 80 of the induction heating source 9 are arranged inside the upper air passage AH,
The heating cooker 1 of the structure was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the integrated control device MC and the inverter circuit board 80, which are important functional parts of the heating cooker 1, can be cooled by fresh outside air without passing through the lower space 300B, resulting in malfunction due to overheating and deterioration in quality. Therefore, a highly reliable heating cooker 1 can be provided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the lower space 300B has a lower air passage UH through which the outside air is introduced by the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 from the intake port at the bottom of the main body,
The lower air passage UH includes a first lower air passage accommodating the inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 9 and a second lower air passage having the heat radiation portion 122H of the microwave heating source 9 arranged therein. , was the configuration.

With this configuration, fresh outside air is introduced into the lower space 300B without passing through the upper space 300A, so that the heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating source 9 can be effectively cooled, resulting in malfunction due to overheating and deterioration in quality. It is possible to provide a highly reliable heating cooker 1 that does not cause such problems.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The integrated control device MC
(1) Both of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 and the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 operate during the period in which one control menu is executed only by the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189. ,
(2) During a period in which one control menu is continuously executed by designating a composite cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are automatically driven sequentially, Both the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 and the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 operate,
(3) The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 operate and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 do not operate during a period in which one control menu is executed only with the induction heating source 9. (See FIG. 44).

With this configuration, the temperature of the upper space 300A housing the integrated control device MC and the like is kept low by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and when only heating by the induction heating source 9 is performed, the lower space Since the 300B cooling fan is not operated, the power consumption of the cooling fan can be reduced as a whole.

Further, when only the oven heating source 188 is operated for heating, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is not performed, resulting in energy-saving operation.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
When the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected, the integrated display unit 30 constituting the notification unit AN displays unique identification information 330 for specifying the food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") to be applied. (display of the first specific screen 30SP).

With this configuration, the user can directly select the desired food by looking at the first specific screen 30SP, so that the user's operation procedure can be simplified and the convenience can be improved. .

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
A left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit as first operation units for setting the heating conditions (e.g., heating power level, heating power value, heating time, etc.) of the induction heating source 9 and commanding the start and stop of the heating operation. 40R and
A central operation unit 40M as a second operation unit that sets the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 189 and commands the start and stop of the heating operation,
The selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is performed by the second operation unit (central operation unit 40M),
The preheating step is terminated by the first operating section (left operating section 40L, right operating section 40R).

Because of this configuration, the user selects the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 with the central operation unit 40M, and then operates the first operation units (left operation unit 40L, left operation unit 40L, The heating operation can be started and stopped at the right operating part 40R). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the user's hesitation in the operation when starting and ending the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 in the linked cooking mode KM3, thereby improving the operability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The integrated controller MC automatically combines the single cooking mode KM1, which operates the induction heating source 9 alone, and the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, to automatically proceed with one cooking process. A configuration has been disclosed that has the ability to execute a combined cooking mode KM2 that allows the

With this configuration, the user can use the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in addition to the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, and can use a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The integrated display unit 30 constituting the notification unit AN further has a display screen 30D,
When the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display screen 30D,
A configuration has been disclosed in which, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the display screen 30D.

With this configuration, the user can easily select the desired cooking object and control menu from the displayed first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC, and can handle a wide range of cooking, providing highly convenient heat cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The main body 110 further includes an input operation unit 40 as input means,
The input operation unit 40 further includes function setting input means (input keys 43KP) for changing functions of the integrated control device MC,
At least one of the display method of each cooking menu in the linked cooking mode KM3 or the display method of each control menu in the combined cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.
For example, the input key 43KP is configured to set the priority when displaying each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display section 30.

With this configuration, when the function mode is set, the user can change the display method of the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, the display method of the linked cooking menu KM3, and the priority of the display. It is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The main body 110 further includes an input operation unit 40 as input means,
The input operation unit 40 further includes function setting input means (input keys 43KP) for changing functions of the integrated control device MC,
The display priority of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3 can be set by the function setting input means 43KP,
When the door 114 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on and the integrated display section 30 is activated, the integrated control device MC is preset by the function setting input means (input key 43KP). The first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM4 is preferentially displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when the permission condition (for example, the maximum power consumption, that is, the upper limit of the total power consumption) is satisfied. there were.

Because of this configuration, if the function mode is set, after the door 114 is opened, the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the first specific screen 30SC for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are automatically displayed according to the user's request. The specific screen 30SP can be displayed, and the usability for the user can be improved.

As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the cooking device 1 described below.
i.e.
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N containing the object to be cooked on the top plate 15;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
an integrated controller MC that controls the heating operation;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC performs a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N using the first heating means HM1, and after the preheating step, the object to be cooked (for example, " Fried chicken"), and after the cooking step 1, a cooking step 2 using the first heating means HM1.
(See FIGS. 68, 71 and 72).

Because of this configuration, the object to be heated N such as a frying pan or pot placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, while the object to be cooked (for example, "fried chicken") is subjected to the second heating in the heating chamber 113. It is possible to execute a cooperative cooking menu in which cooking is performed by the means (cooking step 1), and then cooking is performed by the induction heating source 9 (cooking step 2). As a result, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

As another linked preheating cooking mode KM4, a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N using the first heating means HM1, and preheating by the first heating means HM1 after the preheating step. A cooking step 1 in which an object to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) is placed on an object to be heated (such as a frying pan) N and heated, and after the cooking step 1, the object to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 113 and A cooking process 2 of heating by the second heating means HM2 is also disclosed (see FIGS. 60 and 67).

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, when the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the notification unit AN indicates the food to be cooked (for example, "hamburger") to be applied. Equipped with a display unit (integrated display unit) 30 on which identification information 330 is displayed,
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 60).

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a cooker with high operability that allows easy selection of a specific food to be cooked (for example, “hamburger”) to which the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is applied by the identification information 330.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The main body case HC further comprises an integrated display section 30 as display means,
The integrated display unit 30 displays the selection result of the first selection unit 43MC and the selection result of the second selection unit 43M1, respectively.
disclosed the configuration.

To provide a highly convenient heating cooker capable of handling a wide range of cooking by allowing a user to easily distinguish between the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode in the integrated display part 30 because of this configuration. can be done.

Other features disclosed in the first embodiment.
It disclosed the following characteristic configuration.

(1) Part 1:
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 inside the body;
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed above the main body;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
A notification unit AN that notifies information on cooking with heat;
two upper cooling fans 60, 61 which are started to operate when the first heating means HM1 are driven and when the second heating means HM2 are driven;
two lower cooling fans 128, 129 for starting cooling of said second heating means HM2 when said second heating means HM2 is activated;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, the notification unit AN, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, and the lower cooling fans 128 and 129, respectively;
an anomaly detection unit EM;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command signal to the integrated control device MC,
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B,
The upper space 300A accommodates the first heating means HM1 and the integrated control device MC,
The second heating means HM2 and the heating chamber 113 are accommodated in the lower space 300B,
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are arranged in an upper air passage AH that introduces outside air from a ventilation hole 64 that communicates with the outside of the lower space 300B without passing through the lower space 300B,
The lower cooling fans 128, 129 are arranged in a lower air passage UH that introduces outside air from the air intakes 152F, 152B in the lower part of the lower space 300B,
The upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH communicate with the outside from an exhaust port 20 provided in the upper part of the main body 110 without intersecting in the middle,
The upper cooling fans 60, 61 are composed of two adjacent cooling fans 60, 61, and cooperate to supply cooling air to the first heating means HM1,
The input operation unit 40 includes an operation unit (central operation unit 40M) for the second heating means HM2 and an operation unit (individual operation units 40R and 40L) for the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a linked cooking mode KM3 that links the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
Cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during execution of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the control unit MC
(1) stopping the heating operation of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 in which the heating operation was being performed;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 is continued until the stop condition A is satisfied after the heating operation of the heating means in the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, which was performing the heating operation, is stopped.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, when an abnormality is detected in either the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, all the heating means being driven are stopped, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and then To provide a highly convenient heating cooker which is highly safe because the upper cooling fan that cools the inside of the upper space 300A is stopped, and which can cope with a wide range of cooking by using the cooperative cooking mode. can.

(2) Part 2:
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information FA1 or the second At least one of the reference information FA2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN,
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, it has a function to determine the degree of progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the temperature rise (TN1, TN2, etc.), and during the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 Since reference information is automatically notified to the user at each stage, even if the number of types of heating sources is increasing, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to dispel anxiety, or to temporarily stop the heating operation for confirmation during the cooking process. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(3) Part 3:
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device MC automatically advances the cooking process 1, terminates the cooking process 1 in response to a command from the user, and after the termination, receives a start command from the user and starts the cooking process 2, The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2. At least one of the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 related to the cooking process 2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN;
The heating cooker 1 characterized by the above was disclosed.

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, it has a function to determine the degree of progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the temperature rise (TN1, TN2, etc.), and during the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 Since reference information is automatically notified to the user at each stage, even if the number of types of heating sources is increasing, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to dispel anxiety, or to temporarily stop the heating operation for confirmation during the cooking process. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

(4) Part 4:
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation,
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking process 1 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113 and the food N to be heated placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking process 1 are completed. and a cooking step 2 for induction-heating the object to be cooked with the induction heating source, and
When a reservation for heat cooking in the linked cooking mode is made,
(1) the induction heating source 9 can be driven before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step;
(2) during the preheating step, a cooking step 1 by the microwave heating source 189 can be initiated in the heating chamber 113;
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source 9 and completing the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object N preheated by the induction heating source 9,
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heat cooker is characterized in that information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified by the notification unit AN.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking process 1 can be started while the preheating process by the induction heating source 9 is started before the cooking process 1, and then the food to be cooked is moved to the preheated food N to be cooked. Step 2 can be performed.

Furthermore, since the reference information is automatically notified to the user during the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, even if the types of heating sources are increased, the user can be notified of the progress of cooking and dispel anxiety. By temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation on the way, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. It is expected that this will further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC
(1) IH single cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated alone (2) Range single cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated alone (3) Oven alone in which the oven heating source 188 is operated alone Cooking mode (4) A transition period TR in which the start and end timings of the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are determined depending on the user's input operation. linked cooking mode KM3, which is operated sequentially through
has an operating program of
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 performed before the transition period using the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed in a place other than the heating chamber 113 after the transition period. including
During the transition period TR, the integrated control device MC notifies the annunciator AN of reference information about the cooking process 2 or information indicating that cooking other than cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113. be notified by
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. can provide a high heating cooker.

Furthermore, when performing heat cooking in the linked cooking mode, during the transition period TR during which the heating operation is stopped (preheating operation may be can be notified that cooking can be performed.
As a result, it is possible to shorten the time that the user spends on cooking with heat, realizing quicker cooking than before, reducing the burden on the user, and improving usability.

(6) Part 6:
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is started with a time lag,
a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven;
has the function of
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking process 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the linked cooking mode, and the microwave heating source in the heating chamber 113 at a time before finishing the cooking process 1. 189 or the oven heating source 188 can be used to perform cooking different from the cooking in the linked cooking mode by the notification unit AN,
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. can provide a high heating cooker.

Furthermore, when cooking with heat in the linked cooking mode, when the cooking process 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 ends, it is possible to notify in advance that another heat cooking using the heating chamber 113 can be performed. It is expected that the time spent on cooking can be shortened, cooking can be done more quickly than before, reducing the burden on the user, and improving usability.

(7) Part 7:
a heating chamber 113;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N;
a transmission/reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
a notification unit AN;
An integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked to perform cooking,
In the linked cooking mode, a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started in accordance with a command from a user after the cooking process 1 is completed are executed.
The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transmission/reception unit 49.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, when performing heat cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, it is possible to obtain information on foodstuffs in the refrigerator 401 as reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied. It is expected that the usability will be improved.

(8) Part 8:
a heating chamber 113;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N;
a transmission/reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with an information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly;
a notification unit AN;
An integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmitting/receiving unit 49, and the notification unit AN,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked by a cooperative cooking program to perform heat cooking,
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started according to a user's command after a transition period TR during which no heating operation is performed,
The integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit 49.
Disclosed is a heating cooker characterized by:

With this configuration, three types of heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the linked cooking mode can handle a wide range of cooking. I can provide equipment.

Furthermore, when cooking is performed in the linked cooking mode, the execution data of the cooking is provided to the external information processing device (home gateway) 411 , which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401 . The utilization of such information can ultimately contribute to the improvement of user convenience, safety, maintenance and improvement of comfortable spaces, and the like.

(9) Part 9:
When receiving an input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC performs a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode. By displaying either the screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

With this configuration, two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 can be easily used properly. can provide

Furthermore, an input operation unit 40 for inputting to select one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and an integrated display that selectively displays the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC It was the structure provided with the part 30. FIG.
Therefore, one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display section 30, which is convenient.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is common to the first and second heating means, and includes an operation unit 98 of a main power switch 97 that supplies power to the integrated control device MC, the cooperative cooking mode and the and an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) for commanding the start of individual cooking in the composite cooking mode.
For this reason, the input operation unit 40 can be used to issue a command from turning on the main electric power to starting the heating, and the operability is excellent.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT serving as cooking mode canceling means for determining the end of each cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
Therefore, the operation of both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be canceled with the input key 43MT, and the operability is good.

Further, the integrated control device MC accepts any one input of the combined cooking mode KM2, the linked cooking mode KM3, and the single cooking mode KM1 at the input operation unit 40, and selects a specific screen corresponding to the cooking mode ( The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen 30ST) are displayed on the integrated display section 30. FIG.

Moreover, for the individual cooking menus such as "hamburger" and "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode, the heat sources for the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and further the above-described first reference is displayed. Information beneficial to the user, such as the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2, is displayed, so that the cooking failure of the user can be reduced, and a cooking device with improved convenience can be provided.

Further, after the main power supply is turned on by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC causes the integrated display unit 30 to display the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z). The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, etc. are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in accordance with the input from.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1 can be effectively used.

The specific screens are a first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode. It was a configuration that was displayed alternatively.
For this reason, there is no fear of causing misunderstanding between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, which is convenient for the user.
.

(10) Part 10:
Further, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, the cooking process information 332 of one linked cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") and one or more "control menus" applied to the menu. "Condition" information (including one or more combination of thermal power, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
The integrated control device MC displays additional information 331 such as guidance prompting the user's operation, and when the start input 43 MS key is pressed in this state, execution of the cooperative cooking mode is started. There is (see FIG. 54).

According to this first embodiment, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by three types of heat sources, the display screen 30D displays the heat source according to one control menu selected from the group of linked cooking modes and the cooking mode. Since at least three pieces of information, such as the process and the user's input operation, can be collectively displayed, even a composite heating cooker equipped with three heat sources can be a convenient heating cooker.

(11) Part 11:
In order to detect the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, the integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or the temperature rise from the start of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and outputs the first reference information FA1 or It was the structure which alert|reported the 2nd reference information FA2.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the reference information.

(12) Part 12:
The input operation unit 40 includes
(1) selecting means 43L, 43R for an IH single cooking mode for operating the induction heating source independently;
(2) Selecting means 43M1 for a range-only cooking mode for operating the microwave heating source alone;
(3) selection means 43M1 for an oven-only cooking mode that operates the oven heating source alone;
(4) A combined cooking mode selecting means 43M1 for automatically switching and operating both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source at the same time or with a time difference;
(5) It is the structure which comprised selection means 43MC of the said cooperation cooking mode.
Therefore, there is an advantage that each heat source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space for selecting means (input keys, etc.) for the three heat sources.

(13) Part 13:
The input operation unit 40 has a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L as two separate operation units dedicated to the induction heating source 9,
Furthermore, it has a shared operation unit (central operation unit) 40M for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188,
The shared operation unit 40M includes first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2,
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1), the first specific screen (30SP) for input related to cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. ) is displayed and
When the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC), the second specific screen 30SC for input relating to cooking in the composite cooking mode is displayed. It was the configuration shown.
Therefore, selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 is more effective if the operation is performed first. In addition, since separate specific screens are displayed, there is no fear of erroneous selection between the two types of cooking modes.

(14) Part 14:
In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated controller MC. Met. For example, in "range manual" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from among 100 W, 200 W, and 500 W, but the default value is 500 W. In other words, it is determined to be 500 W unless otherwise specified.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce user input operations and improve usability.

(15) Part 15:
The end of the cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9 and the end of the cooking process 2 are determined by input operations to the dedicated operation units (the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 determine the start and stop timings of the induction heating operation.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the user can stand in front of either the right operating section 40R or the left operating section 40L and concentrate on starting and ending induction heating. In other words, there is no need to use both the central operation unit 40M and the left and right operation units 40L and 40R to start and end the cooking process 1, thereby avoiding confusion in the user's operations.

(16) Part 16:
In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 is set by the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R) ) was determined by the user's operation.
Therefore, the heating conditions (thermal power, heating time, etc.) can be set according to the object to be cooked, the heating mode, and the heating source, and the cooking finish can be improved.

(17) Part 17:
The notification unit AN includes first display units (31L, 31R) that perform display operations during the execution period of the IH single cooking mode KM1, and an integrated display unit 30 that performs display operations during the execution period of the cooperative cooking mode. , had
Therefore, especially when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 using a plurality of heat sources, the cooking process, heating conditions, etc. are intensively displayed by the single integrated display section 30, so attention should be focused on the integrated display section 30. be able to.

(18) Part 18:
In the linked cooking mode KM3, identification information 330 identifying a plurality of items to be cooked is displayed in a certain order on the first identification screen 30SP, and each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the identification information 330 is displayed in sequence. It was a configuration that could be selected.
Therefore, when the desired cooking (for example, hamburger) is to be made, the identification information can be sequentially displayed and selected, which simplifies the selection method and improves the user's operability.

(19) Part 19:
Composite cooking modes are distinguished by control menus that drive the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see FIGS. 34 and 37),
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information specifying the control menu (for example, specific sentences 30J such as "warm" and "manual range" in FIG. 49).
Therefore, the user can easily select the control menu.

(20) Part 20:
The reference information that the integrated control device MC acquires from the home gateway 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 has been disclosed as information on ingredients that can be cooked.
For this reason, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process to check the information about the ingredients, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(21) Part 21:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the reference information (ingredient information) in the storage device MM until cooking in one of the linked cooking modes is completed.
Therefore, it is not necessary for the user to perform special operations for recording the reference information each time, or to write and record the reference information on paper.

(22) Part 22:
The food information was information held by the refrigerator 401 . Furthermore, the food information includes information on the refrigeration temperature or freezing temperature of the food.
For this reason, when cooking in the linked cooking mode with the heating cooker 1, it can be used as a reference when determining the control conditions (including one or more combinations such as thermal power, heating intensity, and target temperature). You can expect better quality cooking.

(23) Part 23:
Before the start of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC sends a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 of FIG. (home gateway) 411.
.
For this reason, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process to check the information about the ingredients, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(24) Part 24:
Before starting the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission/reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411, and further 112), the integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units AN, notifies that the user is requesting the provision of reference information.
Therefore, the user's action of moving to the refrigerator 401 to check the cooking can be postponed in advance, so that the user's labor can be reduced.

(25) Part 25:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store the cooking implementation data in the storage device MM after the cooking process 2 is finished.
Therefore, in order for the user to record the cooking execution data, there is no need for a special operation or a task of writing and recording on paper.

(26) Part 26:
The cooking implementation data is transmitted after the cooking process 2 is completed, and the cooking implementation data includes at least one or more of the following information.
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (2) Information about the weight or volume of the food to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (4) The cooking process 1 to the cooking process 1 Information indicating the required time until the end of the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (6) Information specifying the heat source used for cooking (8) Information related to user safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber. It is also possible to eliminate the need for work such as writing and recording in

(27) Part 27:
The integrated control device MC is configured to store, in the storage device MM, information on the required time until the cooking is finished after the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is finished.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform a special operation to record information on the time required for cooking each time, or to record the information on paper.

(28) Part 28:
In the home appliance operation management system of Embodiment 1, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects that a person is in the space where the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed. and when the activation information from the heating cooker 1 is received, it is determined that it is the heating cooking time zone, and an inventory data collection command is sent to the refrigerator 401 (step SD6 in FIG. 102 reference).
Therefore, when the user (resident) is near the refrigerator 401 or the heating cooker 1 and is likely to cook, the operation of collecting inventory data can be automatically performed. In addition, the user does not need to perform any special input operation for collecting the data, and useful information can be acquired without much effort, so that an operation management system that is highly convenient as a whole can be realized.

Embodiment 2.
122 and 123 show a cooking device according to Embodiment 2. FIG.
FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of the built-in compound type heating cooker. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation section and the cooking process from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 122 . Parts that are the same as or corresponding to those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof may be omitted.

The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that a steam generator (boiler) 500 for blowing superheated steam into the heating chamber 113 is added to the second heating means HM2.

The steam generator (boiler) 500 can blow steam into the heating chamber 113 from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. , tableware made of glass or the like, or a dedicated saucer 145 may be blown upward from below.

Next, FIG. 123 will be described.
In FIG. 123, preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and the cooking process 1 is performed in parallel with this preheating operation. The cooking process 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2, and the cooking process 2 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL in the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4).

In FIG. 123, when the input function of the main input key is valid and related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is indicated by a blank rectangular frame. Note that not all input keys are drawn.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (starting from this preparation period P1 stage, the next preheating process is started).

Furthermore, when the user selects the left heating section 17HL (at least by pressing the input key 43L1), the left heating section 17HL performs the preheating step (P2). After the input key 43L1, at least one of the input keys 43L2 or 43L3 may be pressed continuously to actually turn on the heat (standby state until 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed).

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 123, the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L may be pressed to set the preheating target temperature. In addition, since the control conditions such as heating power and heating time are automatically displayed on the left display section 31L by default setting, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when entering the cooking period P2, among the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 are disabled (actually, input operation signals to the integrated controller MC are disabled). received, it is ignored by the integrated controller MC).

In FIG. 123, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M are disabled.

On the other hand, the left heating unit 17HL continues the preheating operation (preheating step). When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated controller MC, so the "preheating process" of the induction heating is stopped at this stage. Then, the cooking period P2 ends. To maintain preheating until cooking step 2, the input key 43L1 is not pressed.

Although it depends on the size of the object to be heated N and the thermal power at the time of preheating, it may take several minutes to reach the predetermined (target) preheating temperature after the induction heating source 9 is energized. It is not necessary to interrupt the preheating operation once.

Next, when the input key 43MS is pressed again, the cooking step 1 (heat cooking period P3) in the heating chamber 113 is entered. In addition, the door 114 is opened in advance and the food to be cooked is placed on 145 . If the door 114 is not closed, even if the input key 43MS is pressed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 will not be sent from the integrated controller MC.

Similarly, if the door 114 is not closed, steam is not blown from the steam supplier 500 (energization of the steam supplier 500 is started when the input key 43MS is pressed during the preparation period P1).

Inside the heating chamber 113, the food to be cooked is covered with high-temperature steam, and the food is irradiated with microwaves, so that even frozen food can be thawed in a short time. In addition, the addition of radiant heat from the oven heat source 188 raises the temperature of the atmosphere inside the heating chamber 113, further promoting heat cooking (including thawing) of the food.

If the input key 43MT is pressed once, the cooking process 1 is completed, so the heating rest period P4 starts at this stage. That is, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 among the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all enabled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L are all kept valid, so that the left heating section 17HL can change the preheating control conditions.

When the user presses the input key 43MT once to enter the transition period TR, the object to be cooked, which is in the middle of cooking, is placed from the heating chamber 113 on the object to be heated N already heated by the left heating unit 17HL. move. In this case, since the frying pan, pot, etc. are preheated by the induction heating source 9, the plates and containers used in the heating chamber 113 are not moved above the left heating section 17HL.

If the door 114 is opened during the cooking process 1 without pressing the input key 43MT even once, the cooking in the heating chamber 113 is stopped at that point. may be transferred to the object to be heated N on the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, when the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is touched, the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started in the left heating unit 17HL. That is, the food is cooked on the food N that has already reached a high temperature in the preheating step.
Then, by pressing the input key 43L1, the cooking process 2 can be terminated at an arbitrary timing.

Note that the cooking process 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has passed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled simultaneously with the end of the cooking process 2 regardless of whether it is terminated arbitrarily by the user or when it is automatically terminated (in FIG. (Although the figure shows that the input key 43MT is released, the input key 43MT may be pressed in this way).

Therefore, immediately after the end of the cooking process 2, when additional heating is desired to be performed by the left heating unit 17HL again, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, and the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. are operated to perform independent cooking. Heat cooking may be performed in the mode KM1 (this is not a part of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, but a cooking process in the single heating mode KM1).

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 is completed. Immediately after finishing the cooking process 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooperative cooking mode is entered. It is also possible to perform a process of waiting for a user's input (operation of the input key 43M1) by performing guidance as if it were handled as a part of KM3.
In this way, after finishing the cooking process 2, the user can check the finished state of the food to be cooked, and if the food is insufficiently heated, the user can immediately touch the input key 43L1. This method can also improve usability for the user.

Also in the second embodiment, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating process and the cooking process 2, as described in the first embodiment (especially FIGS. 45 and 46), Then, the heating sources and cooling fans 60, 61, 128 and 129 are stopped and notified.

Modification of Embodiments 1 and 2.
The heating cooker 1 disclosed in Embodiments 1 and 2 may be modified as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110 (main body case HC) having a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed;
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 that is arranged in the main body 110 and heats the object N to be heated;
a heating chamber 113 disposed inside the body 110;
a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 as second heating means HM2 that are arranged inside the main body 110 and heat the food that is housed inside the heating chamber 113;
first operation units 40R and 40L for setting the heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and commanding the start and stop of the heating operation;
A second operation unit arranged separately from the first operation units 40R and 40L on the main body 110 for setting the heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commanding the start and stop of the heating operation. 40M (input keys 43MS, 43MT);
a main operation unit (an operation unit of a main power switch 97) 98 which is arranged in the main body 110 and collectively stops the heating of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
and an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on the heating conditions set by the first operation part 40R and the second operation part 40M. ,
The integrated control device MC performs a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 for one object to be cooked, and the second has a function of a linked preheating cooking mode KM4 in which the cooking step of heating the food using the heating means HM2 is performed in the same time period;
In the process of executing the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the integrated control device MC causes the first heating means HM1 to execute the preheating process and the second heating means HM2 to execute the cooking process 1. at the stage of
(1) When a stop command is received from the main operation unit 98, the heating operations of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are stopped, and the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is canceled. 1 stop function;
(2) When a stop command is received from the first operation units 40R and 40L, the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1 is stopped, the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is maintained, and the second a second stop function for continuing the cooking process 1 by the heating means HM2 of
It is the heating cooker 1 equipped.

According to this configuration, the main operation unit 98 can be used to collectively turn off the power supply to turn off all the power supplies collectively after finishing the cooking.

In addition, in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, in order to stop only the preheating operation, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operating units 40R and 40L of the first heating means HM1 (the induction heating source 9) that perform the preheating operation. .

Moreover, even if the preheating operation is stopped in this way, the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is maintained. Therefore, the execution of the cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, so that the cooking in the cooking process 1 is not adversely affected.

Because of this configuration, when the object to be heated N is temporarily lifted or moved on the top plate 15, even if the preheating operation is temporarily stopped, the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is resumed. It is possible to provide a cooker that can return to cooking and is highly convenient for the user.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of this modification, the main body 110 detects an abnormal state caused by the first heating means HM1 (the induction heating source 9), and urgently restarts the heating operation of the first heating means HM1. further comprising an anomaly detection unit EM that stops,
When the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 is urgently stopped by the abnormality detection unit EM, the setting information of the preheating target temperature as the setting condition of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC. etc. may be stored (maintained).

With this configuration, it is possible to expect an improvement in usability for the user without the need to set the preheating target temperature that has been set once and restart the preheating.

Other modifications of the first and second embodiments.
In this Embodiment 1, the following heating cooker 1 was disclosed.
i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 on which the object to be heated N is placed;
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 that is arranged in the main body 110 and heats the object N to be heated;
a heating chamber 113 disposed within the body 110;
a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 as second heating means HM2 that are arranged in the main body 110 and heat the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
first operation units 40R and 40L arranged on the top plate 15 for setting the heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and commanding start and stop of the heating operation;
A second operation unit which is arranged separately from the first operation units 40L and 40R on the main body 110, sets the heating conditions of the second heating means HM2, and commands the start and stop of the heating operation. 40M and
a main operation unit (main power switch operation unit) 98 arranged in the main body 110 for collectively stopping the heating of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on the heating conditions set by the first operation units 40R, 40L and the second operation unit 40M; with
The integrated control device MC performs a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 for one object to be cooked, and the second has a function of a linked preheating cooking mode KM4 in which the cooking step of heating the food using the heating means HM2 is performed in the same time period;
In the process of executing the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the integrated control device MC causes the first heating means HM1 to execute the preheating process and the second heating means HM2 to execute the cooking process 1. at the stage of
(1) When a stop command is received from the main operation unit 98, the heating operations of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are stopped, and the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is canceled. 1 stop function;
(2) When a stop command is received from the first operation unit 40R, the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1 is stopped, the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is maintained, and the second heating is performed. a second stop function in which the cooking process 1 by the means HM2 continues;
(3) When receiving a cancellation command from the second operation unit 40M, the setting of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is canceled, and the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the heating by the second heating means HM2 are performed. and a third stop function that respectively stops the operation;
A heating cooker 1 equipped with the above was disclosed.

For this reason, the power supply can be shut off collectively by the main operation unit 98 in order to turn off all the power sources collectively after finishing the cooking. In addition, in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, in order to stop only the preheating operation, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operating units 40R and 40L of the first heating means HM1 (the induction heating source 9) that perform the preheating operation. .
Further, by operating the second operating section 40M (the input key 43MT of the central operating section), the setting itself of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 can be canceled.
As described above, the user can appropriately select the stopping method depending on the purpose. Further, if the first operation units 40L and 40R are operated, the execution of the cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped. can be stopped, and it can be expected to improve user convenience.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
In this Embodiment 2, the following heating cooker 1 was disclosed.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed on the upper surface of the main body 110;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) that provides information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1 and a common operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. have
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N to be heated by the first heating means HM1, and heating the second heating means HM2 inside the heating chamber 113 concurrently with the preheating step. and after the cooking step 1 is completed, the object to be cooked is transferred from the heating chamber 113 to the object to be heated N preheated in the preheating step, and the object to be cooked is further heated. and a cooking step 2,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is
(1) Selecting the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and deciding to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) in the shared operation unit 40M,
(2) The start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the common operation unit 40M (using the input key 43MS and the input key 43MT),
(3) The end of the preheating process and the end of the cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (input key 43L1).
The heating cooker 1 characterized was disclosed.

According to this configuration, in one heating cooker, a linked preheating cooking mode, which is one type of linked cooking mode in which the place to be heated and the heating means are different, can be selected, so that it is possible to handle a wide range of cooking. becomes.

Moreover, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode, selection of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 and determination to start the cooking process are performed in the common operation unit 40M, and the start and end of the cooking process 1 can be performed in the common operation unit 40M. Since the subsequent start and end of the cooking process 2 and the end of the preheating process are both performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the induction heating source 9, the operation rule is simple, and the user's operation error and confusion. can be expected to prevent Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability while having two or more heating sources and two or more input operation units.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 124 is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections in the cooking device 1 of Embodiment 3. FIG. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking process, etc. from selection to transition to the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 124 . Parts that are the same as or corresponding to those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof may be omitted.

In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the object N to be heated, such as a large-diameter frying pan, used for preheating is an individual piece corresponding to the induction heating source 9. Considering that the operations of the operation units 40L and 40R would be hindered, the common operation unit 40M can be used to start and end the processes from preheating to the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. This is the first embodiment. and 2.

Next, FIG. 124 will be described.
Numeral 40 denotes an input operation portion formed on the upper surface of the front side of the top plate 15, and includes three of a left operation portion 40L, a center operation portion 40M and a right operation portion 40R (not shown).
The left operation unit 40L is for performing input operation only for the induction heating source 9, so it may be called an "individual operation unit".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "common operation unit" because it is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG. This "common operating section" also includes a "cooperative operating section" 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode.

A total of five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L are arranged on the left operation unit 40L. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are assigned one or a plurality of input functions as described in the first embodiment, and have the same functions as in the first embodiment.

Also, the functions of various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, 43MT, etc. arranged on the central operation unit 40M are the same as in the first embodiment.

The object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL is a relatively large frying pan with a diameter of, for example, about 300 mm. NH is a handle that is detachably attached to the edge of the object to be heated N (frying pan). In other words, it is a handle that can be arbitrarily removed by the user.

The object to be heated N has a size that allows it to be inserted into the heating chamber 113 through the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 and the door 114 to be closed. However, in that case, the handle NH must be removed. Note that FG indicates the user's fingertip.
Although the handle NH is horizontally extended in FIG. 124, it may actually be tilted upward. There is also a handle that rises vertically from the middle and has an L shape when viewed from the side.

Next, FIG. 125 will be described.
In FIG. 125, preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and after this preheating operation, the cooking step 1 is performed as it is. The subsequent cooking step 2 is the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the second heating means HM2.

In FIG. 125, when the input function of the main input key is valid and related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is indicated by a blank rectangular frame. Note that not all input keys are drawn.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP and the 43MS is pressed, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (starting from this preparation period P1 stage, the next preheating process is started).

Furthermore, when the user selects the left heating section 17HL (at least by pressing the input key 43L1), the left heating section 17HL performs the preheating step (P2).
Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 125, the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L may be pressed to set the preheating target temperature. In addition, since the control conditions such as heating power and heating time are automatically displayed on the left display section 31L by default setting, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when entering the cooking period P2, among the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 are disabled (actually, input operation signals to the integrated controller MC are disabled). received, it is ignored by the integrated controller MC).

In FIG. 125, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M are disabled.

On the other hand, the left heating unit 17HL continues the preheating operation (preheating step). When the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from the input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated controller MC, so the "preheating process" of the induction heating is stopped at this stage. Then, the cooking period P2 ends. To maintain preheating until cooking step 2, the input key 43L1 is not pressed.

When the object to be heated N reaches the (target) preheating temperature set by the user or the default setting temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice that preheating has been completed. Further, the completion of preheating is also displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

Therefore, the user heats and cooks the object to be cooked by placing it on the object to be heated N (frying pan) maintained at a high temperature (cooking step 1).
It should be noted that other cooking cannot be performed in the heating chamber 113 during this cooking step 1 . Since the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 are disabled, the heating chamber 113 is occupied.

By pressing the input key 43MT on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can end the cooking process 1 at any timing.

Next, the user lifts the object N to be heated from the left heating unit 17HL while keeping the handle NH of the object N to be heated (locked state), and moves the object N to the heating chamber 113 with the door 114 open. Finally, remove the handle NH.

In this way, the object to be cooked is accommodated in the heating chamber 113 while being placed on the object N to be heated.
If the door 114 is not closed, even if the input key 43MS is pressed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 will not be sent from the integrated controller MC.
Then, when the input key 43MS is pressed next, the stage of the cooking process 2 (heat cooking period P5) in the heating chamber 113 is entered.

In addition, in the cooking process 2, high-temperature steam may be supplied from the steam supplier 500 as shown in the second embodiment.

Since the food to be cooked is cooked in the heating chamber 113 as described above, if the input key 43MT is pressed once, the cooking process 2 is completed. When is pressed, the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) is all cancelled.

At the stage of the cooking process 2, since the occupation of the left heating unit 17HL is released, other cooking items can be cooked by the left heating unit 17HL.

Note that the cooking process 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has passed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled simultaneously with the end of the cooking process 2 regardless of whether the user terminates the cooking process arbitrarily or automatically. (Although the figure shows that the input key 43MT is released, the input key 43MT may be pressed in this way).

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 is completed. Immediately after finishing the cooking process 2, for example, when the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooperative cooking mode is entered. It is also possible to perform a process of waiting for a user's input (operation of the input key 43M1) by performing guidance as if it were handled as a part of KM3.
In this way, after finishing the cooking process 2, the user can check the finished state of the food to be cooked, and if the food is insufficiently heated, immediately touch the input key 43MS. This method can also improve usability for the user.

Also in the third embodiment, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating process and the cooking process 2, as described in the first embodiment (especially FIGS. 45 and 46), Then, the heating sources and cooling fans 60, 61, 128 and 129 are stopped and notified.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 3 has the following configuration.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed on the upper surface of the main body 110;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) that provides information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1 and a common operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. have
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N to be heated by the first heating means HM1, and following the preheating step, using the object N to be heated by the first heating means HM1. After finishing the cooking step 1, the object to be heated N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 is moved to the heating chamber 113, so that the object to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 113. and a cooking step 2 of transferring and further heating the food to be cooked,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is
(1) Selecting the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and deciding to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) in the shared operation unit 40M,
(2) The start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the common operation unit 40M (using the input key 43MS and the input key 43MT),
(3) The end of the preheating process and the end of the cooking process 2 are performed by the common operation unit 40M (input key 43MT).
The heating cooker 1 characterized was disclosed.

According to this configuration, in one heating cooker, a linked preheating cooking mode, which is one type of linked cooking mode in which the place to be heated and the heating means are different, can be selected, so that it is possible to handle a wide range of cooking. becomes.

Moreover, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode, since a series of operations from the start to the end of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 can be determined in the common operation unit 40M, the operation rule is simple, and the user's operation error and confusion are avoided. It can be expected to prevent inviting. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability while having two or more heating sources and two or more input operation units.

Furthermore, when using a heated object N such as a frying pan having a relatively large diameter as in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the fingertip FG may cross directly above or near the operation unit 40R, and there is a concern that the fingertip FG may approach the handle NH when stopping the heating operation by operating the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R. be. In particular, when trying to move the object N to be heated in a hurry, there is a possibility that the fingertip may touch the handle NH unintentionally.

On the other hand, in this third embodiment, in view of the fact that a large-diameter frying pan or the like is used to bake a large amount of gyoza or the like using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the heating control of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is performed. , can all be performed in the shared operation unit 40M. Therefore, even if the individual operation units 40L, 40R and the handle NH cross each other as described above, the common operation unit 40M can be used to accurately give a control command such as a heating stop. That is, it is possible to provide the heating cooker 1 with enhanced safety.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking process, etc. from selection to transition to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 4. FIG. Parts that are the same as or corresponding to those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof may be omitted.

The fourth embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that a preheating process is performed in the heating chamber 113 .
FIG. 126 will be described below.
In Embodiment 4, preheating is performed by the second heating means HM2, and after this preheating operation, the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113 as it is. The subsequent cooking process 1 is the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 126, when the input function of the main input key is valid and is related to the start or end of the cooking process, it is indicated by a blank rectangular frame. Note that not all input keys are drawn.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (common operation unit 40M) are all enabled. The input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP. From the cooking menu displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, the identification information 330 of the desired cooking object is selected and the input key 43MS is pressed.
Then, it shifts to the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (starting from this preparation period P1 stage, the next preheating process is started).

In the integrated controller MC, when the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, it is specified that the preheating process is to be performed in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 . Therefore, the user can understand that the preheating operation is performed in the heating chamber 113 before pressing the input key 43MS.

Even if the user does not operate the shared operation unit 40M, if the door 114 is closed, the power supply to the oven heating source 188 is started and the cooking period P2 (preheating step) is executed.

On the other hand, when entering the heat cooking period P2, the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3 of the left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL to be used in the cooking process 2 in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 are operated. is disabled (actually, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated controller MC, it is ignored by the integrated controller MC).

In FIG. 126, broken-line frames indicate that the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L are disabled.
In addition, during this heat cooking period P2, the input function of the right operation unit 40L is maintained effectively, so the right heating unit 17HR can be used for other cooking (however, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 cannot be set).

When the internal atmosphere temperature of the heating chamber 113 reaches the (target) preheating temperature set by the user (for example, 200° C.) or the default setting temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of preheating by voice. Further, the completion of preheating is also displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

The user then opens the door 114 and ends the food item into the heating chamber 113 . At that time, in consideration of the next cooking step 2, the food may be cooked while being placed on the object to be heated N (frying pan) as shown in FIG. Even if the object N to be heated is made of metal, microwave heating cooking is possible as long as the object N has an open upper surface like a frying pan. Alternatively, the food may be placed on a cooking plate made of heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass.

During the cooking period P3, not only the oven heating source 188 operates, but also the microwave heating source 189 may be driven to heat the food by the synergistic action of radiant heat and microwaves.

Other cooking cannot be performed in the heating chamber 113 during the preheating step 1 and the cooking step 1 . The input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 are valid, but other cooking modes cannot be set unless the associated preheating cooking mode KM4 including the preheating process is canceled (by pressing the input key 43MT twice).

By pressing the input key 43MT on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can end the cooking process 1 at any timing.

The integrated control device MC may inform the user of the progress information at any time using the additional information 331 (see FIG. 60 of the first embodiment, etc.) or the like so that the user can refer to the completion of the cooking process 1 . Further, third reference information (see FIGS. 68 and 70 of Embodiment 1) FA3 or the like is reported to notify that a predetermined time (TN3) has passed since the cooking process 1 was started. can be

When the input key 43MT is pressed, the cooking process 1 ends and the heating pause period P4 begins.
can be terminated at any time by the user.
When entering the heating pause period P4, the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the common operation unit 40M are restored, so that cooking of other food items in the heating chamber 113 can be started.

On the other hand, even in the individual operation unit 40L, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 are restored when the heating pause period P4 begins. can be started.

Next, the user opens the door 114 and takes out the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 during the heating pause period P4.
At that time, when the object to be heated N (frying pan) with the handle NH removed as described above is used, the handle NH is attached, and the object to be heated N with the object to be cooked placed thereon is placed in the heating chamber. Take out from 113. Then, it is moved above the left heating unit 17HL.

In this way, the object to be cooked remains on the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL, and when the input key 43M1 is pressed next, the cooking step 2 (heat cooking period P5) is entered. The heat power may be adjusted by pressing the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

As described above, the left heating unit 17HL heats and cooks the food to be cooked, so that the cooking step 2 is completed by pressing the input key 43L1 on the left individual operation unit 40L once.
At this stage, if the input key 43MT of the shared operation unit 40MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4) is completely cancelled.

In addition, since the occupation of the heating chamber 113 is released at the stage of the cooking process 2, other food to be cooked can be heated and cooked in the heating chamber 113. FIG.

Note that the cooking process 2 may be automatically terminated when the time set by the timer cooking or the time determined by the default value has passed. The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled simultaneously with the end of the cooking process 2 regardless of whether the user terminates the cooking process arbitrarily or automatically. (Although the figure shows that the input key 43MT is released, the input key 43MT may be pressed in this way).

It should be noted that the control may be such that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not automatically canceled at the same time as the cooking process 2 is completed. When the start switch (input key 43L2 or input key 43L3) is pressed within a certain period of time (for example, within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, for example, immediately after finishing the cooking process 2, Alternatively, guidance may be provided to treat the cooking as part of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and processing may be performed to wait for the user's input to resume cooking (operation of the input key 43L1).
In this way, after finishing the cooking process 2, the user can check the finished state of the food to be cooked, and if the food is insufficiently heated, immediately touch the input key 43L2 or 43L3. This method can also improve usability for the user.

Also in the fourth embodiment, when the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating process and the cooking process 2, as described in the first embodiment (especially FIGS. 45 and 46), Then, the heating sources and cooling fans 60, 61, 128 and 129 are stopped and notified.

Summary of Embodiment 4.

As is clear from the above description, the fourth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the ninth disclosure as follows.
i.e.
a main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N placed on the upper surface of the main body 110;
a second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
a notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) that provides information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 that gives commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1 and a common operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1. have
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 that drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 in a predetermined order,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N to be heated by the second heating means HM2, and following the preheating step, using the object N to be heated by the second heating means HM2. d) Cooking step 1 for heat cooking, and after finishing the cooking step 1, the object to be heated N (frying pan) used in this cooking step 1 is placed on the heating part 17HL (or 17HR) of the induction heating source 9. and a cooking step 2 of further heating the object to be cooked by moving,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is
(1) Selecting the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and deciding to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) in the shared operation unit 40M,
(2) The end of the preheating process and the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the common operation unit 40M (input key 43MT),
(3) The start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the shared operation unit 40M (using the input key 43MS and the input key 43MT),
(4) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (using the input key 43L1);
Disclosed the heating cooker 1 characterized by

According to this configuration, in one heating cooker, a linked preheating cooking mode, which is one type of linked cooking mode in which the place to be heated and the heating means are different, can be selected, so that it is possible to handle a wide range of cooking. becomes.

Moreover, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode, a series of operations from the start to the end of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 can be determined in the shared operation unit 40M, and subsequently the start and end of the cooking process 1 can be determined. The rules are simple and can be expected to prevent user operational errors and confusion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability while having two or more heating sources and two or more input operation units.

Other embodiments.
In Embodiment 1, regarding the induction heating source 9 that is first used in the (first) cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 61), the operation other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is prohibited or restricted from the input operation unit 40. is the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR, but another induction heating section may be added to the target.

Further, in a second cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 61), either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, are activated simultaneously to initiate the cooking process, in which case the microwave heating source 189 or oven heat source 188, or both, may be prohibited or restricted from operating in cooking modes other than cooperative cooking mode KM3. In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode, a wide range of cooking can be performed using a plurality of heating means in the cooperative cooking mode by preferentially securing the heat source required in the cooking process. .

In the description of Embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, the display corresponding to the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed. As an operation, the first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, or the second display screen 30SC dedicated to the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed on the integrated display section 30, the left side display section 31L, or the like. Ta.
Instead of such switching of the entire screen, the basic configurations of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC are unified, and a design is adopted to clearly distinguish between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3. can be

For example, on the first display screen 30SP, characters clearly indicate that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed, while on the second display screen 30SC, characters clearly indicate that the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed. should be displayed in This makes it easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Further, a light-emitting display unit such as the light-emitting display unit 27L described in the first embodiment is provided in each of the display units for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. , so that it can be recognized that it is the cooking mode on the side that emits light.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, and performs a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, this Such a cooking mode display portion (light emitting portion) may be provided.

The cooperative cooking mode is not limited to being composed of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 . For example, the cooking process 1 is performed by the left heating part 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and the cooking process 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189. Finally, the food is returned to the top plate 15 to compensate for the insufficient heating. A cooking step 3 is provided for purposes such as adjusting, adding seasonings and other cooking liquids, and the like. This cooking step 3 is performed with an induction heating source 9 . In this case, it is not necessary to use the same heating units 17HL and 17HR in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 3.

As one example, on the right heating unit 17HR, the final cooking is done while visually confirming directly. In other words, this is a case in which the material to be cooked, which has been substantially completed in the cooking step 2, is moved onto the right heating unit 17HR, and weakly heated for a long period of time to increase the maturity of ingredients such as meat and vegetables and broth.

In the above explanation, when one cooking menu (for example, hamburger) is specified, the cooperative cooking mode automatically determines the heating sources to be used and their order, but the user's intention is given priority. can be changed to

For example, “item to be cooked X” and “item to be cooked Y”, which are one of the linked cooking modes, are relatively frequently used by the user, and both of them are used in the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR. Therefore, it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking in the right heating section 17HR.

After that, when the user selects "item to be cooked Z", which is one of the linked cooking modes, if the left heating unit 17HL is designated, the user may be confused about the operation because the user is not accustomed to using it. be.

Therefore, if there is no problem with either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL from the determination result of the permission condition by the integrated control device MC, when selecting the cooperative cooking mode for the first time, the first specific screen 30SP prompts the user to The familiar right heating unit 17HR may be preferentially displayed. That is, for example, when selecting the heating section, the "right heating section" may always be displayed, and then the user may perform an input designating the left heating section 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot properly heat due to restrictions such as the heating power value for cooking the food and the energization control pattern of induction heating, the operation of the integrated control device MC side If the program allows only the specified (default setting) heating section to perform cooking, the user will not be misused or misunderstood. For example, in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, when a relatively weak heating unit such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided, if the user selects it, the cooking device 1 side notifies the user. , Correction (moving the object to be heated such as a pot to another heating unit) should be performed.

In the first embodiment, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, there are two routes: an internal route passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113, and an external route passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There was one, but you can replace this route and change it as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path that cools the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air sucked by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air inlet 152F, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and reaches the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: The heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air inlet 152B, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally to the exhaust duct 102 .

In general, the heat radiating section 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat radiating plates (radiating fins) are stacked, and cooling air passes through the narrow spaces between the heat radiating plates to exchange heat (radiate heat). Therefore, the cooling air pressure loss is large. In other words, airflow resistance is large.
Therefore, the cooling air passing through the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 is exhausted without entering the heating chamber 113 (the length of the air path is also shortened), thereby balancing the internal path and the external path. is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. In other words, as described in the first embodiment, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, so that the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced. It is one promising proposal for

After cooling the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 is abolished, and the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 is used as it is. The cooling air passage inside the lower unit 200 may be simplified by discharging to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the duct 307 . By reducing the airflow resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as being advantageous in terms of cost.

In the case of users who do not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in Embodiments 1 to 4, the sales of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and the installation work on the kitchen furniture 2 are performed separately. Become. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if a packing form for selling the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as a set and a packing form for selling only the upper unit 100 are separately set, the convenience at the time of sale is impaired. never.

In the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure, it is not essential to configure the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 in separate housings, as shown in the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured from one housing (body case HC) from the beginning.

In Embodiments 1 to 4, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are made of thin metal plates. However, one or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be made of a plastic material. For example, it may be made of a thermoplastic plastic material. One material example is PET or PA, PP or ABS, or the like. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. "PA" means polyamide, and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be determined in consideration of heat resistance temperature and durability as a structure. Moreover, only a part of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be made of plastic, and the remaining parts may be made of a metal plate material.

The induction heating circuit may employ various driving methods such as a half-bridge circuit, a full-bridge circuit, etc., depending on the form and number of the IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, full bridge circuits are proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 617h23.

In addition, the IH coil is not limited to a doughnut-shaped shape. , a flat first sub-heating coil and a flat second sub-heating coil having a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when induction heating is started, even if the heating power is not set, the induction heating operation is started under the default conditions (heating power value and heating power level), and then the user decides the desired heating power. I used a method of operation. However, a method other than this method may be used. For example, after turning on the main power supply, be sure to determine the target induction heating source, thermal power value (watt), and thermal power level (one of the stages such as thermal power "large" to "small"), and then enter the specified An operation method of issuing a start command using a key or the like may be adopted, and such a method does not affect the effects and essential effects of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower air passages during microwave heating are air passages (internal passages) for the cooling air that cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and for cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air passages (external passages) for cooling air, and these two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then through a common exhaust port 20 to heat. It was discharged to the outside of the cooker 1.

However, it is not necessary to do so via a single (common) exhaust duct, nor to collect the exhaust flow to a single exhaust port 20 . For example, a second exhaust port separate from the exhaust port 20 is provided at a different position (a position directly below the exhaust cover 19), and from the second exhaust port, cooling air is directed to either the internal route or the external route. You may make it exhaust. In particular, in the form (embodiment 1) in which the partition plate 52 partitions the rear portion of the upper unit 100 into the front and rear, it is preferable that the exhaust port faces the gap GP1 formed on the rear side of the partition plate 52 .

In Embodiment 1, the operation keys 98 of the main power switch 97 are arranged on the input operation section 40 (including the operation keys 98) exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and can be operated from above the main body case HC. It was in the form of Although the operation key 98 is sometimes called an operation button, it basically has the same structure.

However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to such a form of the input operation unit 40 at all. For example, the input operation unit 40 need not always be exposed when viewed from above the body case HC, and may be stored inside the body case HC when not in use. Conventionally known forms of storage include those that move horizontally, such as drawers, and those that rotate around a single fulcrum.

The method of rotating and storing is called the operation part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2004-28569, 2004-3845, and 3-2h26. It is Also, the main power switch 97 may be a seesaw type switch as disclosed in JP-A-2004-3845.

Even the input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored in this way can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC when in use. That is, since the user can turn on the main power source of the heating cooker 1 while standing near the front of the heating cooker 1, there is no problem in realizing the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the operability is good without forcing the user to take an unreasonable posture.
The input operation unit 40 that is rotated and retracted in this manner may be provided on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment, for example.

In addition, a kangaroo pocket mechanism that has a heating part (gas burner, etc.) exposed (facing) on the top plate and a heating part of the heating chamber (grilling chamber), and rotates and stores each operation part. A heating cooker employing the operation unit of is also proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172941.

In Embodiments 1 to 4, an example in which a magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122 has been described, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a heating cooker using a semiconductor oscillator has been proposed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-509587, the microwave generator includes a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level, and from this small signal generator a solid-state radio-frequency signal amplifier (one or more) for amplifying the radio-frequency signal of the . The solid-state amplifier then amplifies the first high frequency signal having the first low power level to a second high frequency signal having the second high power level and supplies it to the heating chamber containing the food to be cooked (food). was
When realizing the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generation source configured with such a semiconductor device may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100 . That is, it has been explained that when the induction heating source 9 is used, the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated. However, this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third, fourth) cooling fans 128, 129 are never operated at the same time.

For example, as described in FIG. 38 of Embodiment 1, all the cooling fans are turned off for a short time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 in FIG. 38) before selecting the heating source to be used. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the integrated control unit MC checks whether abnormal currents or voltages are generated in the circuit after trial operation only, and in this case, each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, and 129 may be activated all at once, or may be sequentially activated one by one for a short period of time. Even in this way, the essential effects of the present disclosure are not lost.

In Embodiment 1, the user had to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 74, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL is selected by the input key 43M2.
However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require such a step of selecting a heating unit.

For example, in Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852,
A plurality of heating coils arranged regularly so as to be adjacent to each other under a top plate on which an object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the heating coils, and a heating target directly above the heating coils. An object placement determination unit for determining whether an object is placed, an input operation unit provided on the upper surface of the main body, and a control device,
The control device displays the object to be heated in the display area of the display screen based on the result that the object to be heated placement determination unit determines that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil. to display the number of icons corresponding to
The control device detects that the user touches the first icon corresponding to the first object to be heated, and operates so that the cooking conditions for the first object to be heated can be input. An induction cooker is disclosed.

Also, in Japanese Patent No. 5202064,
A top plate on which an object to be heated such as a pot is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils distributed below the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, and a predetermined area near the top plate. Continuously arranged band-shaped operation display means and control means,
The control means identifies a occupied area on the top plate of the object to be heated based on the output of the sensor, and further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the identified occupied area and its peripheral area. Identifying the area of the object to be heated, estimating the center position and size of the identified occupied area, displaying the operating means in the specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result, and enabling the operating means An induction cooker is disclosed that allows access by external operation by

In other words, instead of placing an object to be heated such as a pot on a specific position of the top plate for cooking, the object to be heated can be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate and the position of the heated portion can be controlled. A technique has been proposed in which the device can detect and start cooking.

The technique as described above can also be applied to the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure. That is, it is not necessary to display the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L, which indicate that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side, on the first specific screen 30SP as described in the first embodiment. .

In addition, the operation of first selecting either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL using the input key 43M2 becomes unnecessary, and the usability can be further improved.

Further, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiments 1 to 7, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, etc. for multifunctionality. Therefore, there is a concern that a user who is not accustomed to the operation cannot easily perform the desired operation.
Therefore, for a user who does not want to use all the functions from the beginning, the number of input operation units 40 can be reduced by turning off the display of the input key itself and invalidating the input function of the input key by operating a specific switch. A form in which such a visual effect is expected may be used. Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771 has already proposed a heating cooker that limits the functions that can be used according to the user's wishes.

Also, either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode may be set so as not to be used by the user's operation. In that case, the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment may be used for setting, or an input key or a push button switch may be provided that allows the function to be limited and expanded simply by the user's touch.

Of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being automatically performed can also be performed manually. All or part of the processes described as being performed manually can also be performed automatically by known methods.

In the first to fourth embodiments, there are two induction heating units 17H, a left heating unit 17HL and a right heating unit 17HR, and inverter circuits 81L and 81R are also arranged one by one corresponding to these two heating units. However, it may be modified as follows.
(1) A method of coordinating and driving the IH coils of the two adjacent heating units when heating a large object that straddles two adjacent heating units (as a representative example, a Japanese patent See No. 5,188,215).

(2) four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size and wound in the same direction below the top plate 15 and arranged close to each other in substantially the same plane below the top plate; and two inverter circuits that supply power to the IH coils, dividing the four IH coils into two coil groups (groups), from the two inverter circuits to each of the two IH coil groups A method of supplying power to each (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (a plurality of) auxiliary IH coils arranged to surround the circular IH coil. A method comprising a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coil group (see Japanese Patent No. 5257542 as a representative) .

(4) a sub-IH coil group consisting of a main IH coil for heating an object placed on the top plate and a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other outside the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit for supplying a high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group for independently supplying a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils; the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; To-be-heated object placement determination unit for determining whether or not the same object to be heated is placed on at least one of the secondary IH coils, and the outputs of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group and an energization control circuit, wherein a plurality of the sub IH coils are provided at predetermined intervals with a predetermined insulating space around the main IH coil, and the outer diameter shape of the sub IH coil is The side edge portion adjacent to the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit controls the main inverter so that the thermal power value set by the user. The output of the circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled to a predetermined distribution to perform a cooperative heating operation. In this case, a method of maintaining the output distribution before the change (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5642168).

Each circuit, part, and component of the device shown in the figure is functionally conceptual, and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the figure. Furthermore, the integrated controller MC, microwave heating controller 130, heating chamber controller 159, and display drive circuit 63 described in FIGS. The specific forms are not limited to those shown in the drawings, and all or part of them can be configured by functionally or physically distributing and integrating them in arbitrary units according to functions, operating conditions, and the like.

Each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is implemented by a processing circuit. A processing circuit that implements each function may be dedicated hardware, or may be a processor that executes a program stored in a memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated controller MC and the IH controller 90 is implemented by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. Software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device MM, which is a memory. The processor implements each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the integrated controller MC and the IH controller 90 . Note that the storage device MM is typically non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, and EEPROM.

Furthermore, part of the data and programs in the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. In this case, the heating cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63, which are described particularly with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update to an improved version as appropriate. In this case, the modification program may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49, for example.

One heating part 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) for cooking on the top plate 15 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow rate valve is configured to be controlled by the controller.
Also, the induction heating source 9, microwave heating source 189, or oven heating source 188 may be replaced by a gas-fired burner.

In Embodiments 1 to 4, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R are all "contact input" operation units in which the user touches input keys to issue an input command. , but a non-contact method in which the movement of the user's finger or hand is detected and input in a non-contact manner may also be used. Furthermore, the voice input method may be changed to input by recognizing the user's voice. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving section for receiving the user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation section.

In Embodiments 1 to 4, the means for selecting various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP and the third specific screen 30ST is the input operation unit 40. , may be provided in the display screens of the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 30L and 30R.

For example, in the Japanese Patent No. 5833699, which proposes compound cooking, a display screen of compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu of compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the menu selection part is displayed by the user. A technique of selecting a menu by touching it directly with a finger has been proposed.

Therefore, in the first specific screen 30SC and the second specific screen 30SP, the menu of cooking possible in the combined cooking and the cooperative cooking mode, the name of the food to be cooked (one type of identification information), etc. are displayed, and the display part ( The user may directly touch the "icon" portion) with a finger to select the menu or the like of the cooperative cooking mode.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives a command signal transmitted from the outside of the heating cooker 1, and the heating cooker 1 transmits each operation signal and the command signals L1 to L10 to the outside. However, information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, such as the start and end, may also be transmitted. The user can know the progress information through the portable terminal device 418 or the like, which improves convenience.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 exchanges command signals, driving operation signals, etc. with the home gateway 411 inside the house HA. ) can be used.

In addition, in Embodiment 1, home gateway 411 having a function of receiving search result data of inventory information of refrigerator 401 was used as an information management device. communication network) 416 and connect to an external server 417 via the Internet 416 . In that case, the external server 417 may store and hold the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 .

Furthermore, the external server 417 is made to hold recipe information of various cooking that can be used in the heating cooker 1 . Then, in response to a request from the heating cooker 1 or the information communication terminal device 418, the system searches for recipe information and provides the extracted recipe information to the heating cooker 1 or the information communication terminal device 418. can be

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of claims.

The heating cooker according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in the kitchens of general houses, but also in the kitchens of public facilities, shops, and the like.

1 heating cooker 2 kitchen furniture 2A installation opening 2B front opening 2G stepped portion 2P mouth edge upper surface 2S right side surface 3 surface material 4 surface material 5 surface material 6 surface material 7 frame line 8 wall 9 induction heating source 10 body of upper unit 11 partition member (partition wall)
12 partition plate 13 partition plate 14 partition wall 15 top plate 16 upper case (upper housing)
16A flange 16B rear vertical wall 16BL auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX horizontal bent portion 16F front vertical wall 16L side vertical wall 16R side vertical wall 16S bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C coil base (coil support frame)
17CH arm 17CL coil wire 17H induction heating section 17HL left heating section (second heating section)
17HM Central heating section 17HR Right heating section (first heating section)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 opening 19 exhaust cover 20 exhaust port 21 decorative frame 22 reinforcing plate 23 right input control device 24 left input control device 25 decorative frame 26 cushion material 27 light emitting display 27L light emitting display 27M light emitting display 27R light emitting display 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light-emitting section 27M1-27M6 Individual light-emitting section 27R1-27R5 Individual light-emitting section 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display section (central display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation 30G Caution 30H Recommendation 30J Specific text 30K Heat source display 30L First area 30M Second area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Character information (additional information)
30R Third area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Output level information 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display section
31L left side display (individual display)
31LW display window 31R right display section (individual display section)
31RW display window 32 central operation board 33 rectifier circuit 34 power supply circuit A
35 rectifier circuit 36 power supply circuit B
37L drive circuit 37R drive circuit 38 exhaust window 39A signal line 39B signal line 40 input operation unit 40L left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal reception unit 40VS Audio signal analysis unit 40R Right operation unit (first individual operation unit)
41 operation board
41L Left side touch key board 41R Right side touch key board 42 Input keys 43L1 to 43L4 Input keys 43M1 Input keys 43M2 Input keys 43M3 Input keys (guide keys)
43KP Entry Keys 43L1-43L4 Entry Keys 43M1-43R3 Entry Keys 43MC Entry Key 43MS Entry Key (Start)
43MT input key (end part)
43R1 to 43R4 Input key 43MX Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 holder 51 screw 52 partition plate 52A exhaust window 52B exhaust window 53L exhaust port plate 53R exhaust port plate 54 filter circuit board 55 power supply circuit board 56 choke coil 57 transformer 58 capacitor 59 diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 first cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A air outlet 60C fan case 60F rotor 60FL cooling air 60H inlet 60M motor 60P drive circuit 60T rotary shaft 61 second cooling fan 61A air outlet 61C fan case 61F rotor 61M motor 61P drive circuit 62 cooling fan drive circuit 63 display unit Drive circuit 63CS Display command unit (for second specific screen)
63SP display command unit (for first specific screen)
63ST Display command section (for the 3rd specific screen)
64 Vent
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Magnetic shield ring 67L Thermal power indicator 67H Thermal indicator 67R Thermal indicator 68 Heating source indicator 68L Indicator 68M Indicator 68R Indicator 69 High temperature indicator 70 Cover 70A Front notch 70B Drooping Wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control unit (demand control unit)
73 signal transmission unit 74 drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 resonance capacitor 76m resonance capacitor 77a input current detection unit 77am input current detection unit 77b output current detection unit 77bm output current detection unit 78a diode bridge 78am diode bridge 78b reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing capacitor 78cm Smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBTs
79bm IGBT
79c diode 79cm diode 79d diode 79dm diode 80 inverter circuit board 80F first inverter circuit board 80M second inverter circuit board 81 inverter circuit 81L inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 heat sink 82B heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 heatsink (rear first heatsink)
82B2 heat sink (back second heat sink)
82F heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 heatsink (front first heatsink)
82F2 heatsink (second heatsink in front)
82FN Radiation fin 82M Heat sink 82MF Radiation fin 82MF1 Radiation fin 82MF2 Radiation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensing device 85 Electric component 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Ventilation hole 87B Drainage hole 88 Inner case 88A Ventilation hole 88B Hole 89 Insertion Hole 90 IH control section 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power conversion section 93 Temperature detection circuit (abnormality detection section)
94L induction heating circuit 94R induction heating circuit 95 speech synthesizer 95S speaker 96 clock circuit 97 main power switch 98 main power switch operation button or operation key 99 commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 upper unit 101 lower case (lower housing)
101A flange 101B rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C inclined portion 101F front plate 101H body portion 101U bottom plate 101L side vertical wall 101R side vertical wall 101T front horizontal wall 102 exhaust duct 102A internal passage 102B internal passage 102E end portion 104 cavity 105 control device 106 power cord 106A plug 108A connection mouth (Connecting terminal)
108B connection port (connection terminal)
109A output terminal portion 109B output terminal portion 109C output terminal portion 110 main body 111 inclined portion 112 front cover 112P mounting leg 113 heating chamber 113A opening 113B back wall (rear wall surface)
113T recess 114 door 115 handle 117 through hole (guide hole)
118 connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power circuit unit 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillating section 122H Heat radiating section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotating shaft 127 Power circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan A)
129 fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 microwave heating control unit 131 door open/close detection mechanism 132A latch switch 132B door switch 133 monitor switch 134 pin 135 pin 136A interlocking rod 136B interlocking rod 137 support plate 138A communication port 138B communication port 139 closure detection unit 140 oven heating device 141 space ( ceiling space)
142 space (side space)
145 saucer 150 case A
151 Case B
152B intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A lid body 154B main body 158 non-contact temperature measuring section (infrared temperature measuring section)
159 heating chamber control unit 160 temperature sensor 161 detection window 162 cooking plate 163 heater 163A upper heater 163B lower heater 164 vent (first intake port)
165 recess (air intake duct)
166L left partition plate 166R right partition plate 167 upper heat shield plate 168 lower heat shield plate 169 upper case 170 lower case 171 partition plate 172 passage 173 communication port 174 communication port 176 hinge 178A relay 178B relay 180 feeding port 181 cover 182 relay 184 Seal Material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 microwave heating source 190 frame 191 cover 192 inner frame 192W viewing window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 226 Leg 264 Air vent 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right space (third space)
301L left gap (third gap)
302 front gap (third gap)
303 Air gap 304 Support fitting 304V Vertical portion 304H Horizontal portion (flange portion)
305 vent hole 306 communication window 307 exhaust duct 308 vertical portion 309 communication window 310 spacer (cushion material)
311 lower gap (third gap)
320 exhaust port 326 cushion material 330 identification information 331 additional information 332 cooking process information (display section of cooking process)
333 Time saving information 334 Refrigerator display unit 335D symbol 335U symbol 336D symbol 336U symbol 337 Display guide unit 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual ingredient information 400 Home appliance 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air cleaner 405 Ventilator 406 Electric rice cooker (Electric jar rice cooker)
408 Microwave Oven 409 Lighting Fixture 410 Kitchen 411 Home Gateway 412 Body Case 413 Environmental Detector 413A Sensor 413H Human Detector 414 Electricity Meter 415 Power Line (Main Line)
416 Wide area communication network 417 External server 418 Information communication terminal equipment 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Suction port 426 Electric fan 429 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 Suction port 433 Air outlet 434 odor sensor 435 communication unit 436 vertical wall surface 440 temperature monitoring device 441 temperature detection unit 442 communication unit 443 temperature determination circuit 444 light receiving unit 445 alarm device 446 communication unit (transmitting unit/receiving unit)
447 Central control unit 448 Electric energy control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environment sensor AH Upper air passage AL Exposure range of top plate AN Reporting unit BL Straight line (reference line)
BH Depth BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Front-back maximum dimension of upper case D6 Front-back maximum width dimension D7 Opposing distance DP1 Depth (dimension)
EM Abnormality detection unit F1 First air passage F2 Second air passage FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI Entrance FL1 Outlet line FL2 Outlet line FO Outlet GD1 Step GP1 Gap GP2 Gap (first gap)
GP5L Gap GP5R Gap GP6 Gap GP7 Gap GP8 Gap GP9 Gap GP10 Gap GP11 Gap GP12 Gap (Second Gap)
GP13 Gap between top plate and cover GP14 Gap between first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Gap GP18 Gap HC Body case H1 Maximum height H2 Height H3 Height H4 Height H5 Height H6 Height Dimension H7 Height dimension H8 Height dimension HA House HB Base bottom HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selected value signal IP4 Selected value signal IP5 Image signal JC Human detection sensor LA Projection dimension LD1 Distance LD2 Distance LF Exhaust port dimension MC Integrated control unit MM Storage device N Object to be heated QC Vibration sensor RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air passage W1 Width of installation opening W2 Maximum width of installation space W3 Maximum width of cooker W4 Maximum width in horizontal direction Dimension W5 Maximum lateral width of the upper case W6 Length of the inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of the inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum lateral width of the inner side of the upper case W9 Spacing between hanging walls 70B dimensions)
W10 Distance W11 Diameter W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation interval WB Depth dimension WH Inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB Intersection XF Intersection XG Intersection.

Claims (30)

the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has a function of executing a linked cooking mode that links the first heating means and the second heating means,
The linked cooking mode is for executing a cooking process 1 by the first heating means and a cooking process 2 by the second heating means,
The control unit
(1) receiving an input from the shared operation unit and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed according to commands from the individual operation unit;
(3) during the cooking step 1, disable some or all of the input functions for the second heating means in the common operating unit;
(4) when the cooking step 1 is finished, reviving the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are executed according to instructions from the shared operation unit.
A heating cooker characterized by: The second heating means consists of a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles,
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit with a plurality of the heat sources of the second heating means, and automatically advances cooking. a combined cooking mode that allows
The control unit selects one of the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to an input on the shared operation unit.
The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized by: The notification unit has an integrated display unit corresponding to the shared operation unit and an individual display unit corresponding to the individual operation unit,
The control section displays the cooking process information including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display section from before the start of the cooking process 1, and continues the display until the cooking process 2 ends. do,
The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized by: further comprising a door for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber,
The control unit has a function of detecting opening and closing of the door,
The control unit restores the input function for the second heating means in the shared operation unit when it is detected that the cooking process 1 has ended and the door has been closed after the end of the cooking process 1. let
The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized by: The heating unit has a first heating unit and a second heating unit separated in the left-right direction,
The individual operation unit has a first individual operation unit corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit corresponding to the second heating unit.
The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized by: The common operation unit includes an input key for selecting a cooking menu in the linked cooking mode, and an input key for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected with the input key,
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking step 1, the input function of the input key is disabled.
The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized by: The second heating means includes a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source that heats the heating chamber,
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , characterized in that: The shared operation unit includes a start unit that shifts to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode, and an end unit that cancels the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , characterized in that: The main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space,
An upper cooling fan is arranged in the upper space to introduce outside air without passing through the lower space and pass the cooling air,
A lower cooling fan is arranged in the lower space to introduce outside air without passing through the upper space and pass the cooling air,
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan,
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 7 , characterized in that: the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the first heating means,
The control unit has a function of executing a linked cooking mode that links the first heating means and the second heating means,
The linked cooking mode is for executing a cooking step 1 by the second heating means and a cooking step 2 by the first heating means,
The control unit
(1) receiving an input from the shared operation unit and selecting the cooperative cooking mode;
(2) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed according to commands from the shared operation unit;
(3) disable some or all of the input functions in the individual operation unit during the cooking process 1;
(4) when the cooking step 1 is finished, reviving the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit;
(5) The start and end of the cooking process 2 are executed according to instructions from the individual operation unit.
A heating cooker characterized by: The second heating means consists of a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles,
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit with a plurality of the heat sources of the second heating means, and automatically advances cooking. and a combined cooking mode that allows
The control unit selects one of the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to an input from the shared operation unit.
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: The notification unit has an integrated display unit corresponding to the shared operation unit and an individual display unit corresponding to the individual operation unit,
The control unit displays the cooking process information including the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the integrated display unit before the cooking process 1 starts, and continues the display until the cooking process 2 ends. ,
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: further comprising a door for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber,
The control unit has a function of detecting opening and closing of the door,
The control unit restores the input function for the first heating means in the individual operation unit when it is detected that the cooking process 1 is completed and the door is opened after the completion time. let
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: The heating unit has a first heating unit and a second heating unit separated in the left-right direction,
The individual operation unit has a first individual operation unit corresponding to the first heating unit and a second individual operation unit corresponding to the second heating unit.
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: The common operation unit includes an input key for selecting a cooking menu in the linked cooking mode, and an input key for selecting a control condition corresponding to the cooking menu selected with the input key,
During the period from the start to the end of the cooking step 2, the input function of the input key is disabled.
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: The second heating means includes a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source that heats the heating chamber,
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: The shared operation unit includes a start unit for shifting to the operation of the cooperative cooking mode, and an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode.
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 10 to 15 , characterized in that: The main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space,
An upper cooling fan is arranged in the upper space to introduce outside air without passing through the lower space and pass the cooling air,
A lower cooling fan is arranged in the lower space to introduce outside air without passing through the upper space and pass the cooling air,
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan,
The heating cooker according to claim 10 , characterized in that: the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed above the heating unit;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a notification unit for providing information about cooking;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has a common operation unit and an individual operation unit for the heating unit,
The control unit has an operation program for a cooperative cooking mode that drives the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The cooperative cooking mode has a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2, a first cooperative cooking mode using the first heating means for the cooking process 1, and a cooking process 1 for the cooking process 1. a second coordinated cooking mode using the second heating means ;
In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode,
(1) selecting the cooperative cooking mode and determining to start the cooking process 1 in the shared operation unit;
(2) When the cooking process 2 is performed by the first heating means, the cooking process 2 is completed by the individual operation unit, and the cooking process 2 is performed by the second heating means. If there is, use the common operation unit
A heating cooker characterized by: The shared operation unit includes an end unit for canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2,
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: The shared operation unit includes an input key for selecting the linked cooking mode and an input key for deciding to start the cooking process 1,
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: The notification unit includes an integrated display unit that performs a display operation when the common operation unit is operated, and an individual display unit that performs a display operation related to the operation of the individual operation unit.
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: In the shared operation unit, part or all of the input functions of the individual operation unit are restricted while the operation for selecting the linked cooking mode is being performed.
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: At the stage when the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode is started by the individual operation part, the common operation part restricts input for new cooking using the second heating means. to be
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: The control unit notifies information of the end of the cooking process 1 or preparation for the cooking process 2 by the reporting unit before the time when the cooking process 1 ends, and then heats by the end of the cooking process 1. transition to a rest period,
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: The second heating means includes a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source that heats the heating chamber,
The control unit can control the microwave heating source and the oven heating source independently of each other.
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 19 to 25, characterized in that: The main body is divided into an upper space and a lower space,
An upper cooling fan is arranged in the upper space to introduce outside air without passing through the lower space and pass the cooling air,
A lower cooling fan is arranged in the lower space to introduce outside air without passing through the upper space and pass the cooling air,
The control unit is cooled by the upper cooling fan,
The heating cooker according to claim 19 , characterized by: the main body;
a heating chamber formed inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated placed on the upper surface of the main body;
a second heating means for cooking in the heating chamber;
a reporting unit that provides information;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the notification unit;
and an input operation unit that gives a command to the control unit,
The input operation unit has an individual operation unit dedicated to the first heating means and a common operation unit for the second heating means and the first heating means,
The control unit has an operation program for a cooperative preheating cooking mode that drives the first heating means and the second heating means in a predetermined order,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode includes a preheating step of preheating the object to be heated by the second heating means, a cooking step 1 of cooking by the second heating means following the preheating step, and the cooking step 1. and a cooking step 2 in which the object to be heated used in the cooking step 1 is moved above the heating unit of the first heating means to further heat the object to be cooked,
The cooperative preheating cooking mode is
(1) selecting the linked preheating cooking mode and deciding to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 in the shared operation unit;
(2) the end of the preheating step and the start and end of the cooking step 1 are performed by the shared operation unit;
(3) the start and end of the cooking process 1 are performed by the shared operation unit;
(4) The start and end of the cooking step 2 are performed by the individual operation unit.
A heating cooker characterized by: The second heating means consists of a plurality of heating sources using different heating principles,
The control unit combines a single cooking mode using the first heating means selected by the individual operation unit with a plurality of the heat sources of the second heating means, and automatically advances cooking. a combined cooking mode that allows
The control unit selects either one of the single cooking mode and the combined cooking mode according to an input from the shared operation unit.
The heating cooker according to claim 28 , characterized by: The first heating means is an induction heating source,
The second heating means includes a microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber and an oven heating source that heats the heating chamber.
30. The heating cooker according to claim 28 or 29 , characterized in that:

Images